Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Mai is twelve years old, and her world is burning to the ground.

Mai is twelve. She has no siblings, no cousins, no other family her age. All she has is a father and uncle she doesn’t know and a mother she would like to know a little less.

She knows she should think herself lucky. After all, she is the sole heir to an immensely wealthy family in the greatest nation in the world. 

But people like to look at the wealthy children, point and say, “if you work hard enough maybe your kids will be like that,” and “I wish I was like that,” without thinking about all of the pressure that wealthy children are put under. All the training and harsh punishments and masks they have to perfect in order to make sure they and all under their care don’t become more fuel for the war machine.

Her mother told her that placing such responsibilities on her shoulders was necessary; that a diamond is never formed by a soft hand. 

Mai would rather be a boulder than a diamond.

Boulders are rough around the edges. Messy. If Mai was a boulder, she wouldn’t have to fulfill all of the tasks of a diamond. She wouldn’t have to hide her emotions when her parents told her to befriend the sociopath masquerading as the princess. She wouldn’t have to accept the invitation to tea that Princess Azula gifts her a year into their acquaintance. She wouldn’t bite her tongue until it bled whenever Azula burned a servant because they didn't address her correctly. 

If Mai was a boulder, she never would have met Prince Zuko.

Prince Zuko, who is a year older than her, two years older than his sister, and kinder than anyone she’s ever met. Prince Zuko, who likes to feed the turtleducks and doesn’t ask questions when he sees her hide from Azula and Ty Lee because she needs a break. Zuko, please just call me Zuko, who rambles about theater scrolls and sees through her mask of indifference and straight to her heart. Zuko, who upon being told that her parents want them to marry, just shrugged and told her, “At least I know I don’t hate you and you don’t hate me.” Whose words should have sounded like indifference, but when she heard them and the tone of his voice and the look in his eyes, she knew exactly what he meant. 

“Yeah. I don’t hate you either.”

Zuko, her best friend, the one person in the world that she doesn’t dislike, is burning.

Mai’s world is burning. 

And Azula is staring on with a smile on her lips.

And the Fire Lord has a look of satisfaction on his face.

And General Iroh isn’t there to stop it. General Iroh is off somewhere, claimed he wouldn’t be back in the capital for another two months. General Iroh had said he was going to play in a Pai Sho tournament in the colonies to boost morale and remind the peasants who were in charge.

Mai’s world is burning, and she knows she’s the only one who can douse the flames.

*****

Zuko and Mai had a game they liked to play when they were alone together. 

When it was just the two of them, they would hide and sneak around the palace, hunting for random items. A meat bun from the kitchens. A spool of thread from the seamstress’s office. A jewel from the vaults of the Fire Lord. The only rules were no sabotage and don’t get caught.

They played the game a lot. 

And when you play such a game in a grand, centuries-old palace? You find things. Things like secret passages. Secret passages that allow Mai to scurry throughout the palace unnoticed. 

Her parents accept her excuse of being too distraught to play royal court and allow her to head back to their city home. Once there, Mai put on a show for the servants and threw a temper tantrum, barring herself in her room. Then she started packing. 

Mai had experience hiding weapons in her clothes, and she went all out now. She slid on her spring-loaded gloves and carefully added her senbon needles. Knives were placed up her sleeves, and her pair of sai soon followed. Once the weapons she would actively need were well hidden, Mai moved onto the extras that she would carry with her.

More knives and shuriken were sewed into her dress, and two tessen were placed on her hip. Even if such preparation was overkill, Mai didn’t particularly care. If all went as planned, there was no telling when she’d be able to get a hold of such finely crafted weapons again. Better to have than to have want, right?

Weapons secured, Mai snuck down to the servants’ pantry and found the two biggest, unpatched packs that she could find. She filled one with her clothes, extra weapons, and knife kit. Seeing that there was still room left in the bag, she threw in a few servant’s uniforms and some nonperishables. The other she added more rations to and swiped a few boy uniforms to fill in the extra space.

Now came the tricky part.

Fully loaded down with the two packs, Mai was careful to make sure she was unseen as she made her way down to the city docks. There she found an old admiral’s fishing boat and loaded the supplies onboard. She checked over what the man already had stocked up on, and made sure she didn’t need to steal anything else. After double-checking the fishing line, rope, blankets, and medical supplies, Mai untethered the boat and slowly drifted away from the port.

*****

If Taiyou didn’t know that there was no way in and out of the royal vaults, he would have sworn that he could have heard the clanging of gold on gold behind him.

“Don’t you dare,” said Himawari, his partner on guard for the night, “It’s illegal to enter the vaults unsupervised, and if the captain comes by, she’ll have both our heads for theft from the crown.”

“She’ll have both our heads anyways if she finds out something was stolen on our watch.”

Himawari pouted at Taiyou’s answer as another sound, this time one of something large being dragged and shoved came from the vaults.

Taiyou looked at Himawari.

Himawari looked back.

“Fine,” she said in exasperation, “I’ll go get the captain. But don’t blame me when she makes you wake before Agni’s in the sky just because you wasted her time on the normal creaks and moans of an old castle.”

Himawari left Taiyou to his post and the obvious sounds of theft coming from the chamber behind him.

By the time Himawari returned to her post with Captain Izumi in tow, the sounds had stopped. The captain opens up the doors and the three meticulously count every copper.

Not a single artifact is unaccounted for, every tightly packed roll of coins is in place, and there are no obvious signs of disturbance.

“Mayhaps a review of protocol is in order?” said the captain.

Himawari and Taiyou groaned and exited the vaults, completely unaware of the masked girl sneaking away under their feet, glad that her rolls of chocolate coins made acceptable stand-ins.

*****

Jino knew she was being jumpy and unreasonable. Prince Zuko was healing in a set of private chambers, and wouldn’t be in his room tonight. But still, she swore she heard the sound of rustling coming from the prince’s rooms.

Gathering her nerves, Jino opened the bedroom door and glanced around. Nothing seemed out of place. The prince had no personal items of note and the wardrobe and bed remained untouched. Taking one last glance around, Jino exited the room and closed the door, blaming her suspicions on the anxiety over the prince’s survival.

As soon as the door closed, a small body jumped down from the rafters and resumed her job of prying up floorboards. The figure swore to herself as she finally found her prizes. Nearly caught by a maid. She was off her game tonight.

Pulling the dao blades, theater mask, Earth Kingdom knife, and scrolls out of their hiding spot, the figure slipped out the window and made her way back across the forest grounds to her get-away boat.

One more job left in the palace.

*****

“The prince is dead, your highness,” reported Master Hikari to the Fire Lord.

“Complications with the burn?” the man barely acknowledged the master healer with a moose-shark’s grin.

“Not exactly, my lord,” the healer shifted from foot to foot, “The prince’s body was found decapitated in his room. His head is still missing.”

Fire Lord Ozai paused for a moment in surprise, “Are you certain it is the prince?”

“There were guards placed at the single door to the room and there are no windows. An investigation will occur to see how an assassin could have entered unnoticed, but it is most definitely the prince’s body. The body type matches that of Prince Zuko.”
“Very well,” said the Fire Lord, “Keep the reason of death quiet. Such actions will only alert the murderer.”

“Yes, my lord,” Fire Lord Ozai dismissed the healer and relaxed, alone in the throne room. 

Ozai smiled to himself. He would have to write himself a reminder. If the assassin was ever caught, he should buy the good citizen a nice bottle of sake. They just fixed a measly problem that he now wouldn’t have to deal with.

And who knows. Maybe the shinobi would be willing to go Dragon hunting.

*****

Across the palace grounds, a girl dressed in a spirit mask desperately tried to keep her companion moving forward.

The boy, also dressed in a spirit mask, was barely lucid as the two made their way to the sailboat.

“Why’ya smell like blood, Mai?” slurred the boy, “Are ya’ hurt? I don’t like it when you’re hurt.”

“I’m fine, Zuko,” said Mai, nearly sighing in relief when she caught sight of the boat, “Just the after-effects of visiting the morgue and finding a body to replace yours. Defacing a corpse is a gruesome task, but it’s one I’ll gladly do again so long as you live. Please live, Zuko. Please.”

“I’ll try.”

“That’s all I ask.”

The girl loaded the boy onto the boat and pulled the masks off their faces, “I’m going to give you some pain killers. I don’t expect you to remember much, but if you do, know that we’ve got one more stop to make and then we can sail across the island chain and land in the colonies. We’ll figure things out from there.”

“‘M sorry. Don’t -- ya’ don’t deserve this. Shouldn’ta’ve spoken out of turn.”

“It’s not your fault, Zuko. You did the right thing.”

Mai laid Zuko out comfortably on the deck and made him sip on some water mixed with a few drops of opium. After making sure he was comfortable and half-way asleep, she adjusted their course and sailed.

One more stop to make, and then they’ll be free.

*****

Ukano silently read his daughter’s letter while his wife wailed in the background.

He knew Mai had always been weak-willed and unwilling to see the bigger picture. His daughter was too sentimental. Too close to the wrong heir. 

Mai had been a trusted companion of Princess Azula. One of only two girls the princess ever regarded with a hint of trust. If Mai had tried to cultivate that trust like the other girl, Ty Lin? No, that was her sister. Ty Lee. Yes, if Mai had cultivated that trust like Ty Lee, then she would have brought herself and her family up in the world. But no, Mai squandered her chance with Princess Azula in favor of sticking close to the unfavored heir. 

Mai was a weak failure of a daughter, and her dramatic reaction at seeing the prince die proved it.

“Poor Mai,” cried Michi, still dramatically weeping, “To go to such lengths to be with her beloved again.”

Ukano tightened his fist around his daughter’s words, the phrase, “ I’m sorry, but I love Zuko more than I fear death,” peaking out at him, “It doesn’t matter now. The girl was a fool. If she wanted to throw herself at the mercy of the water savages’ spirits, then so be it. She disgraced herself and this family. She is nothing to us now.”

“How can you say that,” his wife screeched, “How can you say that about your daughter ? She deserved a proper cremation and death ceremony. Not a watery grave at the bottom of the ocean.”

The argument between Ukon and Michi dissolved from there. Their fight will continue for months, as will the search for their daughter's corpse. Neither will realize until years later that there was no corpse to find.

*****

Mai changed the position of the sail and let herself relax. 

Even if she was an experienced sailor like every other child her age (you don't live your entire life on an island chain without mastering some ocean survival skills), she appreciated the calm tides and the favorable winds. If she and Zuko were to escape safely, they would have to cover as much ground tonight as possible. If she, or even worse, Zuko were recognized….

"Don't think of that right now," Mai thought to herself, glancing at her friend, who was asleep and breathing evenly, "You are fine. Zuko is fine. We're both safer now than we ever were before. You just have to get Zuko to a good healer, and….and…."

And then what?

She hadn't planned this far. Mai had half expected to get caught. If not by her family's servants, then by the guards when she stole a small fortune out of the royal vaults. If not by the guards, then by the servant who stumbled into the prince's room when she ransacked it. If not the maid, then the gardeners who would have seen her trek across the royal grounds three separate times. If not the gardeners, then the fishermen who would have seen her escape.

But no, it somehow turned out alright. She had saved Zuko. They would both live, and they would be happy. 

But where?

The mainland wasn't an option. They were too recognizable. If they were found, it would mean death for treason or whatever excuse the crown came up with. 

The colonies were safer, but still a gamble. Depending upon where they landed, they could either face recognition, recruitment, or trafficking. 

The Earth Kingdom was a death sentence for Zuko. The enemy surely wouldn't let a firebender, especially one so close to enlistment age, walk free. The Water Tribes offered the same fate with a side of six sunless months.

They needed somewhere safe enough for Zuko to recover, but still sympathetic to firebenders. Somewhere where they wouldn't be asked too many questions. Somewhere where they could be safe from the war.

An idea floated into Mai’s mind. It was crazy. Absolutely insane. 

But was there any other option? 

The Yu Yan welcomed every recruit with open arms, and the archers haven't stepped onto the battlefield since the Siege of Sunpo during Fire Lord Azulon’s reign. And they definitely wouldn't ask questions. 

Mind made up, Mai checked the maps and adjusted the course once more. With the wind at her back, the pair of children headed towards Pohuai Stronghold.

Chapter Text

Zuko floats in and out of conscience for most of the journey.

He’s vaguely aware of his surroundings: the rocking of the boat, the taste of salt in the air, the feeling of Mai gently shaking him awake to force broth down his throat and change his bandages. Overall, however, he’s mostly stuck inside his head, wondering how in the world he had gotten where he was.

“ It started,” Zuko thought, “When I asked Father to allow me into the War Chamber.” 

“No, wait, it didn’t start there,” Zuko rolled onto his side, trying to get more comfortable, and then quickly flipped himself onto his other side after his bandaged head hit the bedding, “It started a little bit before, with Azula.”

Of course, it started with Azula. Most things did, nowadays. 

Azula had taken advantage of Uncle Iroh’s absence and had used the months he was gone to endlessly needle her brother. Zuko was always amazed at his sister’s silver tongue: had she been anything but a princess, she would have taken the literary world by storm. Azula, with all of her determination, thick skin, intelligence, and creativity, could have been anything from a poet, to an author, to an archivist recording the history of the Fire Nation.

But, as usual, Zuko wasn’t that lucky. Azula was his sister, and the only thing she used her stunning vocabulary and dramatic flair for were insults and threats. At least they were interesting insults and threats, posed as questions and compliments that would have sounded normal to a person less familiar with the princess. 

“I hear soldiers can sometimes use their flames properly only if their life is on the line. Would you like me to use you as target practice to see if the extra incentive is what you need?”

“The Ladies Li and Lo want to take me on as an apprentice. They claim that I’m ready to start on the Phoenix forms and earn my mastery. What forms are you still stuck on? The Salamander-Tiger or the Rooster-Lion?”

“Mai mentioned that Master Piandao was asking after your health. I didn’t even know you had learned under the master. Are you really so incompetent in your bending that you need to compensate with a non-bender’s weapon?”

“I wonder why Father doesn’t trust you with more responsibilities. By your age, Cousin Lu Ten was already attending war counsels. But I guess not everyone is meant to wear the crown. Isn’t that right, Zuzu?”

It was that set of comments that had sent Zuko storming off. He had been working hard to make himself worthy of being the Crown Prince. Zuko knew he had huge shoes to fill. He knew how much of a perfect prince Lu Ten had been: kind, strong, intelligent, and caring.

Agni above, Lu Ten had cared so much. 

His cousin was never without a smile on his face, talking to others and listening to their problems. Zuko still remembered the winter Lu Ten had overspent his yearly allowance in order to buy every servant in the palace a new set of clothes and enough food to last them the entire Winter Solstice celebration.

So yeah, Zuko knew he wasn’t meant to wear the crown. If the world was fair, Lu Ten would be here and Zuko would be preparing to join the army and become his cousin’s strongest supporter, both on the battlefield and off of it. But the world wasn’t fair, and the Fire Nation would have to put up with him, the boy who used up all of his luck being born. 

And just because he knew he wasn’t as good as Lu Ten doesn’t mean he was completely incompetent. That was why Zuko had begged Father to let him into the war meeting. If he could just prove to himself and his father that he was ready to take on more responsibilities, maybe Azula would finally stop her open-ended questions that made him doubt his every attempt at improving himself.

To his complete and utter surprise, Father had relented.

“Do not speak a word, my son,” Father had told him before the meeting, “All of these honorable generals have infinitely more experience than you. You know nothing of war. If you dare insult them in any way, I can assure you that there will be dire consequences.”

Zuko had told his father that he understood. That he was there for nothing more than to observe and gain experience; there was nothing that would ever give him the need to speak out against the distinguished men and women who had spent their entire lives dedicated to helping the war effort.

“But the forty-first is entirely new recruits. How do you expect them to defeat a powerful Earth Kingdom battalion?”

“I don’t.”

“You can’t sacrifice an entire division like that! Those soldiers love and defend our nation! How can you betray them?”

“Please, Father. I only had the Fire Nation’s best interest at heart. I’m sorry I spoke out of turn!”

“You will fight for your honor.”

“I meant you no disrespect. I am your loyal son.”

“You will learn respect, and suffering will be your teacher.” 

Oh, how wrong he had been.

Zuko truly didn’t remember what happened next. There was fire, he knew. Fire and burning and white-hot pain that grew hotter and hotter until it turned cold. The world was a bit quieter now, and a bit softer around the edges. Cloth is durable hemp where it was once fine silks. Food is salty and plain where it was once spicy and rich. At least there is one constant, still.

“Zuko. It’s good to see you fully awake.”

Mai walked in, her bangs pulled out of her face and hair tied up in a clean bun, “Are you up for real this time, or are you going to fall asleep on me again?”

“I think I’m as awake as I’ll ever be,” Zuko said, voice raspy from disuse, “Where are we, anyway?”

“About twenty, twenty-five miles off of the coast of Danhou. Then we just have to follow the coast up to the Pohuai Stronghold. Joining the Yuyan Archers is the best bet if we want to stick together and stay out of the war.”

“Joining the Yuyan? Mai, why would we--”

“Do you really need me to spell it out for you, Zuko?”

Zuko’s mouth snapped shut. No. No, he knew full well what Mai would have had to do to throw the entire Fire Nation off his tail. It wasn’t uncommon for winners of Agni Kai’s to demand the lives of the loser. If he was here now, instead of in the palace recovering, then that meant Mai believed that he would have died without her intervention. No, that didn’t give Mai enough credit; she was always better at reading people and their intentions than he was. Mai didn’t think he would have died, she was positive that he would have died.

“Did you at least send a letter to Master Piandao or Uncle?” he asked. Master Piandao had been a teacher to the both of them, and both students cared for him in turn. Those days in Shu Jing were some of the best of his life: learning the art of the blade alongside Mai, sparring one-on-one with Fat, having small Pai Sho tournaments with Piandao, Fat, Mai, and Uncle whenever he visited. And Uncle….

He didn’t even want to think of how Uncle would react to the news of his Agni Kai. Would he be angry at him for dishonoring the generals, the man’s trusted colleagues and friends? Would he be disappointed in Zuko for acting so brattish and offensive? Would….would Uncle be happy? Father was happy about his loss in the fire duel, happy that such a waste of a prince was out of the line of succession. Would Uncle feel the same? Would he be glad that he wouldn’t have to see someone so unworthy continue to fulfill his son’s role in the world?

“Hey,” an arm wrapped around his shoulder, “Don’t get lost in your head, Zuko.”

Zuko leaned into Mai’s touch, “Sorry. But did you? Maybe one of them could have helped us. Master Piandao always loved when you visited, and Uncle -- Uncle cares--” 

“It wouldn’t have helped. Prince Iroh hasn’t had a verified location in weeks and Piandao has been watched closely ever since his desertion at Shimabiro. If he suddenly got a letter from a dead girl talking about the dead prince--”

“Dead girl?”

Zuko tried to look Mai in the eye, but she just glanced away, “Mai, why would Piandao get a letter from a dead girl?”

“....”

“....you didn’t! ”

“What other option was there, Zuko?”

“I don’t know, how about claiming to have run away! Ty Lee does it all the time, why wouldn’t the excuse have worked for you?”

“Ty Lee is only able to get away with it because she has six sisters who are just like her in every way, and she’s not the heir to the family. I, on the other hand, am my parents’ only child. If there was even a possibility that I was still alive, the slimmest of chances that they could get me back, they wouldn’t have stopped looking.”

“But what happens when you start to regret it? What happens when you miss your parents and want to go see them again?” What happens when you realize that you chose wrong? What happens when you finally realize that I’m not worth it?

“I don’t make decisions I regret. I barely knew my parents, and they barely knew me. They might miss the little girl who behaved, and sat still, and only spoke when spoken to, but they won’t miss me . And even if I do miss them, I won’t miss my mother’s expectations, or being my father’s pawn, or being an emotionless lump of coal being pressured and shaped into a diamond.” I didn’t choose wrong. I’d choose you again and again, Zuko. In every situation, in every lifetime: you’ll always be worth it. 

The argument tapered off, unspoken words silencing any remaining disagreements between the two. Zuko started to sit up, Mai silently offering a hand for him to pull on. The two looked out toward the direction of the approaching land, maybe eight miles away by this point.

“Where do we go from here?” Zuko asked.

“Ty Lee told me once that when she runs away, she always goes to one of two places: the circus or the local tavern.”

*****

It was a night like any other when June met her apprentices.

She was arm-wrestling a man twice her size whilst drinking everyone in the tavern under the table. There were the usual jeers and shouts, but it was all background noise as June tried to hone in on the whispers.

Her dad had taught her everything she’d need to know to be a successful bounty hunter: to make herself stand out when she wants to, hide when she needs to, beat down any mark, and most importantly, find jobs. If someone wanted another person dead, they wouldn’t shout it out in a crowded bar. Oh no, no, no. They whispered.

While she took in the spotlight and soaked up attention like an octopus-sponge, June eavesdropped on the shady patrons in the dark corners of the tavern. It was a little difficult, splitting her attention between listening and making sure the man in front of her didn’t pin her arm, but years of experience paid off. 

“General Sung and Sir Long Feng are butting heads again,” she heard from the back of the room, “Sung’s been trying to get in contact with the Earth King, claiming he’s got intel on a Fire Nation surprise attack, but Long Feng is just pulling the bureaucracy card. I don’t know why Long Feng is so hung up on politics. Doesn’t he know people are dying the more he stalls?”

“Yeah, I don’t know why General Iroh left Hengrao so early, ” came a different voice from a seat at the bar, “One second he was playing a game of Pai Sho, happy as can be, and then he gets a letter from Caldera and he’s fighting tears and setting course for home.”

“You heard me,” a snappish barmaid told another girl seated near the kitchen door, “Prince Zuko is dead. Killed by his own father. My cousin just wrote to me today, he’s a guard in the palace, you know. But yeah, Prince Zuko told the Fire Lord that he couldn’t continue the war, and the Fire Lord burned the prince’s head clean off his body!”

June smirked a little bit and slammed her opponent’s hand onto the table, “Round of drinks on me, everybody!”

As cheers filled the tavern, June sat back and smiled. Pieces were moving in the world of politics; and where there were people to be mad at each other, there was work to be found. 

It was no secret that the Fire Nation old guard had set their hopes on Prince Zuko. The kid cared about the old ways: honor, preserving life, and all of that. Ozai supporters, on the other hand, favored the princess and Ozai’s pragmatic ideal of nobody can fight back if they're all dead. The coming months will be filled with the traditionalists reworking their long-term game plan, and Ozai supporters trying to pick off as much of the old guard as possible. It’d be a gold mine for bounty hunters like her.

Just as the server started to place the drinks at her table, another whisper caught her ear, “Why are we both named Li?”

June glanced at the door and saw two kids walk in, one bandaged boy, one normal girl. She stared at the odd pair for a second before snapping her attention back to her drink. What in the world were two kids doing in a bar this late?

“Li’s a common name and it works for boys and girls,” the boy defended, “We don’t want to stand out, right?”

“I think two kids named Li will be more memorable than if we used our regular names, Zuko.”

The pair probably snuck out. Maybe they made a dare with their friends earlier that day. June put the two out of mind, took a swig of her drink, and lifted her hand to start her next round.

The next two opponents went down one after the other. June continued to earn some extra coin from the schmucks who kept betting against her but eventually decided to call it a night after her first opponent lost for the fourth time.

“Hey, sweetheart,” June called out to the barmaid, tossing her two gold coins from the pile of winnings on the table, “That’s for the rounds from earlier. I don’t think I’ll be sticking around too long come morning, so you better--”

June froze and looked down at her waist. 

“Would any of you like to confess to stealing from me, or do I have to beat it out of you instead?”

Silence reigned throughout the bar. As no one made a move, June decided to strike first, pulling in her last opponent down by the shirt collar, and held him eye to eye.

“Did you see anything, or not?”

“I-I think there was a little girl earlier? Yeah, she stole your coin purse!”

“A little girl?”

“Yeah, yeah. She was kind of small, dressed in a reddish-brown color. Oh, and she had that boy with her. That one with the bandages!”

June growled in frustration. There was no way two little kids could have stolen from her without her noticing, but no one was calling the man out for lying to her face. 

“Alright,” she let go of the man and gathered her coins in her arms. The thief’s scent should still be on her belt. If she was fast about it, she’d find her missing money before sunrise.

June stalked off to the stables and saw Nyla getting his fill of dinner. Dropping her coins into her saddlebag and pulling off her second belt, June let her shirshu get a good whiff of the leather. After a bit of confusion, Nyla picked up a scent that wasn’t hers, and June vaulted onto her stead.

“Alright, you little rat,” she said as Nyla took the both of them towards the docks, “Let’s just see who was brave enough to steal from the best bounty hunter on the continent.”

Chapter Text

Nyla had led her to a warehouse on the docks after sniffing around a pitiful fishing boat that had seen better days. June couldn’t see any guards, but there was the golden-yellow warmth of lit candles inside.

“Take a lap or two, boy,” she said to Nyla as she dismounted and grabbed her whip, “This calls for a more delicate touch than what you possess.”

June scouted the building, spotting an open window about three stories up. Hoisting herself onto the nearest window ledge, she continued to scale the building, taking note of the voices growing louder from inside.

“What do you mean you won’t escort us to the Pohuai Stronghold? We got you the money you asked for,” came a voice from inside. The soft, raspy vocals contrasted greatly with the speaker’s tone and volume.

“Ha! You actually fell for that?” June pulled herself up to the open window and watched the bottom of the warehouse floor as the two kids from earlier stared down a man and six of his companions, “Kids these days are so gullible. Listen here, brats. You gave us quite the haul, so why don’t you just walk away all nice like, and we won’t rough you up.”

“But, that’s not fair,” said the boy, clearly unable to recognize when to quit, “We gave you the money, so you should keep your promise.”

“Didn’t your mommy ever tell you not to believe strangers, kid? Now go back home before my patience wears thin.”

“Zuko,” the girl spoke up for the first time, “It looks like they aren’t going to take us to where we need to go. I’m done waiting around.”

The boy looked at his friend, then looked at the men, then back at his friend again, “Okay. As long as you're sure.”

“I’m sure.”

“Yeah, boyo, listen to your-- gah!”

The man’s taunts were cut off by a knife flying through the air. It made contact with the boss’s arm and dug into one of his tendons. June winced a bit in sympathy: that was going to take a while to heal.

“Hey what do you think you’re--” the boss was cut off by more knives flying in his direction. The rest of the men had the brains to scatter while a barrage of extremely pointy objects flew around the room.

“Mai, don’t lose any of your weapons. They have to last until we reach Pohuai,” said the boy as he dove behind the girl and out of the line of fire.

“I know what I’m doing, Zuko,” the girl stabbed Unfortunate Goon #3, “Just go find the one who ran off with the money. I don’t want to wait around Danhou while you recover, especially if we don’t have two coppers to rub together.”

June watched the boy run off through an open warehouse door, and decided to follow him; if he was chasing the man with the money, chances were he was chasing the man with her coin purse. 

June climbed up to the rooftop and scanned her surroundings. She spotted the boy easily enough, as he was in pursuit of the thug, but she was a little shocked to see him running across the rooftops to sneak up on the man. The boy was clearly skilled; quick and light on his feet, sticking to the shadows so his mark wouldn’t notice a tail from above. He’d have to work on his situational awareness, however, as he had yet to notice June tailing him one roof away.

Her thoughts were cut off by the sound of a war cry and the sight of the kid launching himself off of the roof. 

“What in Agni’s name?” screeched the thug as he kept dodging the boy’s fists. The action was becoming more difficult by the second, as the man refused to drop the sacks of money to retaliate, and the boy was lunging at the thief like a starving cat owl after a turtleduck. June was content to sit back and watch; having decided that she could simply take her money after one opponent tired themselves out.

“Kid’s scrappy,” she thought to herself as he finally got a hit in, “But he doesn’t know the proper places to hit a person. If he went for the face instead of the middle and upper-body, the fight would probably be over right now.”

The skirmish continued for a few more minutes, and June could see each participant growing more desperate: the boy because he was obviously hurt and not fighting at his best, and the man because he probably wanted to successfully get away with the money before the girl showed up to help. Eventually, one of them decided they had had enough because the next thing she knew, flames lit up and ground below her.

June stepped back from the edge of the roof, surprised, and pulled out a whistle to call Nyla to her. Benders weren’t exactly uncommon in her line of work (she had hunted down more than enough deserters from the Fire Nation, thank you), but it was always better to have Nyla around just in case. Burns damaged muscle tissue pretty thoroughly, and she didn’t want to risk having a recognizable burn somewhere visible for the sake of anonymity.

While she was doing all of this, the man who had taken the money earlier dropped his pile of loot and fled, cussing out the boy as he ran. The boy stood on his guard for a few more minutes before snuffing out the flames and collapsing in exhaustion.

June dropped down from the roof and crept over to the bags of money. Spotting her coin purse, she opened it and started counting out her money.

“What’re you doing?” came the soft, raspy voice from before.

June looked up and her eyes met a single gold one in the dark of the night, “Making sure all of my money’s still there.”

“What? Hey, that’s mine!” the kid sat up and tried to rise to his feet, but he stumbled, too exhausted from the fight.

“You stole it off of me, first, short stack. I’m just making sure I don’t walk away with anything less than what was originally there.”

Her response seemed to have flustered the boy a bit, as he clearly didn’t know what to do in the face of owning up to his actions, “But-- I, you-”

“You going to deny it?” June lifted an eyebrow in disbelief, “The bag has my name on it.”

That seems to have silenced the boy, and June finished her counting in peace. There was a bit of shuffling, and June glanced up to see the kid preparing himself to run.

“ Oh no he doesn’t,” June thought and let out a high-pitched whistle. The response was near-instantaneous. Nyla started sprinting towards the boy, tongue striking out towards his opponent. The boy dodged once, twice, and then was struck: dropping to the ground paralyzed.

June felt a blade sink into her exposed shoulder, and she winced, turning to see her assailant. There stood the girl from the warehouse, blades drawn, hair a bit out of place, but no worse for wear. Looked like June wasn’t the only one with backup.

“What do you want with us?” asked the girl as June pulled the knife out of her shoulder, “We’re just two kids who want to get somewhere safe. We’re sorry that we stole your money, but we won’t give you any more trouble.”

“Just two kids? Ha! Don’t make me laugh,” June turned her back on the boy, confident that he would be safely out of commission for at least a few more minutes, “The two of you aren’t as slick as you think.”

“I heard you, earlier in the bar, and later in the warehouse,” June revealed, watching as a hint of surprise graced the girl’s face before she covered it with her previous stony expression, “Do you want to know what I’ve been able to deduce just based on that? How about I talk, and you can confirm what I’ve got right.”

“Your names are Zuko, and depending on if you're from the colonies of the mainland, Mai or Mei. Because you lack an accent, I’d say Fire Nation mainlander, so Mai. Based on that, both of you are probably from richer families: no starving peasants are going to be able to buy you so many blades or pay a teacher to show you have to expertly use them. You’re running from something or someone, and you don’t want people to ask questions. That’s why you two are trying to get towards Pohuai. The Yuyan are notorious for taking in anyone who can meet their standards, and because they’re a clan, not an army unit, they have the power to veto any orders that don’t come directly from the Fire Lord. And their vow of silence is pretty handy if you want to hide a secret.”

“The real question is, what secret are you trying to hide?” June basked in the fear and surprise the girl was showing on her face. Honestly, kids could be so dramatic. What secret could two rich kids from the mainland need to keep close to their chest? Especially if it was enough for a baby firebender to run away from the Fire Nation and into the colonies, arguably one of the most dangerous places for a bender?

“I mean, unless you’ve got dirt on the Fire Lord--” June cut herself off and dodged a bombardment of knives. Looks like she had found her answer. But that raised the question once more: what could two kids have on the Fire Lord? June pulled out her whip to retaliate the blows and thought. 

If two big-shot wealthy families suddenly lost all power and influence overnight, she would have heard about it by now. Ozai lacked the subtlety of his father, and his policy on handling politics could only be described as annihilating anyone who opposed him. So whatever the kids knew, it wasn’t something they’d told their families. They’d kept it to themselves and fled the Fire Nation, instead. 

June glanced back at the boy, who was being (laid on? snuggled by? bonding with?) entrapped by Nyla. They hadn’t escaped completely unharmed when they fled. The secret may have some weight to it if the boy’s injury was anything to go by. It looked like someone had tried to burn his face off.

“Prince Zuko is dead. Killed by his own father. My cousin just wrote to me today, he’s a guard in the palace, you know. But yeah, Prince Zuko told the Fire Lord that he couldn’t continue the war, and the Fire Lord burned the prince’s head clean off his body!”

The barmaid’s words from earlier came back to June in a flash. It was like the stars aligned to spell out the most ridiculous, crackpot, copper-show-plot in history. No. There was no way.

“Are you the motherfucking prince?”

The girl froze and the boy started babbling protests, trying to free himself from Nyla’s mass of fur and muscle to no avail. Their reactions were all the answers she needed.

“Nope. Nope, nope, nope, nope, nope. You’re dead. You should be chilling in the spirit world with a kiddy cocktail and bowl full of fire flakes. Why the fuck are you here?”

“Here as in not dead, or here as in in the colonies?”

“ Both.”

“Ugh, okay, um. So, that’s a bit of a long story--”

*****

“After we landed in Danhou, we walked into the bar and asked around for someone willing to escort us to the Pohuai Stronghold. We met Haku, he named a price and told us to get the money to him an hour after sundown. Most of the money was ours, but we were short by a bit. We saw some merchants who probably didn’t need all of their money, and you, who could probably win back whatever we stole in one or two nights of arm wrestling. The rest you probably already know.”

June stared off into the middle distance as the boy, Prince Zuko, finished up the tale of how he and his friend ended up in the colonies. It was a buck-wild story, and she could now see why the two were so insistent upon getting up to Pohuai ASAP.

In short: the prince was nearly killed by his dad because he didn’t agree with sacrificing hundreds of soldiers (yeesh), his friend smuggled him out of the palace because she thought if someone didn’t get him out he’d be dead by sunrise (good instincts on that one), and they were in the colonies because the entire world thought both of them were dead and if they were found alive there would be way more questions than either wanted to answer (understandable).

She leaned back against Nyla, who was serving as an admirable cushion for the three of them. The prince and the girl were snuggled against Nyla’s soft, cushiony underbelly, while June was tucked near the shirshu’s two beating hearts. 

June closed her eyes and thought about her options. Her initial instinct told her to hand the two in for what would probably be a pretty big bounty. A prince and his companion would be worth a lot of gold, and she’d be set for life. But she wasn’t comfortable with that option. She was a bounty hunter, yes, but that meant hunting down and capturing criminals: killers, rapists, heck she didn’t even go after deserters unless she saw that they had their own list of other crimes worthy of punishment.

Another option was to just do nothing. Walk away from the situation with her money and her dignity in hand, and treat this all like another story from a job gone sideways. But that didn’t sit well with her either. The kids, as semi-competent as they were, weren’t prepared for surviving on their own. They were too trusting. The men tonight just wanted to steal their money, but what happens when even tougher, smarter, more disgusting people see two kids on their own? She wasn’t willing to just leave them to fend for themselves like that.

Option number three was to take them back to the Fire Nation and deliver them to someone who had their best interests at heart. There was an Uncle and a Master Piandao mentioned in the kids’ story, but the Uncle was the Dragon of the West, and Master Piandao was Piandao of Shu Jing. There was little-to-no chance of her being able to meet with either of the legendary war heroes and even attempting to do so could bring disastrous consequences. If the wrong person found out, or the two men didn’t care for the kids as much as believed, then it was over for them. 

You know what? Screw it. 

“You kids still looking for a guide north?”

The two shared a look and turned to her, urging her to continue talking.

“Listen,” June said pointing at the pair, “I know what it’s like to be terrified and alone. The world’s not the kindest, especially towards kids who don’t know how to deal with being chewed up and spit back out again and again. So I’ll make you an offer: pay me whatever you stole off the merchants from earlier tonight, and I’ll take you to Pohuai.”

“Really?” the prince sat up, tone eager and open.

“Why not. Pohuai’s more connected to the mainland, so I’ll probably find more work up there anyway.”

The prince launched himself at June. It took her a few seconds of trying to draw her whip for June to realize that she was getting hugged, not being attacked.

“Thank you, thank you, thank you !”

“Oi, watch the merchandise, kid,” said June at the same time the girl, Mai (she would have to get used to using names now that they’d be traveling together), rebuffed her friend.

“Don’t hug her, Zuko. She’s probably more feral than the animal she hunts with.”

“Who’re you calling feral, you damn brat?” June shot a small glare at the emotionless girl.

“You, you old hag.”

“Hag?”

“Mai, that’s not nice. If anything, she’s a crone.”

“ Excuse you, I am a good-old-fashioned spirit, thank you very much. Beautiful, other-worldly, and willing to doom any mortal soul who crosses me.”

“But you’re so old,” Mai deadpanned.

“I am twenty-one. That is nowhere near old.”

“Older than us.”

June groaned into her hands. She was already getting a headache from the thought of dealing with these kids for another few hundred miles.

Chapter Text

Mai wakes, not in her usual four-poster bed to the sound of a servant knocking on the door, but on a crumby futon to the sound of snoring. 

The bounty hunter from the night before, June if she remembers correctly, had taken one look at their boat and declared it unfit for anything more than being stripped and sold for firewood. Mai, having used it to sail over three hundred miles and knowing that it was only staying afloat due to pure luck, readily agreed.

They had spent a half-hour or so compiling every item of value and loading it onto Nyla’s saddle. June had then thrown Mai and Zuko onto the saddle as well and rode off to the inn she was staying at, claiming that they all might as well get as much sleep as they could. 

Mai had, in the face of exhaustion and an intense adrenaline crash, fallen asleep before her head hit the pillow. There wasn’t much memory from the previous night beyond curling into a very, very comforting source of heat and sleeping like the dead. 

Now, more awake and able to think clearly, Mai was able to unearth her memories and puzzle together her surroundings. June was snoring away on another futon, functionally dead to the world. Zuko, however, was nowhere to be found. The only hints that he had been there were the semi-crumpled blankets on the other side of the futon, and the open pack with his clothes from yesterday in a wadded pile next to it.

Mai grumbled to herself and walked over to June, “Hey.”

June snored on, “ Hey.”

Mai gave June a small shake, “Wake up.”

There was no movement from the bounty hunter no matter how hard Mai tried to shake her awake. Thinking of what to do in this situation, Mai remembered a night she had spent over at Ty Lee’s place.

The Ty sisters were infamous amongst the Fire Nation as the only septuplets in history where all seven children and the mother survived the birthing bed. As such, when Ty Lee invited Mai over for a sleepover, she had envisioned having to deal with six copied versions of Ty Lee. But as the night wore on, however, Mai had come to realize that although the girls were identical, there were more than enough differences in their personalities and hobbies to distinguish them. Ty Woo, the second youngest and the sister Mai connected with the most, was especially different in one deciding way: she was the only one in the family with a bit of a mean streak. 

“What people without siblings don’t understand,” she had told Mai, “Is that we can threaten to kill each other, insult each other, strangle the living daylights out of each other, but at the end of the day, we all would be willing to bury a corpse for any of our siblings, no questions asked. Of course, we would be complaining the entire time and insulting the guilty sister about how terrible she is at murder, but still. We have each other’s backs.”

“And that is why I can get away with this knowing full-well that my sister is going to get back at me ten-fold,” said Ty Woo right before she took a running start and leaped onto Ty Lat’s sleeping body, her elbow digging into the girl’s solar plexus and waking her with a start.

While Mai couldn’t confirm Ty Woo’s opinion on siblings, seeing that she didn’t have any herself and Azula and Zuko most definitely did not have a normal sibling dynamic, she could confirm that she did have the proper technique in waking an extremely heavy sleeper.

Which is why she copied Ty Woo’s actions now, getting a proper running start, and pouncing onto June, aiming the force of her weight at her chest in an attempt to knock the breath out of her victim.

June most definitely woke up then, wrapping her arms around Mai and trying to throw the girl off of her, “What the hell?”

“You wouldn’t wake up,” said Mai, planting her foot in June’s gut, “Do you know where Zuko is?”

“I think he said something about finding a place to meditate,” June answered after grabbing a fistful of Mai’s hair and yanking, “I don’t know where. It was early as fuck.”

“Do you have any ideas?” Mai retaliated for the hair-pulling with a bite to June’s arm, making the woman lose her grip.

“Maybe somewhere out near the stables? He seemed pretty taken with Nyla last night,” June said, putting Mai in a headlock and aggressively noogieing her.

The wrestling match went on for a little bit longer until the two decided that it was about time to find their other companion and hit the road. Mai got dressed in some well-woven hemp pants and a matching wine-colored shirt, stiletto-loaded bracers hidden under her sleeves and around her ankles. She pulled her hair into a simple braid, letting her bangs fall over her forehead.

June was dressed in her signature bounty hunter uniform, black dress screaming ‘dangerous’ and ‘alluring’ in equal measures. The woman threw her stuff into a travel bag, and grabbed Zuko’s as she walked to the door, “Let’s get out of here and find some breakfast.”

June led Mai out of the inn and a few blocks over until they hit a market. It wasn’t so early that they’d have the first pick of the produce, but it was still early enough that there weren’t a lot of other customers flooding the stalls quite yet. 

June shot towards a food stall selling congee and ordered two bowls. Receiving the dishes with a request to eat quickly and return the bowls to the seller, June gestured for Mai to follow her to a semi-secluded corner of the market and eat.

Mai accepted her breakfast, noticing that the rice porridge inside was flavored with fire flakes, eggs, and some greens of some sort. She took a bite and looked up at her companion, “What’re we going to do today?” she asked around the food in her mouth.

June swallowed her bite, “Pohuai’s north of here, but it’s not a direct path on land. We’ve got a few hundred miles, two mountain ranges, and two different major rivers between us and our destination. If we’re lucky, we can ride Nyla around the Nugui Mountains and end the day near the Se Tu River. But before any of that, we need to sell that dinky boat of yours and find the prince.”

Mai nodded her head and finished her meal. After returning her bowl and chopsticks to the vendor it came from, she bought a large steamer of various dumplings from another salesman and shrugged her bag onto her shoulders. Following June towards the docks, Mai weaved through the crowd that was beginning to gather in the market, making sure to steal the coin purse off the occasional rude customer screaming at the poor vendors about their products. If they were so willing to make a fuss about their daily steamed buns, Mai might as well give them a real problem to wail about.

After arriving at the docks, Mai and June found the shipyard manager to sell the fishing boat. The man examined the vessel, and then came back with a report.

“I honestly don’t know how that thing is still floating,” he told them, “All of its safety features are out of date, and it looks like it hasn’t been used in years. I’d be surprised if it could last more than another few hours out on the ocean.”

The description hadn’t surprised Mai. She had stolen the fishing boat off of an old, retired admiral that was well past his prime. Mai suspected that the fishing boat was kept more for sentimental reasons than actual use. If the boat was really that unprepared for sea travel, and then Mai sailed on it for days straight, never docking once, she could see how it had ended up in its pitiful condition. 

“I’ll give you five gold coins for it,” said the manager, “That’s about as much as the thing will be worth when we strip it down and sell it for parts.”

“I’m surprised it’s even worth that,” said June, taking the offered coins and passing them onto Mai, “We’ll get out of your hair. Thanks for taking the piece of junk off our hands.”

Mai untied one of the coin purses she stole from the screechy market-goers and placed the coins inside, “Let’s go find Zuko. It sounds like we’ve got plenty of ground to cover today if we want to stay on schedule.”

Purse retied to her hip, Mai carefully made her way back to the inn with June in tow. After checking in with a girl sweeping up the entrance of the building, the pair walked to the stables.

“ Nyyyylllllaaaaaaaa!” came the sound of Zuko’s voice, “I love you too, but your kisses aren’t exactly helpful right now.”

Mai walked into the stable and towards the largest stall in the back corner of the building. The stall was spacious, most likely meant for a komodo rhino or something similar in size. Besides a large nest of hay in the back and troughs for feed and water opposite it, the stall was empty save for the shirshu and the boy it was affectionately trying to lick.

“Are you ready to go, Zuko?” Mai asked.

“Yes, just give me a minute-- Nyla, I told you to stop!”

Nyla finally took the hint, closing his mouth and snuffling the back of Zuko’s garnet shirt instead. June huffed and threw Zuko’s bag at him, hopping onto Nyla’s saddle.

“Alright you two,” she said, staring down at the pair, “If we’re going to be traveling together, there are going to be some ground rules. Shirshus are fickle creatures and are prone to turning on their owners if they aren’t handled correctly. If you give me any reason to believe either of you will mistreat Nyla, the deal’s off and I’ll leave you stranded wherever we happen to be. It doesn’t matter if we’re in the middle of a battlefield, or ten feet from Pohuai. One act of malice against my companion and we’re done. Got it?”

Zuko answered with a quick yes, while Mai nodded in understanding.

“Good,” said June, “Rule number one: don’t wear any perfume or other particularly smelly scents at any time. Shirshus have sensitive noses, and a bad scent could interfere with Nyla’s ability to safely maneuver. This is also a safety measure for you kids; if we’re separated for any reason, Nyla can find you easily so long as your scent matches what you usually smell like.”

“Rule number two: I’m the only one who steers Nyla. I’m the only person I know of to ever completely tame a shirshu, and it didn’t happen overnight. If one of you two tries to ride Nyla solo, there’s a good chance that he’ll bolt, and I’ll have to chase both of you down. Rule number three: keep track of your own stuff. I’m not your royal nanny. If you lose something it’s on you and I won’t be buying a replacement. Rule number four: don’t intentionally harm Nyla, me, your friend, or any other person we come across except in self-defense. And finally, rule number five.”

June stopped talking and cast a long, contemplative look at Mai and Zuko, “Rule number five: when I give you any future instructions, you follow them without question. I’m sure last night taught you that not every person we’ll come across is, well, good. There are a lot of scumbags out there, trust me. I wouldn’t be able to make a living if there weren’t. So if I tell you to hide, you hide. If I say stay out of a situation and let me handle it, stay out and let me handle it. If I say forget about me and run to safety, you turn and run as fast as possible. I know how to handle myself, but you two are just a couple of kids running from one of the most powerful nations in the world. I need to know that you’ll follow my instructions, or else there is no way I can finish my job and get you two to the Pohuai Stronghold safely. Understood?”

“Understood,” said Mai and Zuko in unison. 

June nodded, “Okay. Let’s get loaded up and hit the road.”

June stretched out her hand and gestured towards the bags she had previously set down. Mai tossed June’s travel bag and Zuko’s pack up to her and stopped to grab the steamer of dumplings out of her pack.

“These are for you,” she told Zuko as she threw the last bag up to June, “I figured you must have skipped breakfast if you got up early to meditate and play with Nyla.”

Zuko’s eyes sparkled, “Did you get--”

“Yes, I got you hippo-beef-filled dumplings.”

Zuko pumped his fist into the air and climbed up onto Nyla. Once he was safely seated on the saddle, Mai climbed up behind him. Zuko opened the lid of the steamer and stuffed a dumpling in his mouth. Mai wrinkled her nose in disgust, “Don’t choke. That’d be a gross and lame way to die.”

“’orry,” said Zuko around his mouthful of food. He secured the steamer between his chest and June’s back

“You two on?” asked June. After words of confirmation from the pair, she snapped Nyla’s reigns and set the shirshu into a brisk trot, “Alright then. Pohuai Stronghold, here we come.”

Chapter Text

June is relieved that at least one of the brats is a semi-competent rider. 

The prince seated behind her has been nothing but the picture of a perfect equestrian: back straight, posture relaxed and not stiff, legs hugging Nyla steadily to keep his balance, and little-to-no shifting so as not to trick Nyla into thinking he’s carrying an unstable load. The kid must have had a damn good instructor, and maybe even some experience on a larger mount such as a komodo rhino.

The little lady, on the other hand….

“How many times have I got to tell you? You can’t ride side-saddle on a shirshu!” June reigned Nyla into a clean stop for the fourth time since their departure, “This isn’t that kind of saddle. You are going to fall off. Again.”

There was a grumbling reply from Mai as she pulled herself onto the riverbank. The last fall off of Nyla had been the result of an unsteady leap over a stream, and the preteen was soaked. 

“If you weren’t such a terrible animal handler, the ride wouldn’t be so bumpy,” Mai said as she wrung the water out of her hair, “I’ve been riding eel hounds, mongoose lizards, and ostrich horses since I was a kid. I’ve never been thrown before, so it can’t be something I’m doing.”

“Well in case you haven’t noticed, Nyla isn’t an eel hound or a mongoose lizard,” June grit out between her teeth, “And this saddle is not something you can safely ride side-saddle on. Besides, any sores you’ll get will be way better than constantly falling off. I’m sure you’ve heard tales of unlucky ostrich horsemen dying from a particularly terrible fall. Do you really want to keep testing fate like this?”

Zuko leaned sideways and peaked at his friend from behind June’s back, “Please, Mai. June’s right. We’re wasting time and I don’t want to see you get hurt.”

Mai grumbled some more inaudible protests, and for some inexplicable reason, started to blush. Her grumblings continued until June had enough, “What was that?”

Mai hid her head in her hands and repeated herself.

“Say that again?”

Mai lowered her hands and spoke, “It’s…. inappropriate , for a lady to ride astride.” 

June threw her head back and howled with laughter.

Zuko, now blushing as well, called out to her, “I’m sure it’s fine. I’ve seen you in more inappropriate positions--oh Agni that sounds bad--I mean I’ve seen you in more awkward positions, no situations! I’ve seen you in more awkward situations than if you were to ride Nyla astride. I- just--”

“What the prince is trying to say,” said June, wheezing a bit from laughing, “Is that your parents and your tutors aren’t here, and you’re in the company of a bounty hunter and a boy you gave up everything for. Both of which don’t give a single damn about proprietary, and would rather you just sit on the shirshu properly so we can get where we need to go.”

Mai, still blushing scarlet, climbed back onto the saddle and swung her left leg onto the other side, mimicking June and the prince’s stance. Zuko talked her through a few quick do’s and don’ts of riding a larger animal like this one.

“Alright. Are you both on for real this time?”

June heard the two’s confirmations and pushed Nyla forward once more.

*****

It was another three hours of straight riding before another problem reared its head. 

They were just crossing the border between the colonies of Horohoma and Gimcho when they were stopped by a small company of Fire Nation soldiers. An armored man walked up to the shirshu, wary of Nyla’s gaping maw and tongue that went with it, and held up a hand. “Identification, please.”

“Shit,” thought June as she nodded at the soldier and started rummaging through her saddlebag, “I’m rarely stopped and asked to present my passport and papers, so I assumed I could travel with the kids without forging them some documents. Should have thought ahead.”

June passed the soldier her Fire Nation identification, still thinking, “I can’t claim they’re marks. If I do they’ll ask why they aren’t paralyzed, cuffed, knocked out, or tied up. Can’t claim the kids are an escort job, either. They would definitely ask for identification then, if only to make sure I’m not harboring fugitives. I’m too young to play their mother, and identification papers only say I’m an only child….”

“Don’t mind the apprentices,” June said without thinking.

“Apprentices?”

“Yeah. Just picked them up in Danhou. Scrappy little things fought off ten criminals each. They’re orphans, and I haven’t had the chance to register them with the guild yet, so there’s no paper trail.” 

“What the fuck is coming out of my mouth?” thought June as the single soldier and the others looked at the kids, eyeing Mai’s unease on Nyla, and Zuko’s still bandaged head.

“They benders?”

“No. Both nonbenders.”

“What’re their weapons?”

“The girls a knife thrower and the boy’s a--”

“I’m a sword fighter!” piped up Zuko, waving around -- where the fuck did he get those dao?

“Probably not a very good one, if that bandage is anything to go by.”

“I had a super good teacher. I bet I could beat you with my eyes closed!”

“Why don’t you come down here and prove it?”

This was evidently the wrong thing to say to the prince. Zuko launched off of Nyla, blade grasped in each hand. He swung them with a flourish, dodged out of the way of the man’s fist, leaped towards his attacker, and swept his feet out from under him. June was trying to keep the panic off of her face as the prince pinned the soldier on the ground, dao crossed in an X-formation over the man’s throat.

And the cherry on top of the hotcake? The cheeky brat had his eyes closed the entire time.

“You idiot!” Mai yelled at her friend, “You can’t just go around attacking our nation’s soldiers; that’s how you end up arrested.”

The other soldiers, however, looked more amused than angry. As Zuko sheepishly sheathed his swords and helped the soldier up, another soldier stepped forward, “Relax. Neito literally asked for it. Where’re you three heading anyway?” she asked.

“Up north to some of the larger port cities,” June answered, scooting forward on the saddle so Zuko could climb back up, “With the unfortunate passing of the prince, there’s likely to be a lot of discourse amongst the military, government, and citizens as everything settles. The perfect place for bounty hunters to find work.”

“I heard about his highness’s death. Such a tragedy. I got a brother working in the palace as a royal guard, and he wrote to tell me how an assassin was the one to get him in the end.”

“What are you talking about? Everyone knows the Fire Lord killed him because the prince was becoming too popular. Ozai didn’t want Prince Zuko to usurp him like he did Azulon,” said a different soldier.

“You’re both wrong. Prince Zuko died in an Agni Kai against General Bujing.”

One by one, each soldier in the party shouted out their own explanations of Zuko’s demise. There were grains of truth to all of them, but it was extremely clear that the true chain of events hadn’t yet made it to the mainland.

“Or maybe,” thought June, side-eyeing the prince behind her, “Maybe, somebody is working very, very hard to make sure the truth remains hidden.”

It made too much sense. If the world knew what June knew, knew that the Fire Lord had attempted to kill his own son simply because the prince cared about Fire Nation citizens, there would be riots in the streets calling for Ozai’s head. But if no one knew the full picture? If everyone in the world knew a different version of the story? It’d be all too easy to let the public decide their own opinions, and then debase anyone who guessed a little too right. After all, it would hardly be the first time that traitors and radicals twisted the story of a life cut short into one of martyrdom. 

“There’s only one problem with Ozai’s plan,” June’s eyes once more traveled to the kids seated behind her, “And it has to do with a little lady who cares for a prince more than anything else in the world.”

“You’re all just proving my point for me,” June shouted over the bickering soldiers, “There’s clearly going to be discontentment and chaos in the Fire Nation for a while, and those two together create a breeding ground of criminal activity. The three of us should be on our way, time is money, and it looks like we’ll be making a lot of it in the coming months.”

“Go on ahead. We’ll let the lack of documentation slide this time, but you better get your apprentices' papers in Shimabiro. Oh, and don’t tell anyone we’re out here,” said the female soldier, “We’re surveying the path for an army’s march in the coming months. Something about an ambush and a diversion.”

“Do you know what platoons will be coming through? I’d hate to have Nyla anywhere near the Rough Rhinos,” said June.

“No, no cavalry like that. Just a few battalions of seasoned veterans and a platoon of new recruits. I think the division numbers are the twenty-second, the twenty-ninth, the thirty-seventh, and the forty-first.”

*****

Zuko didn’t know it was possible to feel so cold. 

It was hours after he had learned that the forty-first division would be deployed in the coming months, and the blood in his veins still felt like ice. He didn’t know why he felt so despaired. Maybe because he thought that the forty-first wouldn’t have been deployed after his Agni Kai. Maybe because he assumed that the soldiers wouldn’t have to be sacrificed because he sacrificed himself for them.

Maybe because he really was a traitor to his nation: already forgetting the people he should be protecting the second it wasn’t immediately involved with him.

A light touch brushed against his shoulder, “You’re thinking too much again.”

Mai’s hand grounded him, and he reached back to brush his fingers against hers, “Thanks,” he croaked out, “If I were to do something crazy, would you back me up?”

Mai shot him one of her deadpan looks.

“Okay. Yeah, stupid question.”

“I guess it does depend, though. Crazy as in suicidally stupid or suicidally noble?”

“Noble? Stupid? Both. Definitely both.”

“So a normal Zuko plan then?”

“Yeah. But multiply it by eleven.”

Mai hummed, “Does this have anything to do with the recruits you were willing to fight an Agni Kai for?”

“Yes.” 

“And if I were to tell you to stay out of it, would you actually do so?”

“I don’t think I could live with myself if I did.”

There was a moment of silence before Mai spoke again, “Okay.”

“Okay?”

“I’ve kept you alive this long, I’m not going to leave you to die now. And this way, I get some extra entertainment in my life.”

A sense of relief washed over Zuko, “Thank you.”

“Don’t thank me yet. We’ve still got to pull your hair-brain scheme off, and get away with minimal damage.”

“Yeah. But we’re one step closer already.”

“Would you two like to fill me in, or am I just supposed to guess the hidden meaning behind your words?” asked June from the front of the saddle.

“How do you feel about helping us fake the deaths of hundreds of Fire Nation soldiers?”

June blanked for a minute, but quickly caught on, “Are you talking about the troops his royal brattiness dueled over?”

“Yep.”

There was another moment of silence on June’s end, “If we’re doing this, it might help if we have an army full of the best archers in the world.”

“Do you really think the Yuyan would agree to help?” asked Zuko.

“It takes direct orders from the Fire Lord to force the Yuyan onto the battlefield, but they don’t need orders to act. If the leader of the Yuyan offered to assist in a battle and a majority of the archers agreed, then they’d fight. If the leader refused a request from a general, or a majority of the Yuyan refused, then they’d stay out of it. There’s a reason the Yuyan haven’t been a part of the war effort since Azulon’s reign, and it’s not just because of Ozai’s disdain for nonbenders.”

“So they wouldn’t help?” Zuko drooped at the realization.

“That’s not what I said, short stack,” June pulled Nyla to a stop and turned around to face him, “I’m not saying they’ll flat-out refuse. But it won’t hurt to try and ask for help.”

“And if they do refuse?” Mai asked.

“Then there’s a bounty hunter and two apprentices willing to become protection details. But if we’re doing this, then I will train you two into the ground. You’ve got skills, but you’ve both still got a lot to learn if either of you wants to protect anyone.”

At his friend’s agreement, Zuko felt a bit lighter. 

“I’ll protect them, I swear it,” he thought, watching the sun break from behind a patch of clouds, “I just hope I can be strong enough to see it through.”

Chapter Text

Shimabiro is a northern coastal town at the edge of a long mountain range. Once an Earth Kingdom stronghold, it has since been conquered and occupied by the Fire Nation for over thirty years. Mai had heard tales of the city from Master Piandao. Despite never seeing it in its prime, the swordsman had nothing but good things to say about the city.

“When the battle was finally over, I was able to tour the city at my leisure,” he had told Mai and Zuko one night after a long day of marksmen practice, “There were temples scattered throughout the city, all dedicated to a different spirit of the surrounding land. The walls around the city were impressive, just like any Earth Kingdom stronghold, though not as strong as Omashu or Ba Sing Se.”

“The people themselves were also impressive. Enduring. Adaptive. Strong. There aren’t many like them left in the world; if you ever meet someone like that, pray to Agni you stand with them and not against them.”

As the shirshu riders passed through the outer walls of the city, Mai knew that the town of her master’s stories and the town she now found herself in were not one and the same. The outer walls, while upkept to the best of the builder’s abilities, weren’t the nigh impenetrable mountains Piandao described. As the traveling party had approached, Mai had spotted plenty of crumbling bricks and small holes throughout the structure. The streets, dirty and unswept, were filled with more beggars asking for alms than merchants selling their wares. Not a single spirit temple was in sight, but instead, flags and tapestries depicting the Fire Nation insignia covered every corner of the city.

As June steered Nyla over the piles of dung and other garbage that littered the streets, she explained her plans for the day, “We’re going to check in with an inn first, and then I need to go find a representative for the bounty hunters’ guild to register the both of you as my apprentices. I don’t want to risk jail time just because I was too cheap to get some papers.”

“What about us?” asked Zuko, “What should we do while you’re gone?”

“You two can feel free to explore the city. Just be sure to meet back at the inn for dinner: I want to see where you two stand in your fighting prowess. Can’t have my apprentices embarrassing me, now can I?”

June quickly spotted an inn with a decently sized stable for Nyla, “I’ll go pay for a room while you two start unpacking the saddle. Keep anything you don’t want stolen on you at all times. In cities like this, who knows what’ll end up with a new owner.”

Mai and Zuko did what they told, and slid off of Nyla’s saddle, Mai a little bitter about her inexperienced dismount. As Zuko started to untie their items, he handed her any of her extra blades. Mai then went through and sorted them by necessity, hiding the ones she wanted to have on her at all times up her sleeves and under the legs of her hemp pants. Similarly, Zuko strapped his sword sheath onto his hip, careful to make sure that both dao stayed firmly in his grabbing range at all times. They had just gotten the last bag untied and removed from the saddle when June came back.

“Our room is the third one to the right on the bottom floor. There should be three futons in there, and a lock on the door,” she tossed Mai an old brass key and continued, “Make sure to lock the door, and don’t blow all of our money on stupid stuff.”

“Got it,” said Zuko, who carefully picked up as many bags as he could physically hold, leaving only the coin purses for Mai to carry, “We’ll be back by dinner.”

“Yeah, yeah. See you brats in a bit,” June turned and waved to them over her shoulder and left the stables.

Mai instructed Zuko on the directions to the inn, as his line of sight was completely blocked by the pile of bags in his arms. After a little more maneuvering, they came to their room, and Mai unlocked the door. Zuko took a few steps in and promptly dropped all of the bags onto the floor. Mai rolled her eyes and checked each futon for termite-fleas and bedbugs.

“Looks like the accommodations are as good as we’re going to get,” said Mai, satisfied that the semi-ratty sleeping arrangements weren’t going to ruin their clothes, “You want to go out and explore?”

Zuko nodded, and exited the room, “Do you still have those extra coins that you snagged from the mean customers in Danhou?”

Mai nodded in confirmation and pulled out the smaller bags of coins, “You want to go give this to the beggars we passed on the way in, don’t you?”

“Yes please.”

“Huuuuuuuggggghhhhh. Fine.”

Mai grabbed Zuko’s hand and the two raced down out of the inn and back down to the entrance of the city. Starting there, the two tossed out coins left and right to the beggars of the city. A silver piece to a pregnant woman trying to calm a screaming toddler. A couple of coppers into an old man’s hat. A few more coppers to a merchant giving away his cabbages to the hungry citizens on the streets.

They wandered, giving away their extra money all the while. As the streets started to lead towards the docks, they stumbled upon a small girl selling flower crowns. Zuko lit up, and slipped the girl a gold coin, “Your prettiest crown for the princess here.”

A smile flashed across the girl’s face. Quick as a whip, she plucked the best flowers out of a variety of crowns and started weaving them into a masterpiece. Carnation-peonies, fire lilies, and gardenia-zinnias came together to form a vibrant headdress of red and white. Zuko thanked the girl with a grin and delicately placed the flower crown on Mai’s head.

Mai didn’t have any words in response to the gesture. Face lit up with scarlet, she slapped her palms to her cheeks in an attempt to hide her embarrassment, “Why? Just….why, Zuko?”

“It’s a thank you. You know, for letting me go out and help these people,” said Zuko easily, intertwining their hands once more, “Hey, what’re they selling over there?”

Mai followed Zuko’s gaze to a man shouting excitedly on the docks, “Fire Nation, Earth Nation, Water Nation, so long as bargains are your inclination, you’re welcome here! Don’t be shy, come on by!”

“I think that’s a pirate, Zuko,” said Mai, looking past the man and to the boat behind him.

“Oh,” said Zuko, “Do you wanna….check them out?”

Mai thought for a moment and shrugged, “Sure. It’s not like they can be selling anything worse than whatever some of the merchants were passing off as wares in the market.”

Mai and Zuko slowly walked past the shouting man, making sure to not draw too much attention in case they had to make a quick break for it. Besides one other man arguing with another pirate on the deck of the ship, there wasn’t anyone else around. Mai and Zuko entered the ship’s holding cells and examined the interior. Along the walls were all sorts of random items: candelabras, swaths of silks, sealed crates, and golden idols.

“I’m not seeing anything too interesting, Zuko. Zuko?” Mai looked up to see Zuko invested in reading one of the scrolls he had snagged from a small cubby.

“Zuko!” Mai said once more, walking over to her friend.

“Look, Mai! It’s an original copy of Into the Night . I don’t think I’ve ever seen an unedited version!” Zuko babbled excitedly.

Mai sighed. Of course, Zuko would be squealing about a copy of his favorite play, “Are you going to buy it?”

Zuko looked at the scroll, and then looked at Mai, “This-- this is almost priceless. I don’t think we could afford it. But~”

Zuko trailed off and glanced once more at the scrolls, “They really shouldn’t be storing scrolls down here at all. The dampness in the air is going to ruin the ink and the paper. And besides, I don’t think they know what they have. I doubt any of the pirates on board know how to read--that sounds rude--I doubt any of the pirates on board like to read theater scrolls in their spare time. That sounds better.”

Zuko turned to the various cubbies holding the different scrolls, “You know what? As a prince, it’s my duty to preserve this vital piece of Fire Nation history. And that one. And that one. And that one. This is actually a waterbending scroll, but Uncle always says that I should draw inspiration from many sources, so we’re taking this one too. And this one. Screw it, we're taking all of these.”

Zuko passed Mai about half of the scrolls, which she quickly threw up her sleeves, careful not to tear any of the paper on her blades. Zuko stuffed the remaining scrolls down his shirt and grabbed her hand again. The two then slowly, slowly and without raising suspicion, booked it out of the pirates’ den, laughing the whole way back to the inn.

*****

After six dive bars and three brothels, June finally found a building owned by the bounty hunters’ guild. 

The Black Badgermole was a greasy little tavern with shit food, decent alcohol, and a sound-proof cellar that served as a great meeting place. After telling the bartender the phrase that meant she wanted to meet with whoever forged papers for this branch of the guild, she was taken out back and shown down to the cellar. Half of the area was filled with crates of sake, wine, beer, and ale, while the other had a few make-shift desks with matching workers behind each.

“I need to register two apprentices,” said June, throwing a bag of gold onto the nearest desk. 

The worker picked up the bag and weighed it in their hands. After a moment of consideration, they dropped the bag in a nearby crate and spoke, “Your registration, please.”

June passed over her Fire Nation and Earth Kingdom guild papers, bounty records, and passports. The desk worker read them for a bit and raised a single eyebrow, “You Ryōshi’s kid?”

June stiffened a bit in surprise, “Yeah. He’s my old man. Why’re you asking?”

The worker raised their hands to pacify her, “Nothing bad. Just, surprised, is all. I knew your dad a few years back. He ever accomplish his dream of training a shirshu?”

“No. But I did.”

“Nice,” said the worker, starting to quickly jot down a few details on a spare bit of parchment, “Details on the apprentices, names, ages, preferred weapons, all of that good stuff.”

June racked her brains, “One boy and one girl, thirteen and twelve respectively. They absolutely suck with sticking to false names, so let’s keep their real ones: Zuko and Mai. Zuko’s a firebender and a swordsman, Mai’s a nonbender and a knife thrower. I haven’t seen everything they can do, though, so go ahead and mix and match a few blade skills onto that list. I’ll be training them in poisons, paralytics, animal handling, and tracking.”

“I can change Mai to Mei for the Earth Kingdom papers, but Zuko’s not going to fly. Too Fire Nation.”

“Lee then,” said June, “That’s common enough, and it’s what he tried to pass off as his name when we first met.”

“Lee’ll work,” said the worker, jotting down one more thing and looking back up at June, “Swing by and pick up the papers tomorrow. My partner has to forge a few signatures and stamp a few stamps in fancy ink, but they should be done then.”

“Pleasure doing business,” June held out her hand for the worker to shake.

“Keep an eye on those kids of yours. Rumors are going around about Fire Nation recruiters picking benders off the street. Something about a sacrificial battalion about to be led to the slaughter, and mainlanders trying to bargain their kids out and switch them with colonials.”

“Will do,” said June, exiting the cellar and making her way back to the inn. It wasn’t until later, after dinner and a few hours of training her charges into the ground, that she realized that the worker had called Mai and Zuko her kids.

Chapter Text

“If I were to find a plant, and on that plant were open pods revealing red and black seeds, should I gather those seeds and eat them?” quizzed June as she navigated Nyla up the cliffs of the mountain.

“No,” answered Mai, “They are most likely jequirity beans, and while not dangerous whole, if crushed are extremely deadly and kill within four to five days.”

“And how many beans would you need to kill a fully-grown man?”

“One too two,” said Zuko, “While one is enough to safely kill a nonbender, a firebender’s inner flame raises their temperature and naturally flushes out many poisons.”

“And what’s the rule if you ever want to poison a firebender?”

“If you want to accomplish the feat, use more poison and be more discreet,” chanted Mai and Zuko in unison. 

“Good,” said June. 

The brats had taken to June’s teachings like turtleducks to water. After coming back to the inn to find them surrounded with stolen scrolls, the three had laid out training regimes and a more detailed travel plan now that they could take the main roads patrolled by Fire Nation soldiers.

The first thing June had them do was a skill evaluation. After departing Shimabiro before sunrise, they rode Nyla out to a secluded spot in the woods. In the early morning light, June set up a few targets, made a crude training dummy, and told the kids to go wild.

An hour of watching the kids later, June had determined three things: she was going to marry the person who taught them how to handle blades, Zuko’s lack of depth perception was going to be a bit of a problem, and she was going to murder the bastards that gave her kids inferiority complexes.

When Mai had taken it upon herself to smuggle Zuko out of the Fire Nation, she had evidently brought enough blades to arm an entire platoon. Stilettos, senbon needles, kunai, sai, throwing stars, throwing knives, tessen fans, and a single wakizashi were all hidden on the girl’s body, with even more weapons in her travel bags. Both children were able to demonstrate mastery-level use of all of the weapons, though Mai was best with the throwing weapons while Zuko was best with the swords. June was deeply impressed. She had hunted some of the most dangerous criminals with only a fraction of the kids’ skill. She knew, in her heart and mind, that they’d make amazing bounty hunters.

However, neither kid was without flaw. Zuko, due to the bandage still over his eye, wasn’t able to match Mai in throwing accuracy. His technique was flawless, but he didn’t know how to compensate for his vision. The scowl on his face reminded June that she needed to get that checked out. As capable as she was when quickly patching up herself, June was no medic, and she didn’t have the slightest idea of how to treat such an intense burn in such a vulnerable area.

Both kids also had a lot of learning to do when it came to poisons, medicine, and the social side of being a bounty hunter. Neither knew the first thing about what and what not to eat in the colonies or the Earth Kingdom, and June had to stop them from accidentally eating nightshade. (Apparently, the deadly poison looked exactly like the Fire Nation purple berry, a sweet fruit native to the island chain. Who knew?) The kids knew the absolute basics of first-aid, and she’d have to remedy that if she wanted them to survive past their first major injury on the job. 

And she already knew what their acting and lying skills were like. She had her work cut out for her there.

But besides that, they were both greatly skilled, intelligent, and good kids. And when she told them that, all she got were blank stares in response. Mai asked about why she hadn’t pointed out her sloppy grip (her grip was perfect, though non-traditional. It would allow her to easily maneuver blades heavier than most kids her age could use). Zuko asked why she didn’t yell at him for missing the target (he got half bullseyes and half barely within the most inner ring. Yes, he wasn’t as good as Mai, but projectiles were Mai’s specialty and Zuko was dealing with no depth perception and an eye injury). The kids asked why she hadn’t disciplined them for not performing optimally (what?) and why she held back when she sparred with them (she didn’t hold back. She used the same level of skill as when she went after a target she needed alive. The only way she could have gone harder in the matches was if had used lethal force).

She had asked them if any of their teachers had ever used that much force when teaching them. They had answered that Mai’s father and the teachers at the palace had used more force when sparring with them, but Master Piandao hadn’t, as Master Piandao was on an entirely other level of swordsmanship and didn’t need to go all out when fighting them. 

June had taken a few deep breaths, exhaled, added the entire Fire Nation education system onto her shitlist, and reminded herself to ask Piandao out for a few drinks if they ever met.

After that enlightening morning, June had replanned the kids’ training regimes to include fewer weapon lessons and more survival training. Fewer nights were spent in inns and rented rooms, and more were spent out in the wilderness. Each night, June would teach the brats a single new survival skill, which they would work on until their results were up to snuff. 

The first night, June stopped in the middle of the forest and told the two to find them a good campsite (solid ground, good cover, clean water supply, etc.). The second night, she taught them how to start a fire. Third, fourth, fifth, and sixth were tent building, shelter finding, food gathering, and animal hunting respectively. Last night was campfire cooking lessons, with leftovers serving for breakfast.

Now, with the Pohuai Stronghold in sight, June quizzed her brats on the deadly plants of the region whilst driving Nyla towards a healer’s hut near the middle of the nearby swamp.

“Okay brats. We’re approaching a middle-aged to elderly woman, who we want to look at, and possibly, heal Zuko’s scar. How are we going to act?” she asked.

“Be polite and try not to scowl,” Mai and Zuko answered.

“And you will not?”

“Steal anything.”

“And why will you not be stealing anything?”

“Because people who help us and could potentially help others shouldn’t be stolen from.”

“Good,” June nodded once more and reigned Nyla to a stop. 

She dismounted and the kids followed after. June tied Nyla to a nearby tree and slowly approached the greenhouse. After her knocks on the greenhouse door were met with no response, June slowly opened the door.

“Helloooooo? Anyone in here?” she called to the plant-filled room.

There was no answer. June looked around the room and spotted a pair of eyes reflecting the light. With a thud, the animal leaped down from its place on the table and stepped forward.

“Meow.”

June stared down at the animal. It was white, long-haired, and kind of small. Its features were similar to that of a pygmy puma, but they were different. Softer. Less threatening.

“Is that a crococat?” asked Mai, looking at the animal.

“No, it doesn’t have scales. Is it a skunk-cat?” asked Zuko, “An albino one, maybe?”

June watched as the animal lifted its paw and licked it, staring at them as if it was somewhat intrigued, but overall bored, “I think it’s just….a cat,” she said hesitantly.

A moment of silence passed before Zuko spoke again, “Huh. Weird.”

“Miyuki, do we have guests?” came a croaky voice, “They better be more polite than the last ones. How rude does one person have to be to start a fight against their fellow patients?”

From behind a very tall plant stepped an old woman. She had long white hair that nearly touched the ground, and she hunched forward while walking, age eating away at her old form.

June bowed politely to the woman and spoke, “I am June, the bounty hunter. One of my apprentices has recently received a terrible burn over and around his eye. I was hoping that you could take a look at it.”

“Certainly,” said the woman, turning towards Zuko, “Let’s get you settled down now, dear, and have a look at your eye.”

Zuko was led over to a bench and instructed to sit down. The cat(?) jumped into his lap the second his legs became an optimal seat, and Zuko gently pet the creature while the woman removed his bandages and examined his injury.

“Without moving your head, tell me when you can see my hand in the corner of your vision,” said the woman, stretching her hand out as far as she could and slowly moving it closer to Zuko’s face.

The process was repeated a few times until the healer was satisfied with his answers. She then gently traced the scar, asking Zuko if he could feel anything, and if he could, was he in pain? 

Eventually, the healer ended her examination and gave her verdict, “You’ve done a good job preventing infections, but I’m sorry to say that there is some damage to the eye and the ear. He will never have perfect hearing or sight on his left side, but so long as you continue to take precautions and follow instructions, he shouldn’t completely lose those senses.”

Mai, June, and Zuko all sighed in relief, “That’s good. What are your instructions?”

“I would apply a hippophae-aloe ointment every night, and keep it bandaged for another week. Beyond that, it just needs time to heal.”

June bowed once more, “Thank you. How much for the treatment and the ointment?”

As the healer haggled with June over prices, there was another knock at the door. After the woman called out a welcome, in walked two archers with extremely distinct tattoos.

*****

Jiaying was not having a very good day.

After the incident with the ostrich horse, the two dozen eggs, and the pineapple-pear (which wasn’t even her fault. If Satoshi had just shut his mouth for once, they would have gotten away with it.), she had been placed on paperwork duty for a month . She was driving herself insane with boredom, and it hadn’t even been two weeks yet. So when Kamiko had walked into the archive room, asking if she wanted to head out to the Herbalist's to pick up their bi-monthly medicine resupply, she had jumped at the chance to get out and stretch her legs, even if it meant dealing with creepy old women and even creepier not-weasel-cats.

Want to make the trip over a little more interesting? asked Kamiko.

Jia grinned in response, You know it. The commander hasn’t let me onto the practice range at all. I’ve had to sneak out during lights out in order to keep up with my daily routine.

As opposed to your usual hours of sneaking out on top of daily practice?

Just shut up and race me to the greenhouse, Jia signed, taking off towards the mountain that held the Herbalist’s home.

Kamiko may be faster, but Jiaying knew how to climb. While Kamiko dealt with the endless, steep steps leading up to the top of the mountain, Jia shot up the cliff face like a wolf-ram. In the end, it was pretty close. Jia had to use Kamiko’s back as a springboard to get ahead of the girl. After Kamiko caught up and swatted her for the ending stunt, Jiaying knocked on the greenhouse door and opened it to come face-to-face with the most gorgeous being in existence.

Dressed in a form-fitting black dress was a breath-taking woman. Despite being weary from travel, the woman still looked to be on the peak of beauty: silky black hair, perfect makeup, and arms strong enough to break every bone in Jia’s body. 

“What’re you looking at?” asked the woman, and oh. Oh hot damn, that was a sexy voice. If Jia was a firebender, she knew that she would have started combusting right there.

“Are you two here to pick up the stronghold’s resupply?” asked the Herbalist, voice cutting through Jiaying’s gay panic.

Kamiko signed a yes, and silently laughed at Jia as she left, signing out a talk to her as she followed the woman towards the back of the greenhouse.

“So. You a Yuyan archer?” asked the very, very hot woman.

Jia started to sign out a yes before realizing that she wouldn’t understand her language, and simply nodded instead.

“Perfect. You looking to take recruits?”

That sentence brought forth quite the amount of scenarios: Jia and the woman flirting with each other, Jia impressing the woman with her archery skills, Jia bribing Cook Bunko to make his famous egg custards puffs for their first date.

Jia nodded once more, simultaneously signing out an oh Agni, YES, with her hands.

“Wonderful. Then I hope you won’t mind pointing my kids in the right direction. They’ve wanted to join the Yuyan archers for quite a while now.

That made Jiaying stop for a moment. For the first time, she spotted the girl and the boy hiding behind their mom like a pair of armadillo bear cubs.

Oh.

“I guess I better ask the commander for parenting tips,” Jiaying thought to herself as she silently waved at the two kids, “I’ve got a hot mom to impress and kids to win over.”

Chapter Text

Kamiko whistled sharply to catch Jiaying’s attention, Grab a bag already, you useless flirt.

I am not useless, Jia threw a sack of dried herbs over her shoulder, I am just a little preoccupied at the moment.

Do I need to tell Master Kazuhiko that you need to work on your multitasking? Kamiko raised an eyebrow at her fellow archer.

Jia shuddered at the mention of the trainer, No thank you. I am perfectly fine with keeping my limbs intact.

Please, no one’s lost any limbs from his training.

Yet.

Kamiko rolled her eyes and gestured towards the hot mom and the two kids. After a quick confirmation that they did, indeed, need an escort to the Pohuai Stronghold, Kamiko lit the tips of her fingers and started writing in the air.

“ Are we going to join the Yuyan? Yes, the brats want to be archers,” said the mom, “But I’m not going with them.”

That made Jia pause. Kamiko stopped short too and wrote out another question.

“ Am I a part of another clan? No, I’m a bounty hunter. The only family I’ve got is my shirshu.”

“And us,” said the boy.

“Yeah, and the brats. I’ve got a good thing going. I don’t want to ruin it by tying myself to one side of a pointless war.”

Kamiko quickly drew another question. The script hung heavy in the air as one of the kids, the boy, read it aloud.

“ You do know that you don’t have to fight in the military if you join our clan, right? Wait a minute, clan?” the boy asked incredulously, “I thought the Yuyan were just a troop of archers.”

“What difference does that make?” asked the woman.

“Clans have a lot more autonomy and independence than regular troops,” said the girl, “Regular soldiers answer to a chain of command and have no choice but to follow orders. But clans are independent bodies that own their own land, practice their own crafts, and answer to their clan head. So long as they pay their taxes, provide the designated number of soldiers for the military, and obey the Fire Lord, then they can do whatever they want.”

The girl turned back to the archers, “That’s why the Yuyan archers don’t answer to anyone but the Fire Lord, isn’t it? Because they’re specialized troops, they only have to answer to their commander. And if the commander is the head of the Yuyan clan….”

“Then they don’t have to obey the military at all!” the boy’s eyes lit up with realization, “If the Yuyan bought the Pohuai Stronghold and the land surrounding it, then they could have total control over their lifestyle.”

Jia nodded at their explanations. Kamiko started to write again, characters glowing in the air, “Let’s head back to the stronghold. It’ll be easier if we have someone who can verbally explain.”

“Don’t the Yuyan take a vow of silence?” asked the boy.

“Only the archers,” Kamiko wrote, “Everyone else--the young children, the farmers, the mechanics, the doctors, the animal hands, the craftsmen--they’re free to speak at their leisure.”

Jia picked up the last of the supplies and opened the Herbalist’s door with her hip. With words of goodbye from the old woman, and a parting snuff from the cat(?), the two archers led the family of three outside.

The woman (who Jia still didn’t know the name of. She had to find out; how could she write the woman love letters if she didn’t know her name?), looked at a tree and swore up a storm. She let out a shrill whistle and tapped her foot impatiently. There was a moment of silence, and then the sound of rustling as a saddled shirshu jumped out of a nearby patch of bushes.

“Nyla,” the woman scolded, “You can’t just run free whenever you want. If I tie you up, you stay tied up. Understand?”

The two kids giggled at the animal’s despaired whines. The mom hopped up onto the saddle and turned to offer her kids a hand. Once the family was seated, the mom turned to Jia and Kamiko and waved at them to lead on. 

Kamiko nodded and started to make her way down the steps carved into the mountain. Jiaying waited until the shirshu started after Kamiko and then followed, keeping the little family in sight.

“Will the woman be impressed if I can handle that stead of hers?” Jia wondered to herself, “If so, then I have to visit Hiroki in the stables. And what type of courting gift would she like? Food and flowers are always winners, but I saw that whip of hers. Maybe a new handle for that?”

The archer kept her eyes ahead and planned out her courting strategies all the way back to the stronghold. Catching the eye of the woman, who had turned to look at her, Jiaying melted at the intense gaze.

She felt a blush spread across her cheeks, “Oh spirits above. I’m a goner.”

*****

Zuko stared in wonder as they approached the impressive military base. 

Three metal walls circled the inner fortress, giving way to a new stretch of land beyond each one. The two archers led them through an outer circle filled with small patches of gardens and farmland, a middle circle that held bustling workers of all sorts, and the innermost circle that was being used as a training ground. 

Everywhere Zuko looked, warriors were perfecting their crafts. Blades crashed against blades, arrows flew through the air and struck targets no bigger than his palm, firebenders followed along with a master’s katas. It all at once reminded him of the palace training grounds and Master Piandao’s mansion in Shu Jing; dangerous and hectic, but a little bit like home.

One of the archers vanished from sight while the other guided Nyla over to a small stable towards the back of the inner circle. The archer dropped the bags she was carrying and whistled.

“That you, Jiaying?” came the voice of a middle-aged woman, “I could have sworn that Commander Hideaki still had you on archive duty.”

The woman walked out of the stables to meet them. She was short, barely taller than Uncle, but her shoulders were broad and her sleeveless top revealed a decent amount of muscle for someone her age. The archer, Jiaying, signed out a few words in the Yuyan sign language. The woman must have understood them, as she responded verbally to the signs.

“Even if Kamiko offered to take you, you still better hope that the Commander doesn’t catch you skipping out on your duty. You know he’ll extend your banishment from training if you don’t learn your lesson.”

Jiaying started to sign something, but the woman cut her off, “I don’t care if it was Satoshi’s fault. You’re still the one who lured a mongoose-swan into the visiting general’s quarters and then set it on the general’s ostrich horse. You’re lucky no one outside the clan could figure out that it was you. You could have been court-martialed! And if you’re court-martialed….”

Jiaying rolled her eyes and signed something back to the woman.

“Exactly. Court-martialed clansmen don’t get to return to Pohuai. Do you really want that?”

The archer shook her head.

“Good. Now get back to archive duty. I’ll take the new recruits to the Commander.”

Jiaying waved goodbye and started off towards the tall pagoda tower in the center of the inner circle. The woman turned to look up at June and introduced herself.

“My name is Azumi,” the woman bowed in the style of the flame, “It is an honor to welcome you into our clan.”

“June,” the bounty-hunter bowed her head in turn, “You the stable master around here?”

“Yes. I’ve never cared for a shirshu before, but I do have experience with komodo rhinos. Does your mount have a similar diet?”

“Nyla needs a bit more meat, but similar amounts of exercise. I’d also request that he stay away from any particularly strong scents. He needs his nose to navigate.”

“That would be easy enough to accommodate,” Azumi smiled, “Go ahead and lead him into an empty stall. I’ll take you three up to meet the Commander. You can unpack later.”

Zuko dismounted, Mai and June right behind him. As June followed Azumi’s instructions, Zuko and Mai double-checked to make sure that they had all of their weapons. Once the other two returned from making Nyla comfortable, they were led out of the stable and across the yard once more.

A few people stopped what they were doing to wave at Azumi and catch a glance of the mysterious party of three. Azumi responded to the friendly gestures with some of her own but didn’t slow her stride. After entering the fortress, Zuko followed the stable master down a few winding hallways until they were stopped at a pair of large double doors.

Azumi knocked on the doors and waited for a bit. When no response came, she opened the doors and ushered June, Mai, and Zuko in.

“Three people are here to join the clan, Commander Hideaki.”

Seated at an intricately carved desk was a man around Master Piandao’s age. His black hair was starting to gray at the roots, and there were a few laugh lines and crow's feet on his face. Around his eyes were the distinct tattoos that Jiaying and the other archer had, but Azumi lacked. They made the Commander’s serious expression all that more intimidating.

The man signed something, and Azumi translated, “The Commander welcomes you to the Pohuai Stronghold and wishes to know why you would like to join the clan.”

Zuko stepped forward and bowed deeply in respect, “Honored commander, while my companions and I are ready and eager to join the Yuyan clan, that is not the only reason we have come here.”

Commander Hideaki raised a brow and signed once more.

“Continue speaking, young man,” said Azumi.

Zuko nervously glanced around, “Is this office secure?”

“Of course.”

Zuko took a deep breath and shook out his nerves. He looked to Mai and June for reassurance, and they met his eyes with silent encouragement. They had agreed on the road that he should tell the leader of the Yuyan the truth. He couldn’t lie to save his life, and if he were to build their acquaintance upon falsehoods then the Yuyan as a whole were unlikely to trust any of them.

“Before I begin, I ask that you hear our story completely before passing judgment. We have no proof for what we are about to say, but I swear on my honor and my flame that all of it is true,” Zuko met the commander’s gaze and spoke, “I am Prince Zuko of the Fire Nation. And I need your and your people’s help.”

*****

Hideaki of the Yuyan clan would like to think that he’s seen it all at this point. He’s led one of the largest clans in the Fire Nation and held one of the most important outposts for over thirty years now. He’s a father by both blood and adoption, a husband, a seasoned warrior, an accomplished archer, and a master firebender. He’s survived dozens of battles, long winters, and countless food shortages. Agni, he’s survived Jiaying’s teenage years.

But the prince standing before him begging for his aid takes the cake.

Even he, a man who’s spent most of his life avoiding politics, knew of the split in the royal court. The prince’s (apparently fake) death had utterly destroyed any chance of peace or agreement between the two camps. Rumors swirled about how and why the prince had died, but no one could piece together the complete truth.

“And now I know why,” Hideaki thought to himself sardonically. 

Azumi had started crying about halfway through the tale and had sat down in a chair near the corner. The three newcomers had claimed the sofa he kept around for when some of the people under his charge needed a safe place to collapse and sleep. He let his eyes land on the party of three and couldn’t help but let a smile escape himself. 

“Those three really would make great Yuyan,” he thought as Lady Mai yawned into her open hand. A prince willing to sacrifice himself for his people, a girl willing to sacrifice herself for her friend, and a bounty-hunter willing to ferry two children to safety? The spirits of his ancestors would haunt him forever if he let them walk away. They encompassed their core beliefs: honor, loyalty, resourcefulness, and the will to enforce justice.

That was assuming that they were telling the truth.

Hideaki would admit that their tale made sense, but it was almost too fanciful to believe. And who would want to believe them? To want their Fire Lord to be a homicidal maniac? To want their most powerful generals to not care for their people? To want every noble in court to be compliant in the murder of a prince, save for a single girl?

With shaking hands, from anger or sadness he didn’t know, Hideaki started to sign out his response to the prince.

Azumi wiped her face and translated, “The Commander agrees to the deployment of the Yuyan archers. But there is a condition.”

“What is it?” asked the prince boy. (He had to stay a boy. If he was a prince, he’d ask for forgiveness later. But for now, he stayed a boy.)

“If the forty-first division is truly at the ambush like you claim they will be, Commander Hideaki will believe you to be telling the truth and welcome you into the clan with open arms. But….” Azumi trailed off with a swallow.

Say it, Hideaki signed, They should know what will befall them if they are lying.

“But,” Azumi continued, “If you are found to be lying about the forty-first, then the Commander will assume that you are pretenders trying to claim the prince’s identity and turn you into the Fire Nation as traitors to the throne.”

The boy looked as if someone had struck him. He turned to his friends and quickly conversed with them. When the rapid whispers stopped, the boy turned to Hideaki and bowed, “We thank you for your help and accept your conditions.”

Hideaki bowed his head in acknowledgment and signed once more.

“Very well,” Azumi translated, “Then we should begin planning. How do you expect to save your forty-first division?”

The girl pulled a scroll out from somewhere and unrolled it onto his desk, “The division will make contact here in one-and-a-half moons. There will be another two weeks of marching inland before they are in position.”

“This is what we planned following that,” the boy took over the explanation from there. They rehashed and refined the plan long into the night, but in the end, everyone left Hideaki’s office prepared and ready to save the soldiers of the forty-first.

Chapter Text

“This is what we planned following that,” said Zuko, pointing to a spot on the map, “Once the forty-first lands, the command of the division will transfer to the ground commander, most likely a lieutenant colonel. We won’t know who that is or whether or not they know of the generals’ plan, but we do have an advantage.”

Of course we do, signed Commander Hideaki, Lt. colonels serve alongside their men.

*****

“I’m here with the paperwork, sir,” said Minori as she entered his office, “It took some string-pulling to return you to active duty, but these will be the last of it.”

“Thank you, Lieutenant,” Tamotsu said calmly, “When should I expect the major to kick down my door?”

“If Second Lieutenant Nobu’s messenger hawk is anything to go by, I’d say about an hour.”

“How thoughtful of Nobu. He’s given me just enough time to complete the forms and file them, so the major doesn’t burn them when he inevitably interrupts my afternoon.”

Minori agreed with a huff, placing the papers in front of him. Tamotsu pulled out his calligraphy set and got to work, scanning papers while mixing the ink. He flew through the forms, signing his signature and stamping verification stamps as needed. He just barely handed Minori the final page when the double doors of his office were kicked in with a bang.

“What,” huffed Major Tatsuya, “The fuck, Tamotsu?”

Tamotsu waved Minori away, silently urging her to get his transfer filed and approved before Tatsuya could do anything to stop it. She, as competent as ever, acknowledged his silent order with nothing but a raised eyebrow and a quick exit out of the second-story window so as to avoid the furious major at the door.

“I’m serious, Tamotsu,” Major Tatsuya stormed up to the desk and slammed his hands on the edge of it, “I knew you lost seventy percent of your impulse control when the colonel died, but this is why you got Minori. To avoid stupid stunts like this.”

“I’ll have you know that Lieutenant Minori approves of my actions, and plans to transfer with me,” Tamotsu opened up the bottom-left drawer of his desk and pulled out two glasses and the hidden bottle of sake, “In fact, all of the old unit, save you, is transferring as well.”

Tamotsu poured two generous glasses and handed one to the major, “Of course, we’d be more than happy to have you if you decided to join us. We all know how hard it is to find people you can trust to watch your back.”

Tatsuya swallowed half of the glass in one gulp and eyed Tamotsu, “Watching your back is one thing, but this? This is suicide. Do you really think the colonel would approve of this if he was here?”

Tamotsu’s eyes darkened, “That’s exactly why I’m doing this, Tatsuya. Because if the colonel was still here, this wouldn’t be happening. And even if by some small chance he wouldn’t be able to prevent it, you and I both know that he’d be the first to volunteer to head the division.”

Tatsuya swore and took another drink while Tamotsu continued to press, “The oldest in the unit is nineteen. Do you think we should leave the lives of a bunch of kids, and don’t argue about legalities and emancipation they are children, to the tender mercies of a nineteen-year-old with no experience?”

“And the tender mercies of a twenty-four-year-old whose only battle was that shit-show of a siege is any better?”

“If it wasn’t me, then the battalion was going to be led by Colonel Akihiro.”

“ That rank-climber?” Tatsuya nearly dropped his glass in surprise, “I’d rather follow a badgermole into battle. He’s going to do whatever his mommy tells him, and then cry into her shirt about how the real world is nothing like those battle simulations they had us running in the academy.”

Tamotsu scowled, “I know. Tatsuya, you’ve been fighting on the front for the past six months. How long have you been back on the mainland?”

“I landed thirty-six hours ago. I had just enough time to crash, sleep for a day, gorge myself on street food, bathe, and then come over here to beat your skull in for signing up to lead a battalion right into a trap.”

Tamotsu’s scowl deepened, “And what, exactly, have you heard about the late Prince Zuko’s passing?”

“Not much. Just that he was assassinated about a moon and a half after I took up my post.”

“Well get comfortable. You’ve got a few months' worth of court gossip to catch up on.”

*****

“About an hour before the attack, we plan to make contact with a soldier of the forty-first,” Zuko said, “If they trust the ground commander, then we will contact them directly and inform them of our plans. If not, then we’ll have them instruct us to an inter-unit leader; someone who looks out for the battalion members and is listened to when they give orders.”

So Commander Hideaki but make him younger and even more of a panicked military dad, signed Jiaying, who had muscled her way into the commander’s office and their current conversation. She, along with a few other squad leaders, had been given a quick run-down of the situation on Hideaki’s insistence. By Yuyan law, he couldn’t deploy troops without approval from the clan, and he refused to send his archers in blind.

“I guess?” said Zuko, after Azumi translated Jia’s signing, “Moving on. Once we spread the word about what we plan to do, we can set up the evacuation team and the archers that will be covering our retreat.”

The archers might not be enough, Commander Hideaki pointed out, Don’t get me wrong, we’re known as the best shots in the world for a reason, but the forty-first will be pinned on all sides and greatly outnumbered. 

“It’d be best if we had some way to directly counter the earthbenders,” said Mai, “But the whole point of this is to avoid a direct confrontation. If we send in too many firebenders, it’s going to be chaos, and the Earth soldiers will be all too willing to bury us if we start throwing flames.”

There was silence in the room as everyone thought. Suddenly, an idea came to Jiaying, who snapped her fingers to draw everyone’s attention, What if we brought in Iwao and Ryota?

The idea has merit, Hideaki signed cautiously, But are you sure you can convince them? Ryota’s never stepped foot on a battlefield in his life, and Iwao came to us because he was looking for a place to avoid the Fire Nation military. He’ll be far from the first person to volunteer to help.

Just trust me, sir, Jiaying signed confidently, Colony-born brats like us have to stick together. I’ll convince them to help and whip them into fighting shape with time enough to spare.

Alright then, Commander Hideaki turned from his subordinate and back to the others, I may, young man, have a solution to the hole in our extraction plan. But first, tell me: how do you feel about your citizens of mixed ancestry?

*****

Tatsuya slammed back the remainder of his sake and placed his empty cup on the desk, “Shit, Tamotsu. His own son?”

“Yeah.”

“We knew Ozai was a kin-slaying dick. But his own son? In front of the entire court? Over a disagreement about troop positions?”

“I know.”

“Shit,” Tatsuya said softly, “You were there? And you didn’t stop it?”

“I wasn’t allowed into the duel room, no,” Tamotsu rolled his shoulders and leaned a bit closer to Tatsuya, “Ozai didn’t want to chance any of the old guard stepping in and taking the prince’s place. He only let in his staunchest supporters and those who hadn’t chosen a definite side. The loyalists so he could showcase his strength, the neutral parties so he could demonstrate what happened to those who got in his way.”

“Then how did you learn the truth?” asked Tatsuya.

Tamotsu gave a bitter grin, “Ozai’s show of brutality worked against him. Some were cowed into following him, but even more decided that the Fire Lord went too far. A flirty conversation here, a few invites to tea there, and I was able to get the whole story out of the daughter of a general. She was terrified, ‘Suya.”

Tamotsu poured another glass for each of them, “Paranoid the entire time about spies overhearing. Told me straight out that she was flattered, but she was revisiting some proposals she got from a few colonial boys. I don’t know if she was talking about job offers or marriage proposals, but I could see that she was desperate to get off the mainland.”

“It makes sense,” Tatsuya drawled, “The Fire Lord was willing to kill his son over a small disagreement, and then send an assassin to finish the job. What’s he going to do to everyone else? If the crown prince wasn’t safe, then who is? The generals? The Fire Sages? The rest of the royal family? It doesn’t sound like it.”

“Exactly. And that’s reason number two of why I’m volunteering to lead the forty-first.”

“....it wasn’t just because you’re some noble brat clinging to the ancient ways?”

Tamotsu snorted, “Tatsuya, I am the youngest lieutenant colonel in the nation’s history, so long as you exclude anyone in the royal family. I’ve been trained in politics since I could talk, and I was Colonel Lu Ten’s adjutant for the entirety of his military career. I am a master firebender and a dead-set traditionalist who’s seen more than enough of my fair share of war. And to every Ozai supporter in court and the military? I am a threat. I may not have any claim to the throne, but with Prince Zuko dead, I won’t need one.”

“I get that you’ve never been in the royal court a day in your life, so I’ll break down the legalities for you,” he continued, “An extremely strong argument can be made that Ozai killed Azulon. We know that he, or at least someone, orchestrated the death of the colonel, even if we can’t prove it. But to have a perfectly healthy ruler die less than a week after the heir? And to have said ruler abruptly pass the throne onto the unfavored son without giving any signs or threats beforehand? That is unquestionably a murder and a coup.”

“Okay. But what does all of that have to do with you?” Tatsuya asked.

“Easy. Who was the colonel’s closest friend and most loyal supporter?”

“You.”

“And how likely is it for General Iroh to remarry and have another kid?”

“Slim-to-none.”

“And what is the official royal stance on adoption?”

Tatsuya thought for a moment and then shrugged, “That it’s not allowed?”

Tamotsu shook his head, “The opposite. Fire Lady Asuka and her wife, Fire Lady Hoshi, set the precedent for adopting heirs into the line of succession. Fire Lord Kichiro reaffirmed that right when he refused to marry and adopted Fire Lord Fumio as his heir. I’m not big-headed enough to claim that General Iroh will adopt me into the royal family, but I do know him well enough to confidently say that his only choices are to worm his way into Princess Azula’s affections and try to beat out Ozai’s influences, or to find another person to take the throne.”

“The General isn’t stupid. He knows he’ll never gain the princess’s trust so long as she believes she has her father’s favor. So he’s most likely going to search for a new heir,” Tamotsu finished, “And the first place he’s going to look is amongst the colonel’s former colleagues.”

“How can you be so sure?” Tatsuya eyed his friend, “No one’s talked to the general in months. He was on that moral-raising Pai Sho trip, and then he abandoned it halfway through once he got word of Prince Zuko’s demise. For all we know, General Iroh could be back on the marriage mart looking for someone willing to give him heirs and spares.”

“Even if adoption’s not the general’s decided course of action, the nobles have an annoying habit of being thorough,” Tamotsu said, “In the last moon I’ve had five different attempts on my life. Minori’s had two, Nobu’s had four, and Yoshiyuki’s had three. The unit’s not safe on the mainland, but there was no way the higher-ups were willing to transfer me and the team somewhere else.”

“Except right into the jaws of a trap,” Tatsuya scowled, “Damn it, Tamotsu. Your suicidal plan is starting to make sense.”

“That’s the worse part, isn’t it? When the insane starts to sound like the only reasonable option,” the lieutenant colonel met the eyes of the major, “Listen, Tatsuya. We aren’t going into this unprepared. We know we’re walking into a death trap, and we know it’s going to get ugly. But knowing you’re going to face terrible odds is the first step to rising above them. We are going to break the news to the battalion, train them up as much as possible, and make sure the greatest number of people survive. Then we just pray to Agni for a miracle and hope that there are enough soldiers left to not dissolve the unit.”

“So,” he said, as Minori walked through the office doors, transfer papers in hand, “Are you going to join us, or not?”

Tatsuya shook his head and grabbed Tamotsu’s brush off his desk, “You’re crazy.”

“I know.”

“Too noble for your own good.”

“I know.”

“You could always just retire and go live a peaceful life in the country.”

“My military term of service isn’t up yet.”

“Excuses, excuses,” said Tatsuya as he signed his name on the forms, “Just be happy that you’ve got people like me and the lieutenant here to watch your back. Agni knows you’ll be lost without us.”

“What an astute observation, major,” said Minori, taking the papers from his grip, “Do you want me to notify the others of your decision, or would you like to inform them yourself?”

“I want to see the looks on their faces when they find out who’s going to be guarding their backs,” said the man, waving goodbye to Tamotsu, “See ya’ tomorrow at sunrise, you noble brat. I’ve got to make sure you didn’t slack on your bending while I was gone.”

“I’ll be there, you farm hick,” said Tamotsu.

“It’s a fishing village, not a farming one!”

“Semantics!” he laughed to himself as he saw his friend exit his office. After a few more hours of paperwork, he addressed his adjutant as they left the building, “Be honest, lieutenant. How fucked are we?”

“Permission to speak freely sir?”

“Of course.”

“Like an owl-cat in heat, sir.”

“That’s what I was afraid of.”

*****

After hauling Zuko and Mai off to bed, June hunted down an empty training yard to work out some of her pent-up energy. Time flew by as she threw knives, ran through katana forms, and practiced attacks with her whip. It wasn’t until she heard approaching footsteps was she broke out of her zone and noticed that it was now a little bit after twilight.

She looked around and met the eyes of one of the archers that had escorted them to the base. Jiaying, if she remembered correctly.

The woman approached with a candle in one hand a large sack in the other. With a quick wave, she handed June a small strip of paper from out of the bag and offered the candle so she could read it.

“Can’t sleep?” 

June shook her head, “No. Just can’t turn my brain off.”

Another scrap of paper was handed to her, “Thinking about the meeting today?”

“Yeah. The kids are stubborn and skilled, but I’m a bit worried.”

“Bitten off more than they can chew.”

“They can handle it; I know they can. But it’s not the battle I’m worried about, it’s the fallout. As much as they try, they won’t be able to save everyone. And they’re the type to put the blame on themselves when things go wrong.”

“They sound like good kids.”

June swallowed, “They are. Better than I was at their age at least.”

The woman grabbed June’s hand and gave it a squeeze, “They’ve got good hearts. Hideaki would be crazy to turn them away.”

“Thanks for the reassurance. I just hope that the plan will work.”

Jiaying gave her another note, “No, the flaming groundhog-squirrels were not my fault.”

June barked a sharp laugh, “Excuse me, what? That’s pretty random.”

Jia read the note and started to desperately shake her head, fishing out three more papers and passing them to June in quick succession.

“Shit, wrong note.”

“I meant….”

Jiaying gave her the last message, this one longer than all of the others, “The plan’s good. I won’t call it ‘perfect’ or ‘foolproof’ because that is just asking for the universe to prove us wrong, but it’s as good as it’s likely to get. I trust my commander, I trust my squad, and I trust my fellow archers. We’ll get that battalion home safe, don’t you worry.”

June let her lips rise into a soft smile, “That means a lot. Thank you. For the reassurance and the laugh. But how in the world would the groundhog-squirrels come up in a casual conversation? And how many papers do you have, anyway?”

“I sat down with my friends for over four hours and wrote out every possible conversation starter and response we could possibly come up with.”

“And the groundhog-squirrels?”

Jia gave June multiple notes, some with questions and some with responses. June read them, and pieced together the potential talk they could have had, starting with ‘what’s the greatest prank you ever pulled/ever saw pulled’ and ending with the aforementioned, ‘no, the flaming groundhog-squirrels were not my fault.’

“Huh. You and your friends sound like a riot.”

“Interesting enough to tempt you into having a nightcap with us?”

June met the archer’s eager eyes and nodded, “Why not. I haven’t had a good drink since I picked the kids up in Danhou.”

“Perfect. I hope you like cocktails because Satoshi is the KING of making them.”

After thinking a moment, another note was handed to June, “Just don’t tell anyone I said that.”

June laughed again and took Jiaying’s offered hand. After all of the stress that Zuko and Mai gave her? She deserved to take a break.

Chapter Text

Mai knows, on a conceptual level, that managing a large number of people is a grueling task. As the heir to a noble family, she’s been forced to sit through the traditional administrative lessons just like any other child in her position. Her parents even instructed her tutors to add lessons in war strategy and army commanding in preparation for her betrothal to Zuko and friendship with Azula. 

But memorizing ancient sieges and running numbers on needed supplies cannot hold a candle to the chaos of readying an army to march into battle. 

Mai started the day normally. Zuko woke her half an hour after he finished his morning meditation, and the two went down to one of the training grounds for their daily practice session. After stretches, warm-ups, and checking each of their weapons, they followed their normal routine: throwing knives, sword katas, sprints, other exercises, and then ending it on a high note with a sword-fighting spar.

June had found them after they just finished their sprints and started the rest of their workout routine. She gave pointers and demonstrated different movements that would better build muscle where they wanted it. They listened intently, completed them, and then hurriedly moved on to the best part of the morning: the spar.

Zuko eagerly unsheathed his dual dao blades while Mai pulled out her katana. They bowed to each other, took their stances, and they were off.

There was a clang as metal met metal, Mai’s katana blocking Zuko’s dao. Zuko pulled back and separated his blades, but Mai was quicker. She darted forward and thrust her katana towards the top half of his torso. He took a few steps back and to the side, dao arcing with his movement and slicing at her undefended side. Mai leaned forward to avoid them and held her wrist up. Her arm guard met Zuko’s and his right arm was thrown off course. Mai moved in closer, katana ready to strike.

But just when she was about to go in for the win, Zuko spat red-orange flames at her.

She cartwheeled back and regained her footing, “You cheater! Firebendings not allowed!”

“Hasn’t Master Piandao taught you anything? There is no cheating when it comes to a real spar,” Zuko smiled a bit and readied his arms again.

“Well in that case,” Mai pulled out a wakizashi and gripped it tight in her off-hand, “If you can use firebending, I can use my extra weapons.”

A look of regret flashed across Zuko’s face for a second before it fell back into a tight smile. He chuckled nervously, “I’m in trouble.”

The spar was quick to end after that. With Mai now also wielding two blades, the only advantage Zuko had were his flames. And Zuko, while an admirable bender for someone their age, couldn’t match Mai’s pinpoint attacks. That, coupled with the fact that Zuko was a firebender bending on an empty stomach, had gotten Mai the win.

When Mai had disarmed Zuko, and Zuko bowed in defeat, the both of them were shocked at the sound of applause that rose from around them. Mai looked away from her friend to see that they had gathered quite a large crowd. Archers, soldiers, children, and regular people going about their day had stopped to watch them. Mai caught a few comments on their admirable fighting prowess and the like when a sweaty head buried itself into the back of her shoulder.

“Make them stop,” Mai glanced behind her to see an extremely red Zuko trying to shrink himself behind her, “That was just a normal spar. Why’re they applauding? Surely they’ve seen a sword fight before.”

Mai raised a single brow in disbelief, “Zuko, you are, well, were the crown prince. The real question is how have you not gotten used to attention yet? I know that you’ve practiced in front of crowds before.”

“Well, the crowds back home tell me how to fix my mistakes, not whatever this is.”

“Fair enough,” Mai said, “But you’re not an earthbender, Zuko. So stop trying to make the ground swallow you up and come get breakfast with me.”

Mai bowed to the crowd in thanks and asked where the mess hall was. She guided her embarrassed friend towards the sweet smell of food. The crowd, however, followed them. They were met with questions every step of the way: who taught them, why did they pick their weapons, etc., etc.

Mai answered what she could and nudged Zuko whenever there was a question she couldn’t answer for him. The talking continued throughout breakfast until a middle-aged man approached their table when he saw their dishes were empty.

The man was about the same age as Commander Hideaki. He was extremely well built, but there were signs of his age beginning to show: dark brown hair starting to gray at the roots, deep laugh lines carved into his face, scars more faded than a normal soldier’s. The man had no tattoo over his eyes, so he wasn’t an archer, but he did have the wariness and alertness of a seasoned soldier.

“Your firebending isn't half-bad, your highness.”

“Thank you?” Zuko didn’t know whether to take the man’s words as a compliment or not, “How did you know I was the prince?”

The man barked out a laugh, “Highness, you told Jiaying a secret. The entire base knew your story by sunrise. She didn’t mean to let it slip, of course, but Satoshi challenged her to a drinking contest last night, and she’s always been an overly truthful drunk. Well, that and a flirty one. Jia must be pretty grateful that that companion of yours can’t read signs yet. Kamiko said her compliments got quite flowery, and the bounty hunter doesn’t seem the type to appreciate fancy words like that.”

Mai filed that piece of information away for later as the man continued, “My point was, your bending isn’t half-bad, but it’s not great either. I’m Master Raiden, the firebending instructor on base. If you’re comfortable, I’ll be willing to give you a few pointers.”

Zuko looked at the man uncertainly and grabbed Mai by the shoulders, “Sidebar.”

He walked them around a corner and into a relatively private area, “What do you think?”

“I think it comes down to how comfortable you are, Zuko,” Mai said easily, “You haven’t gotten any firebending lessons since we left the palace, and besides your morning meditations, dry katas, and occasional flames during spars, you haven’t kept up with your bending practice. I think now’s as good a time as any to start working on them again, but if you don’t feel comfortable with Master Raiden, don’t force yourself.”

“I think….I think I want to try, at least,” Zuko said, “But I don’t think I want anyone around. If I’m alone with Master Raiden, then no one will see me mess up. And it won’t remind me of….of the last time I went up against an opponent.”

“Tell him that, then. He’ll understand. He approached you knowing your story and knowing you could say no. He wouldn’t have done it if he was prepared for that answer,” Mai ushered Zuko back into the mess hall.

Master Raiden was talking to a few others, who pointed him towards the pair when they saw them approach, “Well. Do you think you’d like to train a bit, or would you rather do so some other time?”

Zuko bowed in the style of the flame, “I’d very much like to train with you, Master Raiden. But may we have a….private session?”

Master Raiden bowed back, “Of course, young prince,” he rose and turned to Mai, “Will you be joining us?”

“No. I’m a nonbender, and Zuko doesn’t want a crowd.”

“Are you sure?”

“I’m positive I can find something to do,” Mai said easily, “We’re prepping for battle. I doubt I’ll have a second of alone time today.”

*****

After telling Zuko good luck, Mai went to find June, figuring that she might know where she was most needed. She checked the stables first, but found them empty, save for Azumi and another boy a bit older than her polishing armor.

“Ah, Lady Mai,” Azumi said cheerfully, “What’re you doing here?”

“I’m looking for June. Have you seen her?”

“She stopped by this morning to check on her shirshu, but other than that, no.”

Mai was a bit disappointed, but she was curious at their actions, “Why are you two polishing armor? Aren’t there others that can do that?”

“This is armor for the komodo rhinos,” the boy said, “I’m Hiroki, one of the stablehands here. The others are out getting the rhinos and the ostrich horses checked for any injury or diseases. Can’t have our steads sick in the midst of battle, can we?”

“I guess. But this is a pretty big base. Why have I only seen the one stable? Why aren’t there more mounts? I don’t think you have enough to form a full cavalry.”

“We don’t really need one,” Hiroki said, “The archers are all about stealth, and our regular soldiers are trained to keep up with them. We have a few ships for transportation, but otherwise we march. After all, it’s hard to stay stealthy on the back of a komodo rhino.”

Mai nodded in understanding, “Any idea where June could have gone?”

“Might be with Jiaying. That girl’s been sticking to your sister like glue. The Commander had her on archive duty last I heard.”

“Thanks,” Mai left the stables and headed towards the pagoda tower in search of the archive room.

*****

After a bit of wandering, Mai found herself in the basement of the fortress. After passing through a pair of solid and heavy steel doors, she was met with a vast room of floor-to-ceiling shelves filled with tomes and scrolls.

“A little help?” came a voice. Mai looked to see a young girl of seventeen or eighteen buckling under the weight of numerous scrolls. She went forward to help, grabbing the scrolls that the teen was dropping and guiding her over to an empty table.

The other girl dropped down her scrolls and smiled, “Thanks for that. Do you mind searching for a map with me?”

“Sure,” Mai said, “What’s all of this for?”

“The Commander, Archivist Masahiro, and Navigator Tsuyoshi have been holed up in the Commander’s office all day running numbers and planning out our route to the Kitobetsu region. I was asked to come down and find a map of the region, but I don’t have the slightest clue of where to find it so I grabbed every map I could find.”

“That sounds a bit counter-productive,” Mai said, “Is it a map of the land or map of the sea?”

“Land.”

Mai pushed half of the scrolls to the other end of the table, “That’s half gone right there. We can search these for the right one….”

“Kira.”

“Mai.”

They found the map easily enough and started placing the others back where Kira found them, “Have you seen Jiaying or June? I’ve been searching for them all morning.”

“The Commander gave Jia permission to skip out on archive duty so she could train Ryota and Iwao. They should be somewhere on the outer wall of the base.”

“Thanks for the instructions,” Mai pushed the last scroll into its proper slot and left the archive with Kira, making her way back up to the ground level.

*****

Mai passed through the walls of the inner and middle circles of the base. Waving and nodding to a few field workers who were harvesting food for the upcoming march, she found a ladder and used it to climb to the top of the outer wall. There were a few guards at their post, but they paid her little mind, instead focusing outwards and searching for any signs of approaching people. 

Mai circled the wall, eventually ending on the east-most side. There, down below, was June and Jia arguing with two men. Well, arguing wasn’t the right word. The one man, an incredibly tall, incredibly muscled laborer, was drinking out of a canteen and leaning against a boulder. The other, a bit leaner and much slimmer in the shoulders, was trying to convince Jiaying of something to no avail.

“I’m a potter, Jia. I don’t have the power behind my bending that Iwao has. I don’t see how I could possibly help.”

Jia signed something and the man spoke back, “I know my bending’s more precise, but precision is why you and the other archers are going to be there. I’ve never been a warrior, and I’ve never wanted to be. And you certainly can’t turn me into one in time to depart.”

More signs from Jia.

“What do you mean you’re not training me to be a warrior?” he screeched, “Do you expect me to survive the battle or not?”

“Let ‘er finish, Ryota,” the man leaning against the boulder said, “Ya’ picking at details tha’ don’ gotta be picked at. It's clear tha’ Jia wants us ta’ cover each others’ weak points. I’m all big moves, no precision. You’re all precise moves, no power to back ya’self up. If we work ta’gether though, we’ll be just fine.”

Ryota grumbled a bit, “Why did I ever agree to this?”

“Because Jia’s got a gift with blackmail.”

“Shut up, Iwao.”

Taking the lull in conversation as her chance to speak up, Mai yelled down, “Hey June. What do you want me to work on today?”

“Come down here and help me throw projectiles at these two,” June called back up, “Jiaying wants us to replicate a battlefield as much as possible. That means free target practice for us and a crash course in battle awareness for them.”

“Got it,” Mai dashed back to the ladder and climbed down the wall. She left the outer circle of the base and made her way over to the quartet. June waved her over and gestured to a small pile of pebbles.

“Feel free to throw rocks whenever,” she said, “As I said, we want this to be realistic. Earthbenders aren’t going to use knives all the time like we do. Keep them on their toes.”

Mai nodded and threw a stiletto at Iwao. He ducked it and threw himself behind the boulder. Mai smiled a bit. This was going to be fun.

*****

Two weeks passed and the party of backup departed from the Pohuai Stronghold. Three ships set sail for Kitobetsu; two fully boarded with archers and soldiers, one with a skeleton crew prepared to treat the injuries from the forty-first and anyone else who got hurt in the battle.

Mai had spent the two weeks rotating between practicing with the archers, training with June, and throwing rocks at Ryota and Iwao. Zuko had alternated between bending with Master Raiden and joining in on the rock-throwing. Ryota and Iwao had honed their bending and worked well together. On the last day before departing, Jiaying had slapped each of them on the back and declared them as fit for battle as they’ll ever be.

Zuko himself had worked his bending back up to where it previously had been before leaving the palace. Master Raiden was proving to be a much better bending instructor than Zuko’s past tutors. 

“Do you think this’ll work?” Zuko asked, staring at the rapidly receding coastline.

“I think every person here is going to do their absolute best to ensure that this all goes to plan,” June answered slowly, “Just….you know there’s going to be some people who don’t walk out of this, right?”

“We know,” said Mai, “All we can do is stick to the plan and do our best. Whatever happens, happens.”

*****

“Ya’ know this is still gonna be a massacre, right?” Tatsuya said, stress and exhaustion making his courtly manners slip, allowing his low-class accent to shine through, “Ya’ can’t train ‘n army ‘n a month, ‘Motsu. Jus’ can’t be done.”

“I know, ‘Suya. I know,” Tamotsu threw a blanket over Tatsuya’s shoulders, “But I can teach them enough to stay alive. Ryuu’s got a good head on their shoulders. With any luck, they’ll see the rest of the battalion through while we take point. The Earth Army should figure out pretty soon that we’re just a diversion and turn tail to take care of the real threat.”

The Lieutenant Colonel guided his friend to a sleeping mat laid out in the corner of the tent, “All we can do is stick to the plan and do our best. Whatever happens, happens.”

Tamotsu let his subordinate fall asleep and turned back to his pile of papers. He finished up his coded message and went to find Minori. He caught her just as she was walking away from Lance Corporal Ryuu. Excluding Tamotsu and his team, the young soldier was the oldest in the battalion and the de facto leader amongst the recruits. 

“Sir,” Ryuu saluted, “Permission to turn in for the night?”

“Granted. Get some rest, corporal. We’ve got a long day ahead of us.”

Ryuu bowed and turned into their tent. Minori looked at Tamotsu, “Is there anything I can do for you, sir?”

“Take this to the nearest tavern with a Pai Sho board. Put a bet on the Rhododendron taking the Lily, but the Rock Tile forcing the Knotweed Tile off the board.”

“Yes, sir,” Minori took the envelope and pocketed it, “Any reason you aren’t going to play yourself?”

“I fear I may have to do a little night gardening. Rooting out those pesky weeds and all that.”

“How many weeds, sir? And are they choking the rest of the flowers in the garden?” a hint of worry laced Minori’s voice.

“The flowers still bloom strong, Lieutenant. Don’t worry,” Tamotsu’s expression hardened, “But I have to find out how the seeds got there in the first place.”

“Talk to me in the morning, sir,” Minori said, “My father did have such a green thumb.”

Minori walked off in the direction of the nearest town. It wasn’t likely that she’d be back before midnight, but he would let her sleep in a bit. She deserved the extra rest.

Tamotsu walked away from the camp and circled the perimeter. To any outside observers, he was just running a circuit of camp before turning in for the night. To an outside observer, he was alone, vulnerable, and wasn’t expected to be seen until the morning.

After a few minutes, Tamotsu thought his bait wouldn’t be taken. But then there was rustling in the bushes behind him. He smiled, dodged the incoming throwing stars, and charged the attacker.

Slamming the would-be assassin into a nearby tree, he smiled as sharp as a moose-shark, “You’re not an Earth Kingdom scout, so tell me. Who sent you to kill me, and where are your compatriots?”

“It’s just me,” the squirming attacker wheezed, “I took this job on my own terms you spoiled little--”

“Ah, ah, ah,” Tamotsu called up a small fireball in the palm of his other hand, “No lying now. It’s been a long few days, and I’m tired. I’d hate for my control to slip, wouldn’t you?”

Tamotsu fed the fireball, growing it in size until it was as big as a small cooking fire, “Do you honestly believe I haven’t noticed you and your friends hanging around camp? Sabotaging supplies? Mimicking animal sounds so as to keep the younger ones from sleeping? You weren’t even that subtle about it.”

“Now tell me,” he brought his flaming hand inches away from the assailant’s face, “Who sent you?”

Chapter Text

Ryuu’s mother always told them that a person’s name had meaning; that from the moment they appeared in this world, their destinies were spelt out in the ink brushes assigned to their soul. They didn’t know if they believed that superstition, not fully, but names fascinated them nonetheless.

At the very beginning of training, before they learned of the battalion’s fate, before the Lieutenant Colonel and his unit came to them and the others like guardian spirits, Ryuu had taken to learning the other soldiers’ names and judging them on their accuracy. It was a fun game to play to pass the time, and later, a good way to distract from their oncoming fate.

“Corporal Ryuu, sir,” called Warrant Officer Akane (named brilliant red after her parent’s most popular color. If it wasn’t for the draft, the young teen would still be working in her family’s textile mill and learning to take over the family business. Even now Ryuu knew no one more knowledgeable about silk, cloth, and colors) , “Lieutenant Colonel Tamotsu requires your assistance in the main tent!”

“Thank you, Officer Akane,” Ryuu started to follow her into camp, “Do you know what for?”

“No sir. He simply asked for your presence.”

The rest of the short walk was passed in silence. No one in camp was truly awake yet, save for the firebenders’ group meditation being led by Major Tatsuya and the soldiers who had drawn the last guard shift. Akane saluted Ryuu and left to return to her post. Ryuu took a deep breath and pulled back the tent flap, expecting to see last-minute preparations for the oncoming battle.

They were most definitely not expecting to see four different people in various stages of pain either knocked out or tied up around the tent.

“Sir?” Ryuu asked cautiously.

“Ah, Corporal Ryuu. Do come in. I am in need of your assistance,” Lieutenant Colonel Tamotsu’s appearance was, in the best possible terms, disorganized. His topknot was halfway undone, sitting low on his head with flyaways everywhere. There were bags under his eyes, and his standard uniform had been stripped off and hastily placed all over the tent: his helmet at the foot of his desk, one shoulder pad thrown in the corner, the other lying near one of the knocked-out people, and his breastplate was who-knows-where.

“I apologize for my appearance, Corporal Ryuu, but I know you are just beginning your guard shift and I found it prudent that you and the others know of this recent development,” he gestured at the four people laid out throughout the tent, expression showing nothing but pure and utter hatred, “General Bujing has taken it upon himself to ensure that our battalion will be perfect koala-lambs ready for the slaughter.”

“I’m afraid I don’t follow you, sir,” Ryuu shifted to the left as Master Sergeant Yoshiyuki entered the tent with a tea tray.

“That’s alright, Corporal. I didn’t believe it myself until I spent all of last night hunting down the assailants,” he took the offered glass from Sergeant Yoshiyuki, “I’ve spoken to you before about our suspected saboteurs, right?”

“Yes sir, you have,” Ryuu shifted to look at the injured parties, confusion and sympathy draining from their mind.

“Well, I finally found them out. Our esteemed General Bujing apparently sent a few soldiers that wouldn’t be missed to cause difficulties for our battalion. Their sloppiness gave them away. No self-respecting shinobi would ever be caught out so quickly.”

“Isn’t that--”

“The General who came up with the plan to sacrifice the forty-first and the one currently leading the troops into battle? Yes, yes it is,” there was an anger in the man’s tone, one that spoke of past experience and the deepest of hatreds, “Remind me to challenge an Agni Kai when this is all over, Yuki. The charges of bringing intentional harm to his men will never stick in Ozai’s court, but the beauty of an Agni Kai is that I can just go feral and let the flames decide the rest. And if Ozai wants to step in like he did when the prince challenged, then hey, that’s one way to get him off the throne.”

“You’re forgetting the attempted assassination against you, sir,” said Sergeant Yoshiyuki with a hint of vexation in his tone, “I’d imagine that is a perfectly reasonable charge to bring against the general, and won’t require you recklessly dualling a seasoned general.”

“Attempted, Yoshiyuki. It’s not like they actually succeeded,” Tamotsu waved off the Sergeant’s concerns and took a swig of tea.

“You almost died, sir,” Yoshiyuki stared down one particular man and Ryuu could feel the ice in the firebender’s gaze. 

“I imagine you’d like me to keep an extra eye out for others?” Ryuu asked, careful to not draw the ire of the Sergeant.

“Yes,” the previous amusement left the Lieutenant Colonel’s tone in a flash, “If you find any others bring them to me quickly and discreetly. I refuse to allow my men to suffer any more of Bujing’s foolish attempts at intimidation.”

When Ryuu met his commander’s eyes, he was reminded of why, exactly, the name ‘protector’ suited him so well. 

“Sir, yes sir,” Ryuu saluted and left the tent, putting their helmet back on their head and dashing back to their post.

Their circuit continued as normal, patrolling the outer edges of camp and following the route the others on border duty followed. It wasn’t until the tail-end of their shift, about fifteen minutes before they would return to camp and eat breakfast, was their normal patrol disrupted.

“Ryuu!” called Private Kou (he was the youngest in the unit, a whole eleven years old. His name meant happiness, the only thing his parents could ever wish for him. And here he was, shipped off to die in a trap so some noble son of a daimyo wouldn’t. Somedays, Ryuu thought they loved the Fire Lord and the nation they were born in. Other days, they looked at the faces of Kou and Akane, Jurou and Tadashi, Yuichi, Mitsuo, Koji, Wenqian, Tung-Mei, Zemin, and all the others, and knew that they would do anything to bring an end to those who had put them here in Kitobetsu.)

“Yes, private?”

“I found a few people.”

Ryuu felt their face drain as apprehension filled their stomach, “Earth Kingdom soldiers?”

Kou shook his head as he tried to catch his breath, “No.”

“Thieves? Fire Nation soldiers? Bounty hunters?”

Kou shook his head again, “No. They-- they say that they’re here to help.”

*****

“Agni and Oma and Shu,” Ryota swore a bit and kneaded his hands together, “That’s a baby. That’s an Oma-damned child. What kind of person dresses a baby in armor and calls them a soldier?”

“Believe us now?” Mai asked bitterly. While some Yuyan clansmen were fairly willing to take Zuko and Mai at their word, a lot of clansmen weren’t as accepting of the fact that the Fire Lord and his generals were eager to use recruits as bait. Those who weren’t an archer or a soldier were especially skeptical, Ryota being chief among them. Though what was genuine disbelief and what was wishful hoping was a bit unclear.

“Cut it out, Mai,” Zuko said, “United front, remember? We aren’t exactly a traditional party of reinforcements.”

There were nine people there to make contact with the forty-first. Zuko and Mai had insisted on going, as they knew the most about the plan and could easily blend in with the rest of the battalion. June was determined on staying with them, so she and Nyla were there as well, ready to grab her kids by the scruffs of their necks and book it back to the boats if she thought they got in over their heads. Beyond them were Jiaying and Kamiko representing the archers, Kira, who would signal the rest of the Yuyan as needed, Tsuyoshi, who would explain their escape route to the battalion, and Iwao and Ryota, their cover in case the Earth Kingdom attacked.

“Yeah, yeah,” Mai hid another small blade in her hair. There were already fifteen intricately holding her twin buns in place, and Zuko was a bit curious as to how many more she could hide, “No in-fighting. But you have to admit, it’s a little satisfying to be proven right. Grim, but satisfying.”

“They’re over here, Ryuu!” came the voice of the boy they had met earlier. Following him was an older soldier, no older than twenty if Zuko had to guess, “See, they’re here to help!”

“The Lieutenant Colonel will be the judge of that,” the older soldier said, pointing a spear at Tsuyoshi’s throat, “Forgive my rudeness, but we’ve had to deal with saboteurs for the entirety of our deployment, the most recent of which were caught just last night. I’m under orders to bring any others to my superior.”

“That’s fine,” said Zuko quickly, gesturing to Mai, June, and the others to keep their weapons sheathed and their elements away, “Just. Do you know that your battalion is being led into a trap?”

The soldier stiffened and pointed their spear at Zuko, “Yes.”

“And have your commanding officers been preparing you for that? Do you trust them?”

“Yes,” the soldier gripped their spear tighter, “What of it?”

“Nothing! It just means that we can inform your commanders of our plan, and we don’t have to take measures to ensure they don’t find out!”

“What plan? Who are you people?”

Zuko swallowed. They were wasting time. If what the Yuyan scouts had told them was true, they had a matter of hours before the Earth Kingdom made their move. They had to start enacting the evacuation before it was too late.

“We’re here to help. We’ve known about the ambush for months now. We have a plan to get you and the rest of the forty-first out of here alive. Just please, bring us to your commanders so we can explain it to them. The fighting’s going to start soon, and if we want to get your fellow soldiers to the ships in time, we need to start evacuating now.”

There was a flash of emotion in the soldier’s eyes. Zuko didn’t know what he had said to convince them, but with a single nod, the spear was lowered and the soldier’s back was turned, “Follow me, then. Agni knows the Lieutenant Colonel and his team can deal with you themselves.”

Zuko relaxed and followed the two soldiers into camp. They gathered looks of confusion from the others that they passed in camp, but that was to be expected with a party of two kids, two Yuyan archers, and a woman riding a shirshu.

The pair of soldiers stopped in front of a large tent. The elder stepped forward and spoke to the inhabitants while the younger held the tent flap open for Zuko, Mai, Jiaying, Tsuyoshi, and a dismounted June.

“Sir, there is a--”

“Lee,” Zuko spoke up, using the name on his Earth Kingdom passport.

“Yes, there is a Lee here with a few others. They claim that they are here to help evacuate the division.”

“Not the lie I’d expect a group of infiltrators to use, but points for creativity,” came a very, very familiar voice, “Call in Minori and Tatsuya….” the forty-first’s commander looked up from his desk and met Zuko’s eyes. Any thought of concealing his identity flew out the window as Zuko came face-to-face with one of Lu Ten’s oldest friends.

“Prince Zuko?” Tamotsu asked softly, voice so full of disbelief and something warm, something hopeful, that Zuko wondered if any words had been spoken at all, “Is that, is that you?”

“....who's Prince Zuko?” Zuko asked quickly, trying to salvage the situation.

Tamotsu barked a wet laugh and walked around his desk. He bent down in front of Zuko, “That’s you, alright. Agni dancing in the moonlight, how did you survive?”

“I had a bit of help from a friend,” Zuko glanced towards Mai, whose hands were twitching at the blades on her sides, trying to calculate the odds of Tamotsu being an Ozai supporter. She hadn’t known Lu Ten’s unit as well as Zuko did, and didn’t know whether she could trust him or not. Zuko was wondering that too, but he knew Tamotsu would likely help the others first, and then try to turn him in. Hopefully.

Tamotsu followed Zuko’s gaze and nodded at Mai, “My thanks, Lady Mai. I’m sure our resident prince has been quite the handful.”

“Think nothing of it,” Mai said calmly, slipping into her well-practiced courtly mask, “But we have much to do and not much time to do it. In short, Prince Zuko and I have brought help.”

“What kind of help?”

“The Yuyan kind,” said Navigator Tsuyoshi, “Our exit strategy is already planned for,  and we’ve got archers waiting to cover our withdrawal. Unfortunately, we only have until three hours after midday before the Earth army begins their assault, but with your cooperation, that should be more than enough time to complete our task.”

Tamotsu, dumbstruck, slowly shook Tsuyoshi’s offered hand, “Prince Zuko, did you convince the fucking Yuyan archers to help us?”

“I assure you, I and my clan are more than happy to help.”

“Holy shit, holy shit, holy shit, holy shit.”

*****

Tatsuya had decided that spirits were real and that whatever ones had been looking out for them recently had come in clutch. 

“Sir, please remember that the prince needs to breathe,” said Minori as she pointedly loosened her grip on the boy, “We all are excited about his current state of being, but I believe Lady Mai would take insult to you undoing all of her hard work.”

“Jus’. Give me a few more minutes, Lieutenant,” Tatsuya said, as he continued to hug Prince Zuko. When Ryuu had fetched the rest of the unit, they had all pulled the prince into a group hug. Nobu, Yoshiyuki, and Tamotsu had let go first, determining that their help was needed in the ongoing evacuation. Minori and him, however, were staying behind with the rest of the reinforcements, “You haven’t stopped hugging him, either.”

“Touche. How about we ask the prince what he wants?”

“This is fine,” said Prince Zuko. He had always been a hugger, and had absolutely melted into the two’s hold, “We can keep hugging.”

“As the prince commands,” Minori squeezed the two close once more, maneuvering her arms so that both the prince and the major were within her grasp.

Suddenly, the ground below them started to shake. Tatsuya acted on instinct, pulling the people in his arms off the ground and over his shoulders in an adapted firebender’s carry. Then, he blasted off the ground, flames shooting out of his feet and keeping him a good few meters in the air. He looked below and saw that his and the others’ previous spot on the ground was now a large sinkhole. The sinkhole rapidly closed itself, intent on burying any trapped victims alive.

Tatsuya stilled as a volley of incoming arrows flew past him and rained down on where he suspected the enemy earthbenders were located. Around camp, the two earthbenders that traveled with the Yuyan, Ryota and Iwao if he remembers correctly, rapidly got to work reopening any closed or half-closed traps.

Tatsuya lowered himself to the ground and gently placed the lieutenant and the prince down. Both had drawn their swords and were looking around for a target, “None of that, now. Keep your heads on straight. Just because they attacked earlier than expected doesn’t mean we have to fight our way out yet. Oi, Iwao!’

“Wha’ is it, mista’ major, sir?” the bulky man came over to the group of three, leaving his companion to pull out the people that had been caught in the traps.

“You seem like the more level-headed of the two Fire Nation earthbenders. I’m going to need you at my six, countering any Earth Kingdom bending attacks. Lieutenant, you get the prince out of here.”

“We can’t leave! I don’t know where Mai is!” the prince looked around the camp, desperately trying to find his companion.

“Alright then. You two stick with me, and the second you make contact with Lady Mai, you run to safety. Do not argue, do not try to play the hero, just run. You’ve already done more than enough by bringing the Yuyan here and giving us a fighting chance, you don’t need to stick around and do more, Prince Zuko. The longer you stay in the midst of the fighting, the more people are going to split their attention between fighting and finding you, which is the exact opposite of what they’ll need today. Got it?”

The prince took a deep breath, “Got it.”

“Minori, can I count on you to--”

“Of course, Tatsuya,” she said. There were a million words conveyed through her expression, the chief among them being, ‘don’t you dare die on me.’

“Good,” Tatsuya turned away from one of his best friends and ran into the fray.

The Battle for the Forty-First had officially begun.

Chapter Text

Mai was going to kill June.

The second the ground had started opening up beneath their feet, June had pulled Mai onto Nyla’s saddle and told her to hang on. The shirshu species was a distant relative of the badgermole, so they only had to give Nyla a few moments before he had dug them all out of the trap. June had then jumped off of Nyla, unfurled her whip, and told Mai to haul ass back to the ships while she went and found Zuko.

It wasn’t until June was long out of sight did Mai realize that she was the sole rider of an extremely aggressive and antagonistic mount.

A mount that she didn’t know how to ride.

In the middle of a battle.

Surrounded by new scents and enemies.

“Uhhhh, good boy? Go left?” Mai pulled Nyla’s reins. Nyla did nothing but pant and doll out his tongue.

“Come on. Move it. We’re wasting daylight,” Mai saw movement out of the corner of her eye and instinctively pulled out a few knives, throwing two and arming herself with the others.

“Hey!” came a high voice. Mai looked over fully and saw that she had just struck the kid that they had first made contact with.

“Sorry,” she said as he pulled the knives out of the leather undershirt of his armor. Luckily, the armor did its job and took the brunt of the weapons, gifting the kid a few shallow cuts instead of the limb-piercing injuries an unprotected victim would have gotten.

“It’s okay. I’ll get treatment later,” the boy slowly approached Nyla, and let him sniff around him, “But for now I think I can help you. I grew up with a shirshu. My dad didn’t tame it all the way, but I think I know how to handle one.”

Mai weighed her options and offered the boy a hand up. He settled in front of her on the saddle and took Nyla’s reins, “What does he usually respond to?”

“What?”

“My dad’s shirshu was trained to respond to certain claps that dad would make. A different pattern made her do different tricks. So what does he respond to?”

Mai thought for a moment before responding, “The sound of a whip.”

The boy nodded to himself before rubbing his hands together. Once they got warm enough, he quickly blew through them. The warm air enhanced the breath, making it sound louder and shriller. It wasn’t quite the crack of a whip, but it was close enough for Nyla. He jolted forward and into a sprint, picking up speed and barreling through the battlefield. 

Away from the ships and right into the thick of the fight.

Mai was going to kill June.

*****

It was the beginning of the battle and Nobu was already stuck in the absolute worst possible position.

The ambush had started earlier than expected. He, Yoshiyuki, and Tamotsu had been working on transporting anyone under sixteen out of camp and onto one of the Yuyan evacuation boats. Tamotsu was busy calming down one of the kids when another asked where Private Kou was. Yoshiyuki was occupied with organizing replacement troops with one of the Yuyan clansmen, so Nobu had told the kid he would head back to camp now and find him. He had searched all of camp for the kid before extending his hunt away from camp after he couldn’t find Kou.

Then it all went to shit.

The Earth Kingdom apparently wasn’t filled with a bunch of rocks-for-brains. It was basic military strategy, really: if you’re planning on attacking a group later, and you see them moving in older and more experienced troops now, then attack before the more experienced troops have a chance to solidify their position. As it was, the enemy had made a pretty good decision. Camp had been relatively empty, with fewer battalion members present and ready to fight, and not a lot of Yuyan there to replace them. The sinkhole trap had caught them off-guard, and Nobu himself was in a terrible position because of it.

“Approach carefully, men, we don’t know if this one’s an ashmaker or just a normal foot soldier,” said one of the five approaching Earth Kingdom soldiers that were slowly moving towards him.

Nobu grit his teeth and tried to think of his options. Thank Agni he had reacted fast enough to avoid being buried alive, but as it was, he was caught with his waist and below packed solidly into the ground. On top of that, the soldiers were in his weak range: too close for him to draw his bow, too far away for him to strike with his sword. 

Based on their armor (two had a few leather plates, the others were completely armorless) this was the trapping party responsible for the sinkholes. Drawing his bow and attempting to fire would catch them off guard, but he wouldn’t have enough time to hit them all. And even then, the arrows might not even land; earthbenders could easily make walls to block his attack. 

Drawing his sword wasn’t a much better option. That required him to let them get in close, which, going by their slow steps forward, would take a while and might not even happen. And again, Nobu was trapped at the waist. His range of motion was limited, and there was no way he would be able to finish off all of them.

Of course, there was the very real possibility that one of the earthbenders would finally use their brains and simply finish the job of burying him alive, which wasn’t an option he could afford to let happen. Even if you excluded Nobu’s death from the equation (no matter what he did, he was most likely going to die here. The real question was how many others was he going to take with him), these five benders were threats. If Nobu didn’t stop them here, then they would join in on the battle proper and kill who knows how many of his comrades. 

A flash of warmth danced across his skin as the memory of his friends’ embrace came to the forefront of his mind. The thought of these men hurting any of the people he cared about, Tamotsu, Minori, Tatsuya, Yoshiyuki, Zuko, solidified his decision.

Nobu slowly and sneakily maneuvered his hands to the back of his head, making it look like he was surrendering while he instead grabbed an arrow out of his quiver and his bow off his back. As he planned out his next moves, Nobu tried to keep his thoughts in the present as memories bubbled to the forefront of his mind.

*****

Nobu was thankful to have an opportunity to learn from a teacher such as Master Piandao. Truly. But he was a little put out with the tedious extracurriculars Piandao had him doing. Seriously, rock gardening?

“Nobu! I think I’m ready to try landscape painting again!” shouted Zuko, who had his back turned to Nobu’s new rock arrangement.

The corners of Nobu’s lips rose into a small grin. Even if the extracurriculars were a bit dull, the company more than made up for it. Piandao was a dedicated teacher, Fat always made the best spreads for tea, and Zuko and his cousin Tenten were amazing students to work alongside.

“No peeking, little dragon,” Tenten said, covering Zuko’s eyes, “An honorable warrior doesn’t cheat or break their word.”

“I wasn’t going to cheat, Tenten,” Zuko pursed his lips into a pout.

The older girl laughed and took her hands away from the boy’s face, “Good. Because your ten seconds start now.”

As Zuko soaked in the rock garden, Nobu sat next to Tenten, “Wasn’t that a little mean?”

“Not really,” she said as she pushed a strand of hair behind her ear, “In a real battle no one’s going to give him a warning or a few extra seconds to process. He’s got to learn to react before he loses a limb. Or worse.”

“Guess that makes sense,” Nobu watched as Zuko turned his back to the garden and started to draw.

“I’ve been meaning to ask you,” Tenten fidgeted with the sleeves of her yukata, “I’ve been instructed to find a sixth for my unit. And I think you’ll be a good fit. Spirits know Minori would appreciate another nonbender to trash talk the rest of us with.” 

Nobu raised his eyebrows, “You’re a bender?”

Tenten gestured between herself and her cousin, “My family’s a bit….obsessed with producing firebenders. Grandpa arranged Uncle and Auntie’s marriage because Auntie came from an extremely talented family of benders. But I convinced Dad that a firebender that relies solely on their bending is just going to end up dead in a ditch somewhere, so here Zuko and I are.”

Nobu nodded. Before he could reply, Zuko dashed over to show them his drawing, “How’d I do?”

Nobu examined the page, glancing over the kid’s head every so often to compare, “Looks good to me.”

Tenten clicked her tongue and pointed to a small pile of rocks in the corner of the paper, “Those stones are more jagged than you drew them. And that tree’s branches have a different layout. But otherwise, good.”

Zuko beamed at them and ran off towards Master Piandao’s rooms, looking for his approval. If he deemed Zuko’s work acceptable, then the boy could move on to the next part of his training.

Nobu watched Tenten’s bright smile grace her lips as her cousin’s form disappeared into the mansion and came to a decision, “Can I meet with the rest of the unit?”

“You’re interested?” she asked excitedly.

“No promises, but I have to be stationed somewhere. It might as well be with a friend.”

Tenten threw her arm around his shoulder and led the pair after Zuko, “You’re going to love them. Minori and you will especially get along. And Tatsuya’s a riot. I don’t think there’s a citizen below the rank of major that doesn’t find him and his antics hilarious. Stick with me and my unit, Nobu. You won’t ever regret it.”

*****

Nobu looked at the woman beside him with some strange mixture of awe, respect, reverence, and fear.

“How did we lose?” Tamotsu let out a pitiful groan from his position on the floor. Yoshiyuki and Tatsuya were in similar stances, though the aristocratic Yoshiyuki was feigning some small amount of dignity by sitting with his back straight and arms folded, almost as if he was enjoying a tea ceremony instead of just having his ass handed to him in a spar.

“You made the mistake that many before you have made, and many after you will continue to make: you underestimated two nonbenders,” said Master Piandao. 

Tamotsu let out another groan as Minori walked towards the table Master Piandao and the others were seated at, “That was some impressive positioning and shooting, Nobu. When did you come up with that move?”

Nobu slowly lowered himself onto a cushion and accepted the cup of tea Zuko was handing him, “I’ve always been a good shot, and as time went on, I found it a useful skill to keep up. And as for the idea behind the attack, well, that’s simple. Nobody really expects an attack from above, and there aren’t any counters for one. The best you can do is dodge. So I’ve learned to find the high ground and shoot.”

“If by ‘finding the high ground’ you mean ‘climb a sheer surface like an opossum-monkey’ then sure, you know how to find the high ground alright,” Tenten snorted into her teacup.

By this point, Tatsuya had feebly dragged himself over to the table and reached for a cup of tea, “Hey! Don’t slander us when you didn’t even participate in the spar! Have a little sympathy, why don’t ya’?”

“It was a session between master firebenders and weapon masters. As I am both, it would have been unfair of me to choose a side.”

“Bullshit. You just wanted to see the three of us get the shit beaten out of us.”

“Ah, ah, ah,” Tenten tutted, hands covering Zuko’s ears, “Not in front of the baby, ‘Suya.”

“I’m not a baby,” Zuko helpfully informed the table, “I’m eight!”

“Anyone that can still count their age on two hands is a baby, Zuko. I don’t make the rules.”

Tenten uncovered the boy’s ears and lightly kissed him on the forehead, “Do you think we should get your sister out here? She could certainly stand to learn a thing or two from Master Piandao.”

Zuko frowned, “I don’t think so. Azula says that a firebender learning a nonbender’s weapon is weak.”

“Seeing that Nobu and I just soundly defeated military-grade benders at a disadvantage of two to three, I highly doubt that’s true,” said Minori surely.

“Those who aren’t willing to learn, won’t,” Tenten said, “But a flower will never blossom if you don’t first plant the seed. There isn’t any harm in giving Azula a chance to learn and better her knowledge. But besides your sister, is there anyone else you think might like to learn under Master Piandao?”

Zuko thought for a moment before saying, “Mai.”

“Okay then. I’ll send two invitations,” Tenten downed her cup of tea and turned to Nobu, “Have you decided whether or not you’ll join us?”

Nobu looked at the others, eyes lingering on the swordswoman, “So long as I can help Minori knock some weapon handling into you lot, then yes!”

Zuko cheered along with Tenten while Tamotsu and Tatsuya let out another groan. Minori smiled in appreciation and Yoshiyuki simply nodded and said, “I welcome you to the unit. But first, you must learn a few things about our dear leader.”

“Can’t be anything to bad,” Nobu placed his teacup down, “I’d like to think I know Tenten pretty well. So long as she doesn’t secretly bathe in blood or anything, I won’t be scared off”

*****

“....you’re the crown prince.”

“Hey, you said as long as I wasn’t bathing in blood every night, you’d be fine.”

“Yeah, that was before I realized the girl I was going to ask on a date was the crown prince of the Fire Nation.”

“Well, if that invitation’s still open, I won’t say no.”

“Not the time, your princeliness.” 

*****

“Another care package!” Tatsuya called out.

Nobu looked up from where he was unstringing his bow. There in Tatsuya’s arms was a massive pile of goodies. Nobu spotted Yuki’s favorite tea blend, a family-size bag of fire flakes for ‘Suya, a newly crafted dagger for Minori, a new scroll by Lady Fountain for Tamotsu, steel-tipped arrowheads for him, a container of dried purple berries for Lu Ten, and who knows how many other gifts for the rest of the unit as a whole.

“Is that all from Zuko?” he asked.

“ Prince Zuko,” Yoshiyuki corrected absently.

“Sorry. Prince Zuko.”

“Isn’t my little cousin the best? Who knows, this might actually hold us off until the end of the siege.”

“How many days are we at?”

“Four hundred-twenty-seven and counting,” Lu Ten grimaced, “Ba Sing Se better have streets paved with gold. Otherwise, the only good thing about this entire siege is if we’re successful, Zuko and Azula won’t ever have to fight this damn war.”

*****

“Nobu, we have to retreat.”

“No.”

“Nobu, the reinforcements are forcing us back. If we don’t retreat now we won’t be--”

“I can’t leave him, Minori!” Nobu cried, desperately clawing at the dirt, “He’s our friend, our colonel, our prince! If I can’t get him back, how will I ever face Iroh? Agni above, how will I face Zuko?”

“If you don’t pick yourself up and retreat with the rest of us, then you won’t have to worry about that at all. Now stand up and get to safety or else I’m going to have to look Prince Zuko in the eye and explain to him that his cousin and his favorite training buddy won’t be coming home.”

It’s Minori’s last argument that does it, forcing Nobu out of his desperate digging and into a dazed march back to camp. As he looks back over his shoulder at the closing outer wall, all he can think of is his wish to never see the city of Ba Sing Se again.

*****

“It’s good to have you back, Iroh,” Nobu gently took the cup of tea from the general and scanned the man’s appearance. 

Gone was the Dragon of the West, the fierce driving force behind the Siege of Ba Sing Se. In its place sat a worn-down, haggard man. His hair was more silver than brown, and he no longer had the fit figure he once bore, but as Nobu took a sip of his tea, he knew at once that Iroh must have been doing better.

“And it is good to see you, Nobu,” he gave a slight smile, “Tell me, how have you and the rest of your friends been since I last saw you?”

Nobu regaled the man with tales of his and the other’s exploits. The unit had been broken up after the death of the prince, but they all kept in touch with more letters than they could count. 

As Nobu finished explaining his new station on some base in the colonies, Iroh gently asked if he would like to play a game of Pai Sho. One completed lotus arrangement later, the two players stared at each other in shock until Nobu let out a wet laugh, “Thank Agni. Tatsuya heard a few rumors about a new Grand Lotus while on the front lines, but there’re never any names. I'd hoped it was you, though. I really, really didn’t want to ever have to face you in battle.”

“Are the rest of the unit….” Iroh trailed off hesitantly.

“After the siege, Master Piandao let me stay in Shu Jing for a bit. I joined first, then I approached the rest of the unit. We want to see this war come to an end, Iroh. For Lu Ten, and for Zuko.”

*****

“How’s it always you that drags me out of mourning, Minori?”

Minori lightly huffed and passed him a letter, “Because I know what to say to you to focus your self-pity on a goal instead of on yourself.”

“You can’t possibly have anything to stop me this time.”

“Even honoring Zuko’s last wish and ensuring the battalion he died for survives General Bujing and his plan?”

“....I hate you.”

Nobu read Tamotsu’s transfer letter and the attached document inviting him to join, “You know this will send us all back to Caldera for a time.”

“Yes.”

“And that means being surrounded by Ozai supporters and their spies.”

“Yes.”

“And that means we won’t be able to openly mourn Zuko. To the world, we’re just his cousin’s old unit members who he used to send care packages to. If we draw too much attention we’ll be marked as even bigger threats than we already are, and our charges for treason against Fire Lord Ozai would probably come about faster than we could stop them.”

“I’ve already started suppressing my emotions and compartmentalizing my grief,” Minori said, “Are you in or are you out, Nobu?”

Nobu tossed out his cup of tea and grabbed the transfer papers, “I’m in.”

*****

“Uh. Hi?”

Nobu blinked, looked at Tamotsu, turned back to Zuko, and blinked again.

“If you ever fake your death without telling me again, I will hunt you down and scream at you for so long, the Wailing Widower would wish he was on my level.”

“I know that’s supposed to be a threat,” said Zuko, “But it loses a lot of its weight when you say it while you’re currently crying and hugging me.”

“Yeah, well maybe I wouldn’t be crying and hugging you if you didn’t fake your death without telling me about it, Zuko,” Nobu said bitterly, pulling the boy even closer, “Now let me process that my training buddy is still alive, will you?”

Soon enough, the rest of the unit joined in on the hug, squeezing the life out of the prince and each other. Yoshiyuki let go first, then Tamotsu, then Nobu. They silently agreed amongst themselves and got to work, evacuating battalion members and leading them to where the Yuyan navigator told them their boats were.

Zuko had brought them resources and help, they couldn’t squander it now.

*****

Nobu dragged himself out of his mind and nocked the arrow into place behind his back. Before he could bring the bow around and shoot, he felt rumbling around his legs. He had just enough time to quickly aim and let the arrow fly at one of the benders before he felt the earth move and he moved with it.

But instead of the tomb he was expecting, he was instead high, high in the air on a tall stone pillar. 

Not one to look a gift ostrich horse in the mouth, Nobu nocked a few more arrows and rained down a pointy and swift death on the four remaining earthbenders. After he finished, he untied the belt around his waist and used it to slide down the circular pillar. After he was safely on the ground, Nobu looked around and met eyes with one of the people that had been with Zuko’s party.

“Sorry about the late arrival,” the man said sheepishly. He adjusted the glasses on his face and played with the hem of his shirt. He didn’t look like much of a soldier, in fact, he wasn’t even wearing armor, “Please, please don’t shoot me like you did them,” he said, pointing to the dead enemy soldiers.

“Why in the world would I do that?” Nobu asked, “You just saved my life. Name’s Nobu.”

“Ryota.”

The two bowed to each other and started to quickly walk towards the battle, “I’m sorry it took so long to get to you. I had to bring up the rest of the people who were caught, and since you were so far out from camp, you were a bit lower priority than some of the others.”

“That’s fine. Have you seen Minori, Tatsuya, or Zuko?”

“I don’t know who those first two are,” Ryota said, “But the prince is safe if that’s what you’re asking.”

“It’s really not, but-- get down!”

Nobu grabbed Ryota by the shoulders and dropped the two to the ground. Just as they hit the dirt, Private Kou and another girl about his age soared over their heads on a shirshu.

“Lieutenant Nobu!” Kou cheered happily.

“Private Kou,” Nobu sat up and gaped at the eleven-year-old, “Where the heck did you find a shirshu?”

“It came with my new friend!” the kid pointed a thumb over his shoulder at the girl seated behind him.

“We’re not friends,” said the girl with a stone-cold expression.

“But we will be!”

Nobu glanced at Ryota and then back to the shirshu, “You got room for two more?”

Kou reigned the stead to a standstill. Ryota climbed on first, creating a few stone steps up to the saddle. Nobu followed, perching on the very back of the saddle and drawing his bow. The girl nodded in appreciation and revealed a few throwing knives in each hand. The two shared a silent moment of bonding over their respective weapons before turning back towards Kou.

“Get us out of here, Private. I’ll give directions to the boats but stay on guard. We’re going to have to go through the battleground if we don’t want to cut through enemy territory.”

“Sir yes sir!” Kou rubbed his hands together and did something weird with his firebending, creating a whistle or a crack-like sound. Whatever he did must have worked though, as they were soon shooting off towards the fighting and right back into the fray.

Chapter Text

If keeping up whatever relationship she had with Jia meant joining the army, June was going to walk out before anything even began.

Fighting on the front lines was exhausting and unfamiliar in a way she didn’t know how to describe. She hunted and fought for a living, yes, but being in the thick of battle, simultaneously having to fend for yourself and trust others to have your back, that was alien to her. 

Her fighting style wasn’t helping things, either. A whip was a good weapon for one on one fights, or even when fighting a small group. But an entire army? It got tangled and caught more times than she could count. She’d had to pull out a katana she’d borrowed from Mai to cover herself whenever her whip was out of commission. 

“I should’ve kept Nyla,” she thought to herself sardonically, “But at least I know Mai got out safely. And Zuko was with those two soldiers that recognized him. They would have-- son of a spirit.”

June had, evidently, spoken too soon because right in front of her were Iwao and the two soldiers from earlier. Iwao was lowering any defensive walls the earthbenders could pull up, and stopping any incoming boulders in their path. The man would then direct most of the Earth Kingdom soldiers’ attention by shooting them down with his firebending. The woman would cut down any that got too close with her jian. They made an effective team, but the thing that made them even better was Zuko. The boy was safely perched on the woman’s back, where he would throw fireballs or deflect incoming projectiles with his swords. 

“ZUKO, OF CALDERA!” June yelled. The boy tensed up and slowly turned his head to look at her, “WHY THE FUCK ARE YOU STILL OUT HERE?”

“I, um, ah. Well, when I couldn’t find Mai--”

“MAI IS SMART ENOUGH AND STRONG ENOUGH TO TAKE CARE OF HERSELF. YOU SHOULD HAVE WENT BACK TO THE SHIPS AND TO SAFETY THE SECOND THE BATTLE STARTED AHEAD OF SCHEDULE.”

“AND AS FOR YOU!” June turned her attention to the two soldiers. She swung her whip to strike back an Earth soldier in the firebender’s blind spot, “WHAT IN THE WORLD COMPELLED YOU TO BRING THE PRI-- THE BOY TO THE LITERAL FRONT LINES OF THE BATTLE?”

Here, the soldier stuttered similarly to Zuko, “Um-- ya’ see there were these sinkholes--”

Another swing of her whip and a soldier with a spear lost his stupid bowl hat and gained a nasty-looking slash across his cheek, “Forget it! Zuko, you are to get back to the ship this instant, or I swear to Agni, Oma, Shu, and whoever’s listening that you will regret it. Do I make myself clear, young man?”

“I hate to interrupt,” said the female soldier, who shifted the boy on her shoulders and slid her sword into her other hand so she could point to something in the distance, “But isn’t that the girl you were looking for?”

June and Zuko followed the woman’s pointed finger to a large group of retreating earthbenders. As more men fled the field, June caught a glimpse of what they were running from. There was Nyla, with a peculiar party of riders. 

She recognized one of the soldiers that had dog-piled Zuko in the tent. He was nocking arrows and loosing them with accuracy, catching many retreating and incoming Earth Kingdom troops. In front of him was Ryota, who had certainly gotten used to battle fast, if the speed of how he deflected and fired back stones and boulders was anything to go by. At the reins was the kid they had initially met in the clearing and passed their message onto. He was busy directing Nyla one way or the other, occasionally making a small stream of fire at anyone who tried to get too close to the animal. And in the middle was Mai, throwing knives and picking them up where she could, trying to give directions to the boy in the front.

Absently, before she was blinded by rage, June thought that the party had the makings of one hell of a joke: an archer, an earthbender, a knife thrower, and a firebender are all riding a shirshu.

But once reality sunk in, June was pissed, “MAI! WHY AREN’T YOU BACK ON THE SHIP? I GAVE YOU NYLA SO YOU WOULD BE SAFE!”

“THIS IS ON YOU!” Mai cried back, “YOU LEFT ME ALONE ON AN ANIMAL I STILL DON’T KNOW HOW TO RIDE, AND NYLA’S SURROUNDED BY CHAOS! IT WASN’T LIKE I COULD GIVE HIM A DIRTY SOCK AND HE’D TAKE ME TO SAFETY. HE WOULD HAVE TAKEN ME ALL OVER THE BATTLEFIELD. AT LEAST NOW I HAVE A RIDER WHO KIND OF KNOWS WHAT HE’S DOING!”

There was a deafening call to get down, and June hit the dirt just in time for another volley of Yuyan arrows to rain down on the field. June staggered to her feet to survey her surroundings. 

Off in the distance, she could see surges of flames signaling the start of the Fire Nation sneak attack. More and more Earth Kingdom soldiers were running to fend off the fresh and more experienced battalions. The forty-first’s camp, while a mess of destroyed tents, abandoned equipment, empty sinkholes, and arrows sticking out of the ground, was empty of any child and Yuyan soldiers. 

Making a decision, June grabbed the firebender and the female soldier by the wrists, “Okay, everybody on the shirshu.”

“Will we all even fit?” asked Zuko.

“It’s six people and three kids. Definitely the max of Nyla’s carrying capacity, but he won’t be going far and he’ll be able to rest for the entire trip back to Pohuai. But if we don’t haul ass now, we are going to be spotted by some schmuck on watch which could either one, lead the Earth Kingdom back to our escape route, or two, blow the entire operation to the Fire Nation. So move it, people. We’re burning daylight.”

June hopped onto Nyla first, sitting a bit ahead of the saddle, tightening her hold with her thighs, grabbing the reins, and unfurling her whip to guide. The soldier boy and Mai were squished together on the rider’s section of the saddle where she usually sat. The archer was still perched at the very back and was now joined by the firebender. Ryota and Iwao sat in front of them, and the swordswoman and Zuko were at the very front of the passenger part of the saddle, with Zuko directly behind Mai in the rider’s section.

“Everybody on?” June snapped her whip into the air after getting confirmation, “Alright then, hang on tight.”

Nyla shifted and started to trot forward. With a bit of encouragement and focus from June, the shirshu was easily led away from the open battlefield, navigated through the forest, and followed the river a few miles to the open sea and the evacuation boats waiting to take off to safety. 

*****

When Jiaying caught sight of June safely leading herself and her kids out of the forest, she finally let herself exhale in relief.

“Oh thank Agni,” said one of the kids once she saw that a few others were piled on the saddle precariously, “The major and the lieutenants are safe!”

The battalion kids cheered at the girl’s proclamation and rushed to the side of the boats’ decks, trying to catch a glimpse of their missing commanders. More cheers rang out as one man jumped off of the saddle and waved wildly to the kids. 

The lieutenant colonel that had been calming and reassuring the forty-first members as they came to the boats let out a breath of his own. Jia had seen how well he and the sergeant had handled calming the kids while they themselves did their best to stow away their fear and panic. No one had expected the Earth Kingdom to start the ambush early, and the terror that gripped Jia when she saw the first dirt-encrusted kids limp past her squad’s position in the trees and tell them that if it wasn’t for Iwao and Ryota, over half of them would have been buried alive….she didn’t think words could describe how much she had wanted to abandon her post and find the three people she had grown to care for so much in such a short amount of time.

By the time she and her squad had loosed their final arrows and she called for them to pull back, a seed of dread had found itself taking root in her stomach. That dread only grew when she returned to the three ships and found that June, Zuko, and Mai had not yet returned.

She had tried to keep calm, first by introducing herself to a few of the forty-first members, then by helping administrate some emergency first aid, and finally by telling herself all of the positives that had come of the battle (your squad is safe, there aren’t any known fatalities, so many kids have been spared because of your actions).

But with every sliver of movement from the sun, every child that hobbled to safety, every crash that echoed from the far-off fight, Jia’s seed of dread had bloomed into foreboding and blossomed into hopelessness.

It wasn’t until now, with June calling for a larger plank for her shirshu and Zuko helping Mai and another child off of the steed, did that flower of hopelessness shrivel and die. 

“Lieutenant Minori, report,” the colonel bellowed down to his fellows as the plank was pulled up and a large one prepared to take its place.

“Private Kou has a few cuts on his arm, Lieutenant Nobu must get his legs, spine, and lower ribs checked, and we all need post-battle medical examinations, but no other major casualties. And on your end?”

“With your verification, I am proud to report no fatalities amongst the forty-first battalion. There are a few casualties, the worst of which include Warrant Officer Akane’s crushed leg. It is unclear at this time if she needs an amputation or not, but beyond that, the worst of it seems to be a few broken bones and a couple soldiers that need to be watched for major blood loss.”

A sign of relief swept through the returning party. Zuko and Mai looked the proudest, with Zuko’s teary-eyed grin and Mai’s satisfied smirk. As the larger plank was finally slotted into place, Jia rushed down to meet June halfway and pull her into a hug. After leading them up to the deck, the signal went up to pull up the plank once more and make ready to sail for home.

*****

Earth Kingdom Battle Report

Composed by: Deng Shoushan

Report Subject: The Battle of Kitobetsu

The Battle of Kitobetsu was a complete failure. Initially attacked Fire Nation battalion entrenched in the Kitobetsu Valley. Originally considered a wise course of action by many, as the battalion positioned there consisted of new recruits and was mid-position adjustment. The Moose Lion squad successfully entrapped a majority of the enemy forces in a Badgermole Maneuver, but they were soon released by two earthbending traitors. Condition of earthbenders (hostages, mercenaries, etc.) is unknown. Forces encountered the Phoenix of Ortai and were pushed back. Soon followed by a full retreat to assist with the Fire Nation surprise attack. Some soldiers insisted that the Phoenix of Ortai rode a shirshu into battle. Whether this is true or merely a sign of a head injury is unclear.

Note from [REDACTED]: Our Fire Nation spy seems to be a double-crosser. If they make contact again, terminate them.

*****

To His Shining Excellency, Lord of Light, Speaker of Agni, and Ruler of the Fire Nation, Fire Lord Ozai,

My lord, this humble servant writes to you to convey that the Battle of Kitobetsu has ended in our favor and your additional requests have been carried out. The 41st battalion is no more, and the remains of the 313th unit have been eliminated. Awaiting further commands.

General Bujing of the Fire Nation Army, Hero of the Battle of the 20,000.

*****

Dear Master Piandao,

This old student humbly requests that you come to the Pohuai Stronghold and take up the position of teacher. There is much to inform you of, many new students eager to learn, and an old training buddy and his lady savior that are longing to see you once more, for they have some misconceptions about their health that must soon be cleared.

It would be most appreciated if you were to keep your reasons for leaving the capital and where you are going as much of a secret as possible. This student asks that you trust them and tell no one, save for Fat, your honored butler.

Many thanks and may Agni shine upon you,

Nobu of Aiwasaki

*****

To the Grand Lotus,

The most promising knotweed tile was not destroyed like we first thought, but instead stolen by a fair maiden and returned with a small chip in the paint, but safe. I await further instructions at the Mountain of the Many Reeds.

Yours,

Journeyman of Toai.

(The above letter was found hidden in a folded Pai Sho board by a group of bandits. It was soon burned with the corpses of the board owners, and never delivered to the mysterious recipient.)

Chapter Text

Ty Lee watches from her seat on the garden bench as Ty Lao walks Azula through the beginning moves of a nihon buyo dance. If it was a few months ago, Ty Lee’s aura would have been green with envy. She would have raged at her sister, demanding an explanation for why she was trying to swoop in and take away one of the only things she had to herself.

But….

But that was before she saw Azula’s aura turn from a combination of yellows, purples, and browns to a clash of dark reds, inky blacks, and foggy whites.

But that was before Azula became the heir to the Fire Throne and her schedule filled with more firebending lessons and war meetings and meals with her father where no one else was allowed into the room but Azula always walked out with the fakest of smiles on her lips, tears in her eyes, and an aura that was nothing but the most sickly of greens. 

But that was before Azula had to fight off assassins armed to the teeth; who swallowed poisons, impaled themselves on their blades, or burned to a crisp by Azula’s blue flames before they could reveal who hired them to do the job.

But that was before Azula had to start fighting off others: visiting merchants, royal officials, admirals and generals, and their upstart sons. Before the revolting, slimy, greedy monsters of the world found out that if they could just compromise the young princess’s virtue, then the throne of the mightiest kingdom would be theirs. 

But that was before Azula brought a dozen scorched bodies to the Fire Nation court, laid them at the foot of her father’s throne, and requested permission to train up the royal guards, as they were clearly incompetent if these assassins and dreadful worms kept sneaking by them.

But that was before Fire Lord Ozai, in all his shining brilliance, dismissed his daughter's concerns with a few remarks on how she had everything well in hand as of now, and if one measly assassin could kill her, then she didn’t deserve to call herself a member of the royal family. Oh, and could she stop killing all of her potential suitors? If she kept up with such childish behavior, she would have much trouble finding a proper lord husband when she came of age, and all of the ones she had killed up ‘til now were given his permission to pursue her.

But that was before Ty Lee saw Azula drag herself to firebending lessons after staying awake for two days straight trying to keep up with the papers and petitions the Fire Lord wanted her to handle in his stead. Before Azula had called for a pot of the darkest, most bitter of coffees available and slammed back four cups. Before Ty Lee nearly had a heart attack when Azula’s nose started to bleed and she had to use her inner flame to give herself a fever and flush out the doses of fast-acting poison that could have killed ten grown men in an instant.

But that was before Ty Lee had gone to her family’s apartment in the royal palace, dropped to her knees in front of their family shrine, and thanked Agni, Akadi, and every spirit she could name for preserving the life of her only best friend. Before Ty Lee had written six letters home calling the rest of her matching set to the palace. Before Ty Lee had decided that if she was going to lose Azula either way, it was better to lose her to Ty Lin’s melodious laugh, or Ty Lat’s pool of calm, or Ty Woo’s kindred spirit than to lose her to the court of blood and ashes that destroyed every lonely soul who stepped into its maw.

Ty Lee pulled herself out of her musings at the sound of light applause from Ty Liu and Ty Lum. She saw Azula’s aura flash a tint of golden-yellow satisfaction before mulling back to its red, black, white mix of complicated emotions. Ty Lao praised Azula’s first attempt at the dance move, but Azula scowled.

“It wasn’t that good.”

“What are you saying, that was amazing! Especially for your first time dancing!” Ty Liu said, clasping her hands together and flashing a smile.

Azula’s scowl deepened, “It’s a fun distraction, but not something I should spend my time on. I still have Minister Masaki’s treasury reports to go over.”

“Ty Lin is going through those now,” Ty Lee said, “They’re nothing she hasn’t handled before during her training as heir.”

“But what about tea with General Hotaka’s wife?”

“Ty Lat went in your place and is passing on your condolences for missing it.” 

“....lunch with Father?”

“Ty Woo is busy causing a minor crisis for the home guard at the edge of the city. As the law dictates, anything of that size so near the capital must be brought to the attention of the Fire Lord and handled by them. He’ll be out of the palace for the rest of the day.”

“And before you worry about me being caught,” said Ty Woo, who entered the garden covered in soot, “Remember that there isn’t anyone in the world who can distinguish which one of us is which, except for you and the rest of us. Even if someone saw me, which no one did, I’ve got six solid alibis. Now show me what I missed, you discount pair of spark rocks.”

“Gladly you rubber-stamp version of Ty Lee,” Azula smirked and unfurled her fan again, slowly executing the graceful dance moves from before. She didn’t have the same flowing elegance as most practiced dancers, but her sharp, precise movements honed from hours of bending practice added something new to the basic steps.

Ty Woo raised a brow, “Not bad. You’ll get better with practice, so why do you want to quit now?”

“Because it’s stupid,” said Azula, snapping the fan closed, “Father always said that the arts are good for nothing but courtesans who want to draw the eyes of more worthy men.”

“Of course your father would say that,” Ty Lum said, looking up from where she was folding a beautiful origami fire lily, “He’s a man.”

“What does that have to do with it?” asked Azula.

“Boys and men don’t have the insight girls and women do,” said Ty Liu demurely, “When you learn the arts you learn things. Important things. Things that’ll help you in battle and in ruling.”

“How in the world would dancing help me in battle?”

“Well for one, nihon buyo translates well to learning how to wield tessen,” said Ty Lao, “It also helps with other things, like building muscle, flexibility, core strength, balance, and other stuff like that.”

“Well, what about music?” Azula asked, turning to Ty Liu, “You play the harp. What does that do?”

“It helps you recognize patterns. I think it improves your memory, too. And it makes you more creative. A creative commander will be able to think through a problem better than an uncreative one. An uncreative one will just struggle through something and try to force things. Creative commanders are the ones who make sure everybody makes it home.”

“Okay. But origami? There can’t possibly be any positives about folding papers into animals that are just cooed over and then thrown away.”

“Hand-eye coordination,” was all Ty Lum said, finishing her fire lily and standing up. She placed the delicate paper behind Azula’s ear.

Azula quickly pulled the flower off of her head and spun it in her hand by the stem, “Well what about acting? Zuzu always-- Mother always liked to read theater scrolls. They’re horribly boring, and beyond expanding your vocabulary, there can’t be any good things about reading them all day.”

Ty Lee looked at Azula incredulously, “Azula, you know how important it is to make sure people believe what you say.”

“That’s lying. Lying is way different than acting.”

“Yes, it is. But acting is way more effective,” said Ty Lee. She spotted a gardener from the corner of her eye, “Here. Watch this.”

Ty Lee turned on her heel. She shrugged her shoulders, shook out her hands, and painted a smile on her face. All of a sudden, she was the girl she used to be. The girl who lived in a world that wasn’t one of ‘before’ and ‘after’.

She tapped the gardener on the shoulder, “Excuse me.”

The man looked up, “Uhm. Yes, miss?”

“Can you cut me a flower?” Ty Lee gestured to the gardener’s shears.

“I’m afraid I can’t do that, miss. These are the Fire Lord’s gardens. ‘M not supposed to pick any of the flowers.”

Ty Lee batted her eyes and quivered her bottom lip, “Pleeeeeeaaaaasssse. It’s not for me. It’s for my friend. She’s been really super busy since her brother died. He was the heir and her dad’s super mean. He’s been forcing her to take on all these extra responsibilities because she’s her family heir now, and I thought a flower might cheer her up.”

The man scratched his head, “I don’ know.”

“Pleaeeeaaaasssse. I promise I won’t tell anyone. And besides, these are her favorites. It’ll just be our secret. Promise.”

The man looked at his shears, at her panda-puppy expression, at the primrose-lilacs behind him, and then back to his shears, “Well alright. But just one.”

“Eeeeeee! Thank you, thank you, thank you!” Ty Lee grasped the flower from his hands and bounded back to the group.

“See what I mean?” Ty Lee asked, putting the primrose-lilac in Azula’s open hand, “None of what I said was a lie. But did it work?”

“It worked,” Azula looked at the two flowers, one paper, on real, “But if I threatened him into giving me a flower, that would have worked too. Threats and lies aren’t as tiring as putting up a front. Why wouldn’t I use them?”

“Look at the man,” Ty Lee instructed, “He just broke the law for a girl he didn’t know. I’m not a princess like you, Azula. I don’t have power like you. But he still did what I asked him. A bit of kindness and politeness goes a long way. If I were to go up to him tomorrow and ask the same thing, he’d smile and do it without a second thought. But if you had threatened him into giving you a flower, then he would have grown bitter, and that’s one less citizen that loves the princess.”

“I’m not kind like you, Ty Lee,” Azula scowled and let the flowers drop, “Mother tried to make me kind. But I’m not. I’m just a monster. A cold, ruthless, unkind monster.”

Ty Lee picked up the flowers and placed them in Azula’s hands, “You don’t have to be,” Ty Lee slowly closed Azula’s hands around the flowers, “Lady Ursa told you to be kind, but she didn’t teach you how. She just tried to kill the parts of you she didn’t like and replace them with what she thought a princess is supposed to be. You don’t have to stop being cold, or ruthless, or unkind. You just have to learn when to unleash the warmth, the mercy, and the gentleness when it suits you.”

“But how do I do that?”

“Well, you’re a firebender, aren’t you? Think of it like a flame. You need to know when to use your words and actions to burn down your enemies, and when to use them to bring light and comfort to your people.”

Ty Lee slowly pulled her friend into a hug, “And I’ll be there to help you, every step of the way. We’re going to make you the greatest Fire Lord in history. You’ll end the war, and then when you come home, they’ll love you Azula. They’ll sing songs about the merciful warrior Fire Lord who brought about a new age of peace.”

As Azula slowly hugged her back, Ty Lee quietly hoped that this moment could be her new moment that defines ‘before’ and ‘after’.

*****

For all Azula knew fear to be a powerful tool, she didn’t like it.

Oh, it was easy enough to like when she was the one striking fear into the hearts of others. Then it was a well-loved aid she used to accomplish her goals and find out all sorts of information. But when she left her father’s presence feeling queasy and all sorts of nervous? When her heart pounded after every attempt by the pathetic excuses of men to lay their hands on her and destroy her reputation enough to force her hand in marriage? When she saw the look on Ty Lee’s face after the poison started to take effect, and her only favorite minion didn’t know if she was going to survive the night? When she couldn’t bring herself to drink coffee anymore because the taste always concealed the bitter flavors of the best poisons? 

(When she tried to calm herself in the privacy of her own quarters, but she just couldn’t stop shaking even though there’s nothing to be afraid of and it didn’t matter how much she bent and tried to force herself into collapsing in exhaustion she just couldn’t fall asleep or stop shaking because she wasn’t safe, nowhere was safe. If she slept then an assassin would get her, or even worse one of those bastards who wanted to force her, even though they wouldn’t be the ones who ruled, it would be her, and the law states that victims could burn their rapists alive if they were benders or have someone else do it if they weren’t. But Father gave them permission to do that. Her father told the world that so long as he gave them the go-ahead, they could do whatever they wanted to her and her body. Her father told the world that if she couldn’t defend herself, she was weak. Never mind that it was the royal guards who were at fault for not protecting her. The royal guards were supposed to keep her safe, but they didn’t and nowhere was safe, and--)

Azula didn’t like fear.

Azula especially didn’t like fear that she wasn’t in control of.

So when she walked into a tea party one day being held by Lady-Very-Important-Veteran and saw Ty Lee take a bite of an h’orderve and then spit it back out with a revolted look on her face, it took all of Azula’s resolve to drag the fake Ty Lee into a secluded room of the estate, push her to the ground, and demand to know where the mercenary had kidnapped her friend minion.

“Yeesh. Ty Lee was right for once. You are a few sparks away from combusting, aren’t you?”

“Where is Ty Lee?”

“Azula!” and suddenly Ty Lee was there, dressed in a grander, but no less pink, ensemble for the party and five other identical girls in identical outfits, save for the color. 

Azula didn’t know how on earth people got confused between Ty Lee, Ty Lin, Ty Lat, Ty Lao, Ty Liu, Ty Lum, and Ty Woo. They were all distinctly different people with distinctly different interests and distinctly different personalities. It was laughable to think that their own parents couldn’t always keep track of their children when it was so obvious. On the few occasions that the septuplets needed to switch outfits and fill in for one another, Azula always savored the looks of surprise she would receive when she called them by their proper names; as if it wasn’t clearly Ty Lat in front of her trying too hard to overcorrect for Ty Liu’s soft-spoken grace.

Despite the fact that Azula was quickly learning that she was the only person in the palace with any sense of perception, she was becoming curious about something.

“Why did you call your sisters to the palace?” she asked Ty Lee one evening, “You hate being mistaken for one of your sisters, and don’t try to deny it. I've seen you flinch whenever you get called the wrong name. So why bring them here?”

“I missed them, that’s all.”

Azula scoffed, “If you missed them, you could have just gone home for a visit. Why bring them here?”

Ty Lee had fiddled with her hands and simply said, “It’s not safe right now. Everybody needs people they can trust, and for me, that’s you and my sisters. I know they haven’t earned your trust yet, but I have. Just. Trust me about this. Me and my sisters are only going to help.”

Azula had wanted to ask “Help with what?” but she had been called away to go and inspect the new schematics from some weapons manufacturer in the colonies. It wasn’t until a week and a half later did Azula learn what, exactly, the Ty sisters had been determined to help her with.

It wasn’t hard to figure out. They frankly weren’t doing anything to hide it.

It started like this:

One night after Azula had finally fallen asleep for once, she had woken up with the sun for the first time since Zuzu’s Agni Kai. After she dressed for the day and exited her chambers, she was met with Ty Lat and Ty Lum standing at attention at her chamber door, guarding over a single tied-up man.

“Princess,” Ty Lat had nodded, “Good morning. Ty Lin and Ty Lao caught this man last night trying to sneak into your room.”

Azula had rapidly blinked in surprise, rubbing her eyes to make sure she wasn’t hallucinating from lack of sleep. She had ordered the man to be brought to the dungeons and interrogated. Ty Lat had acknowledged her orders and said she would take care of it. 

Ty Lum had escorted her to the dining room where she usually took her morning meals in. They had been met with a plentiful breakfast spread and Ty Lin outlining her schedule for the day.

“You’ve got your daily lessons with your masters until two hours before midday. Then firebending with the Ladies Li and Lo until you master the fourth Phoenix form. Break for lunch an hour after midday. A war meeting one hour before dinner, with the rest of us filling in for your tedious social engagements. You should be free by three hours before sunset.”

“Where is Father?” she asked hesitantly.

“Sleeping off a hangover,” Ty Lin answered neatly, sliding a plate of fruit-filled pastries towards her.

“Father doesn’t drink more than one glass of alcohol per night.”

“Then it’s rather fortunate for us that his single glass of sake had been replaced with a mixture of almond-grape juice and the most potent moonshine this side of Omashu.”

Her day had been peaceful. Almost like any other day she had before Zuzu went and got himself killed. She had finally caved to Ty Lao’s insistent groveling and learned a few of her precious dance moves.

And. Well. Ty Lee certainly had a way with words.

Azula placed her primrose-lilac into a vase and set the origami fire lily next to it on her side table. She climbed into bed and went over Ty Lee’s proclamations in her mind. 

Azula didn’t know if she could be whatever Ty Lee saw in her. She didn’t know if she could become someone the world loved. She didn’t know if she was built for such a foreign concept. But as the ghost of Ty Lee’s hand closed around hers, Azula found the determination within herself to at least try.

Because if the Azula that the world loved would get to have a Ty Lee that looked at her like she had today, then the Azula that the world thought a monster would do whatever it took.

*****

Iroh had already thought he had experienced his life’s defining moment.

The man that he was now was a product of what he experienced after the death of his beloved son.

After the sadness that crept into his soul when he initially learned of his son's death, and its ramifications. After he learned he would never share another cup of tea with Lu Ten, never get to play another game of Pai Sho, never get to see him get married, never get to hold his son’s children in his arms.

After he abandoned Ba Sing Se. After he sent word of his retreat to Caldera. After his brother took the throne that rightfully belonged to him. After he couldn’t find it in himself to return to the capital and usurp his brother. After he said his farewells to the soldiers that had dutifully served alongside his son. After he departed the Fire Nation on a quest to find himself.

After he tried every way he could to enter the Spirit World. After he finally gained entrance to the place he so desperately wished to see. After he searched in vain for the spirit of his son. After he spent months upon months in the depths of the realm until finally giving up hope.

After he wandered the land, not knowing what to do with himself. After he numbly walked into a bar and ordered a cup of tea. After he gulped down the lukewarm tea and spotted a Pai Sho table in the corner. After he laid down a copper piece and asked the young lady sitting across from him if he could play.

After he kept coming back to the Pai Sho board and the young lady. After he learned the young lady’s name, and she let him release his pent-up emotions onto her lent ears. After the lady started bringing up topics, each more controversial and treacherous than the last. 

After Iroh met with a hundred-something-year-old king of Omashu who just shrugged and said, “Well, I’m a mad genius alright. If this is madness or genius, only time will tell.” After that very same king gave him a white lotus tile and welcomed Apprentice Iroh into the order. 

After Iroh returned to the capital a hollow shell of a man. After he found solace in his nephew and his son’s friends. After smiles started to return to his lips and the sound of laughter found its way back into his life. After Zuko pleaded with him, begging Iroh to stay in the capital instead of going on a recruiting trip for the Order of the White Lotus disguised as a Pai Sho tournament tour.

After he told his second son “no.”

After he got that fateful letter one day, informing him that he had failed another child of his.

After he wept and rushed to double-check the story with the rest of the White Lotus information network.

After he sorrowfully started the journey home only to run into every possible setback and complication.

After he returned to his rooms in the royal wing only to find another letter waiting for him, this one proving his second son right in his belief that the battalion he defended and died for would have perished if no one intervened.

After he read the attached list of the dead and promptly started to weep once more for the slain companions of Lu Ten.

Iroh knew why the world would see fit to punish him. He had done horrible, unspeakable things throughout the war and throughout his lifetime. But why, why must his punishment be this? Mayhaps it is to make him experience what he has wrought unto others. And yet, it is still too harsh. The people that have been wrenched from his grasp were still so young. They were good. Lu Ten, Tamotsu, Minori, Tatsuya, Yoshiyuki, Nobu, Zuko….they deserved to live. Deserved to thrive.

Wiping the tears from his eyes, Iroh stood up and started to make a large pot of tea. As much as he wished to grieve in peace, he was now in Ozai’s court. There would be countless people who would stop by in the coming hours to give their condolences. Genuine or not, he must steel himself and prepare to face the masses.

The rest of the day goes by in a blank blur. Friends, enemies, acquaintances, and strangers alike all come by and exchange pleasantries and tea with him. Some offer a bit more: tea blends, embroidered gifts, news, gossip, baked goods. All are met with a strained smile and kind words of thanks. Nothing is out of the ordinary for such a somber day. Nothing, that is, until his niece knocks on his door with her friend Ty Lee and what appears to be her infamous sisters.

“Welcome, Princess Azula.”

“Uncle,” she says stiffly, not meeting his eyes, “Are you still accepting visitors?”

Iroh looks up and down the girl before him, taking in the changes that have occurred since he last saw her. They are subtle, but they are there. Her hair, while still kept in a neat top knot, had started to come undone with flyaways wisping around her forehead. Her face is a bit thinner, having lost its baby fat in the time that he was away. But the most telling difference is the bags around her eyes: something he had not known to be possible in someone so young.

“Yes, princess, I am. Would you and your friends like to come in for a cup of tea?”

“That would be lovely,” said Ty Lee, answering for her friend and leading the party in, “I don’t think you’ve met the rest of my sisters, have you, Prince Iroh?”

“No, I have not,” he agreed, “Would you mind introducing us?”

A stilted conversation grew from there. Iroh made small talk with Ty Lee and her sisters but continued to keep an eye on his niece. Azula, however, did nothing but silently drink her tea and keep her eyes on either her cup, the table, or Ty Lee’s face.

After about ten minutes, Iroh directed a question at Azula, trying to find out what she came here for, or at least to draw her into the exchange, “I have not seen your friend Mai today. Is she perhaps visiting her relatives or her family’s holdings?”

At once, any warmth or sound left the room. It was silent as a tomb as all eight girls looked at him with some sort of shock, sadness, or dread.

“What is it?” Iroh asked.

“You really don’t know,” said Azula. It was more a statement than a question, and was said devoid of tone or expression, “I guess it has been long enough that that piece of news is no longer prime gossip.”

“What news?”

Azula set down her teacup and took a breath, “The day of brother’s Agni Kai, Mai threw herself off of Owl Cat’s Point. They still haven’t found her body.”

Iroh’s heart went out to the girls. Even if he hadn’t known the young miss well, his niece still valued her friendship, “I am so sorry, my niece. So much has changed for you as of late. Both you and young Mai deserve better.”

Azula quickly pulled a tightly wound scroll out of her arm guard and passed it over the table, “Here. This is why I’m here.”

Iroh took the scroll and unrolled it, revealing a well-loved and well-worn copy of the play Into the Night. He looked up from the scroll and back to his niece, “Where did you get this?”

“It’s one of the only things that was saved from Zuzu’s room. Most of his stuff was already thrown away, including the new copy you got him for his last birthday. But this one wasn’t, and I just thought. I’m not a fan of theater. But maybe you would like it. To, you know. Remind you of brother.”

Iroh froze. Of all of the explanations the princess could have given, that was not one of them. Carefully, he rerolled the scroll, tied it, and set it aside, “Thank you, Princess Azula. That was very thoughtful of you.”

Azula squirmed uncomfortably, “Thank Ty Lee. It was her idea, not mine.”

“Then you both have my thanks,” Iroh bowed his head and refilled cups of tea, “Tell me, niece, have you begun to study the concepts behind lightningbending yet?”

Azula stiffened once more, “No. I haven’t.”

“Please tell me when you do,” Iroh said, “It always helps to have a master there when learning, and I doubt my brother would be able to clear his busy schedule every day to assist you. I, however, have much less restricting responsibilities.”

Azula cautiously accepted his offer and the party finished their tea in peace. As Iroh saw the eight girls to the door with much pageantry, he caught a whisper between his niece and her friend about Ty Lee’s claims of being right about something. Once he was alone once more, Iroh picked up the theater scroll and contemplated it.

Perhaps he had been too quick to write off Azula. She was a girl of eleven, after all, and she had been raised on the narrow-minded propaganda and pampered lifestyle that blinded many Fire Nation citizens. Himself included. If he, the Dragon of the West, the thing of many innocent people’s nightmares, could learn from his mistakes, then so could a child like Azula.

There was good in her. It may be buried deep under claws and bared teeth, but it was there. And to dismiss her potential to grow just because she resembled Ozai? Only a fool would do such a thing. And Iroh was no fool.

Slowly, he pulled out his papers and his writing set. As he wet the inkstone, he mentally started drafting letters to many of his old friends and army acquaintances that were raising or had raised daughters.

Iroh did not know how to raise or help a little girl. But for the sake of his niece, his country, and the future, he was willing to learn.

*****

Piandao knew Fat was growing tired of his indecisiveness, but he couldn’t care less.

Zuko and Mai were alive.  

His students were alive.

He didn’t know how they escaped, nor how they had arrived at the Pohuai Stronghold, nor how Nobu had survived the battle of Kitobetsu and found them. But he didn’t care. The two students that had stayed closest to his heart still breathed, and that was the greatest gift he could have ever received.

“Sir, why are you packing four different sizes of nunchucks?” asked Fat from where he was admirably holding up the massive pile of weapons.

“Zuko once showed an interest in learning them, and I don’t know which size and weight he’ll need.”

“Sir, wouldn’t it be both more effective and less suspicious to outsiders if you left most of the weapons here and simply made new ones when you landed at Pohuai?”

Piandao stopped comparing the two bo staffs in his hands and gave his butler a sheepish grin, “Yes. You are correct as always, Fat. Let’s pack up the forge, the wooden training weapons, and any other equipment we’d need for training. Beyond that, it’s simply personal items, money, and rations for the journey.”

“Of course, sir. I’ll begin packing the metals and other supplies now,” Fat turned on his heel and left Piandao.

The swordsman replaced the bo staffs to their proper place and went to his solar with his calligraphy set. A half-hour later, two messenger hawks departed from the estate in Shu Jing. One traveled to the docks and returned with two tickets on a boat to the colonies. The other flew to the daimyo of Shu Jing to inform them of his new position training the Yuyan tribe.

As Piandao carefully packed his calligraphy set and brought it upstairs to place in his trunk next to his Pai Sho board, he thought of his students awaiting him an ocean away and smiled.

Chapter Text

Zuko now knows why plays and stories always end after the battle is over. 

It used to always bug him when that happened. He always wanted to know what came next. Did the hero and the heroine get married like the big romantic kiss at the end implied? How did the victorious soldiers deal with going home after bloody battles that they won by the skin of their teeth? Was the princess that took back her throne a good ruler, or did she end up proving the rebels right when they took it from her in the first place? Did the firebender ever regret turning his waterbending lover in, or was he confident in his decision to choose his nation over the man he loved? Who became the daimyo after the hero and the villain, the only two with a proper claim to the position, killed each other in the Agni Kai?

In every story, in every tale, Zuko always, always, always asked ‘now what happens?’. 

But now he didn’t have to ask.

Now. Now he knew that no one ever wrote about what comes next because what comes next is. Not monotonous. Not indescribable. Just….

Is. 

The excitement and fear from the fighting is gone, leaving everyone tired and hollow. Beyond a few people who are still giving prayers of thanks to the spirits, it’s quiet. The Yuyan boatmen are adjusting the sails and arranging the ships’ course. A few of the older forty-first members that have already been cleared by the medics are offering to help, but they are quickly turned down and told (gestured at) to find the barracks below deck and get some sleep. A few follow the suggestion and drift downstairs, but most stay topside either watching or meditating with the dying sun.

The members of Lu Ten’s old unit are milling around: Minori and Tatsuya are talking quietly to different groups of kids, Yoshiyuki is going from battalion member to battalion member offering cups of tea, and Nobu and Tamotsu are both writing letters to send at the first dock they stop at. June and Jiaying have long since led Nyla to his makeshift stable and tried to get him comfortable with the rocking of the ship. Mai had silently led the boy she had found in the middle of battle over to a medical station to get his cuts treated.

This leaves Zuko alone with his thoughts, wondering what comes next.

He feels apathetic to the world around him. He doesn’t have a goal or anything to distract himself with. He’s already achieved everything he and Mai set out to do at the beginning of their journey. They made it to the Pohuai Stronghold. They were able to convince the Yuyan to help them save the forty-first. The forty-first was saved. He should be happy. Ecstatic, even. 

So why….

Why does he feel sweaty? And unsure? And a bit like his heart is somehow about to beat out of his ribcage and slow to a standstill all at once? 

Zuko’s on his knees and his arms have thrown themselves over his head, trying to make breathing a bit easier, but it’s not working because he's left puffing for air and trying to figure out when the heck he stopped standing in the first place. He kind of wants to throw up over the side of the boat and then curl up into a ball and fall asleep, but that’s not happening either because he just. Can’t. Breathe.

“Zuko. Zuko, can you hear me?”

Somebody is talking to him, but he can’t tell them he’s fine. There’s not enough air in his lungs to use his voice, and when someone’s sleeve brushes against his left ear, all of the air he had been saving to speak went into blowing a stream of flames out of his mouth instead. 

There are yelps of surprise and the sound of people quickly backing away, but they barely register because now Zuko’s breathing is even worse.

“Help me get him on his back. I think it’s a panic--”

More voices and more footsteps and more noise is being made. He speculates for a second on whether or not he’s going to get burned as badly as the last time he spat fire at one of his bending instructors, but all he feels is a strong, gentle pair of hands guiding his shoulders somewhere, and then nothing.

Nothing but the sunshine, the sticky sea air, and the pain of memories he’d rather forget.

*****

“That’s right, Zuko. Latch onto the fire in my hands and take deep, meditated breaths.”

Mai watches from the sides as the major, Tatsuya if she’s got the names right, tries to guide Zuko out of his case of shellshock. She feels so useless. Usually, she knows exactly what to do and what to say when her friend gets trapped in his head like this. She can distract him and make him either talk it out or think of something else.

This time, however, when she tried to gently pry his hands out of where they were buried in his scalp and the fingernails digging into his head enough to bleed, he had bent flames so quickly it had been nothing less than a miracle that only her outer jacket had caught and been rapidly extinguished.

After that, others had soon seen what was going on and had come over to help. Lieutenant Minori safely guided Zuko into a lying position and was still trying to coax his grip into relaxing. Tatsuya had whipped out a small flame meant for meditation and was doing his best to connect Zuko’s inner flame to the outward fire in the hopes of tethering him to the real world. Nobu and Tamotsu had stuffed their letters away and ushered others below deck to either grab a bite to eat or hit the hay. Yoshiyuki had grabbed his teapot and was using his bending to make another round of jasmine tea.

Mai heard a soft thud as someone sat next to her, “Wow. This is almost as bad as my first night in camp.”

Mai shot a look to the side at the boy she had met in the battle earlier. She had learned a bit about him after she had accompanied him to the medics to get treatment, but she still only knew the basics: his name was Kou, he grew up in the colonies, his favorite color was emerald green, he was a firebender, and he was eleven years old.

“What happened?” she asked, trying to distract herself from Zuko’s hushed pleas of ‘Please, Father.’ and ‘I am your loyal son.’

“Well, it’s not a good story,” Kou said, pulling his knees to his chest, “You know how I grew up in the colonies?”

“Yeah.”

“Well, sometimes, there’re raids. Raids where people look for firebenders.”

“The Earth Kingdom hunts down firebending kids?” Mai asked.

“No. Well, they do, but that happens right on the border. I live on the far western coast in Hu Xin. Deep into established Fire Nation territory. It’s been a part of the Fire Nation since the beginning of Fire Lord Azulon’s reign.”

“If it’s so far into Fire Nation territory, who attacks it? Pirates? Water Tribe?”

“Fire Nation nobles,” Kou answered darkly. His gaze looked distant as he continued, “The army draft is random. And sometimes, noble families don’t want their precious heirs to go off to war. Especially when they already paid for their other kids to have a flashy officer’s position. They get even more desperate when they don’t have any other kids to pass on the riches to if the heir dies. But there’s a loophole. If you’re drafted, you can pay a hundred gold coins and find an able-bodied firebender to go in your place.”

“One day, after my dad and the rest of the family had just finished up the finale of the circus act, raiders came. They rounded up all of the performers into a group and one by one dragged us out of the circle and had one person shoot fireballs at us. If we were able to redirect the fire, they cuffed us and put us in a group to bring us back to the ship.”

“And if the fireball hit you?” Mai asked.

“If the fireball hit you, you were either proven a nonbender or too weak of a firebender to pass for a soldier. If that happened, they….they....” Kou started to sob into his knees, “They killed them. Dad, Mom, Yuu, Moe, everybody. Moe was my little sister. She was barely old enough to stand, let alone bend. But they didn’t care. They drove a sword through her stomach and called up the next person like it was nothing. Like the lives of everyone I ever knew were worth nothing. ”

“You don’t have to contin--” Mai tried to say, but the boy was already talking again.

“They brought everyone who passed their little test onto the ship and sailed us back to the mainland. We were chained up in the bottom of the cabin for the entire trip. There were a few others from different raids that had been chained up longer; some of them died from sunlight withdrawal halfway through the journey. When we got to the mainland, a doctor looked us over to check for any major injuries or diseases, and then gave us a meal plan to make sure we at least looked like healthy benders.”

“Then I was brought to some fancy estate and checked over by an army doctor to see if I was of sound mind and body. They looked at the medical records the raider doctor forged because I'm still just a kid even though I’m tall for my age. There was something about how I was really seventeen, but because I grew up in the colonies I was malnourished from never having enough to eat and it stunted my growth. There was also a written statement that they passed off as mine. It went on and on about how I was so grateful to the Chan family for allowing me to work for myself and how I was so honored to represent their family. They must have paid off the army doc because I don’t know any other way that they could have sold that hippobull as believable.”

“The Chan family?” Mai asked.

“What? They a big deal or something?” asked Kou as he rubbed his sleeve over his eyes and his running nose.

“Kind of, yeah. The Chans have been in the military since before anybody can remember. An Admiral Chan is serving right now, and a bunch of other Chans from branch families serve. If one of the biggest military families in the country is a part of this, then who knows how many people have throughout the years?”

“Glad to know my family died to save a proper royal brat, huh?” Kou asked bitterly, “After the army doc cleared me, I was shipped off to Kitobetsu. When the lieutenant colonel called me into his tent to ask me about why I was arriving so far behind the rest of the unit, I took one look at Sergeant Yoshiyuki’s expensive tea set and had a panic attack over how they’d treat me just the same as the Chans and their underlings.”

Mai put her hand on his shoulder, “You see the boy over there that Major Tatsuya is still trying to calm down?”

Kou and her looked over to Zuko, whose breathing had leveled with the flame, but hadn’t yet gone back to normal, “Yeah.”

“That’s the crown prince of the Fire Nation.”

Kou’s eyes widened, “Hippobull!”

“I’m the heiress to a centuries-old noble family.”

“But, but, you two are so nice. You’re the entire reason everybody survived today!”

“I know,” Mai said, “My point is, not every noble you meet condones the shit you had to go through. Zuko and I won’t be able to change anything anytime soon, because I kind of faked our deaths, but we aren’t the only ones either. When we get back to Pohuai, I can help you write a letter to a few people that might take whatever you say seriously.”

“What was that thing about faking you deaths--”

“And beyond that,” Mai cut in because there was not enough time to unpack all that, “We can help Zuko prepare.”

“Prepare for what?”

Mai looked back to Zuko again, “Do you think the war can go on for much longer? Even if you disregard the money, resources, and manpower needed to keep the fight going, do you think we, as a civilization, can last for much longer?”

“No.” 

“So one day, the war’s going to have to end. And even if Prince Iroh supports an end to the conflict, even if Princess Azula finally grows up and opens her eyes to the world around her, they’ll be in no position to overthrow Fire Lord Ozai.”

“Why not?”

“Ozai has been weeding out political opponents for years. If Iroh hasn’t taken the throne yet, then he won’t ever do it. And the princess is your age. Did you ever think your dad could be wrong about something?”

Kou frowned, “No. Dad was either right or he was in an argument against Mom. Then Mom’s always right.”

“Exactly. She’s going to have a battle and a half just to realize not only her dad, but her entire world, is wrong. And even if that does happen, she’s going to have to watch her back and not give herself away to any of Ozai’s spies. Even if she becomes strong enough to challenge her father to an Agni Kai, and then somehow wins, she’ll be surrounded by people like the Chans who want to continue the war.”

“I don’t think I’m following here.”

“If Zuko asked you a few years down the line to fight alongside him and help him take the throne, would you follow him?”

“Probably,” Kou swallowed.

“How many of the other battalion members would join?”

“At least half.”

“How many of the Yuyan? How many of the traditionalists? How many others that’ll flock to the cause? How many others that Zuko will save and help along the way?”

“More. A lot more.”

Mai cast her eyes to the prince, who was now breathing smoothly and nodding his head to whatever Tatsuya was saying, “Zuko may not see it yet, but there’s only one way this war is ever going to end. And that’s with him leading the Fire Nation with an army at his back. So,” she turned back to Kou, “Are you with us?”

Kou closed his eyes, “I’m sorry. I just-- I never wanted to be a soldier. I hate fighting. I don’t ever want to have to hurt someone like the raiders hurt me and my family.”

“You don’t have to fight to help,” Mai said gently, “Even you just telling Zuko about what happened to you, and about life in the colonies in general, will teach him more about how he can help some of his most vulnerable citizens. But I understand if this is too much.”

“No. No, you’re fine. You’re just looking out for your friend and your country. I’m the weak one here.”

“You’re probably the youngest soldier to ever survive a battle. You are not weak.”

“Thanks. Give me time to think about it?” Kou asked, “Maybe when Zuko’s ready to actually take the throne and asks me himself, I’ll have an answer.”

Mai nodded and leaned her head against Kou’s. They sat like that for a while until a girl in a wheelchair rolled herself up to the deck, completely oblivious to the mood, held up a deck of cards, and asked, “Who wants to play?”

Chapter Text

“I really don’t get what I’m doing wrong,” said Ryuu as they were forced to pass on the round once more, giving Akane the win and the title of Fire Lord. 

Akane, who had played all of the cards in her hand, was leaning back in her wheelchair haughtily, “There’s this one thing you could try. It might be a bit complicated, but your abilities in both card games and life will grow to heights previously unknown. You don’t have to listen to me, you could continue playing at your current skill level, but I’d take my advice if I were you.”

“And that advice is?”

“Suck less.”

“Why don’t you come over here and suck my--”

“If that sentence ends with a word more explicit than ‘monkey feathers’ I will throw you both over the side of this ship and tell the Commander to leave you for the stingray-sharks,” said Kira sharply, waving a hand to the three youngest at the table who were not so subtly whispering amongst themselves and swapping cards, “There are children present.”

Akane raised her hands in surrender and started to wheel her way towards Sergeant Yoshiyuki.

“You keeping that tea spread warm and ready, sir?” she drawled out, wincing a bit as she pinched her fingers between the wheels and the seat of her chair. She’d have to talk to the mechanic who hastily built it for her about adding another inch or so between them. And also about reshaping the seat in general: the halls of the ship were wide enough to accommodate her, yes, but it was a bit of a squeeze if she was going one way and someone else was coming from the other.

“Of course,” Sergeant Yoshiyuki raised his hands to show the pot of steeping tea he was keeping warm with his bending, “Some clansmen were kind enough to scourge up a few sweets as well.”

“Wonderful. I’ll be happy to savor them until the rest of these losers finish.”

“I wouldn’t count on that,” Lieutenant Nobu drew Akane’s attention back to the game, where Kou, Lady Mai, and Prince Zuko had finished swapping cards. After Kira and Ryuu both passed on Prince Zuko’s play, the cards on the table were swept aside and Prince Zuko played again. He laid down five fire lilies, followed by Kou laying down five peasants, and then Lady Mai playing five blacksmiths. Kira and Ryuu both groaned, passing on the round. The process repeated with subsequent groups of four, three, and two, until the trio played their final cards (a princess, a Fire Lady, and a Fire Lord respectively). With no possible way for Kira and Ryuu to trump the highest card in the deck, they were forced to pass once more, leaving the three with no more cards in their hands.

Akane gaped like a fish as the three kids quietly cheered and turned to them, “Who gets what title?” asked Kou, “Zuko finished first, but Mai had the higher hands.”

“I believe Prince Zuko has earned the highest position on the technicality of being the first of you three to run out of cards,” Yoshiyuki stressed the title as he spoke, “Therefore it is him who has earned the title of Fire Lady, Private Kou who has earned the title of Princess, and Lady Mai who has earned the title of Warrior.”

“Would my Fire Lady and my Princess like me to escort them to their new seats?” Lady Mai asked with a deadpan flourish, bowing lowly and offering her hands to the two boys.

“It would be an honor my brave Warrior Mai,” Prince Zuko batted his eyes and took the girl’s hand.

“I agree, oh auspicious Fire Lady Zuko, lady of the flames, ruler of the nation, most beautiful in all the land, honored spouse of the great Fire Lord Akane.”

Kou giggled and joined in, “You honor us so, Warrior Mai, slayer of the sixty-four thieves, conqueror of dragons, greatest warrior in the land.”

“Must you mock the most basic of courtly manners?” Yoshiyuki bit back a groan and focused on the trio of children, ignoring the last two players trying to beat each other into last place.

“Whatever do you mean, Master Sergeant Yoshiyuki? We are simply addressing each other by our proper titles. Isn’t that right, Princess Kou, gem of the Fire Nation, light of the future, heir to the Fire Throne, most elegant--”

“Finally!” cried Kira, slamming down her last cards onto the little make-shift table. Ryuu let out a sigh of defeat and dropped their cards. Kira raised her fists in victory, the warm tan of her skin catching the light of one of the lanterns.

“We good for another round, then?” asked Akane.

Ryuu took a step back and grabbed the tea tray next to Yoshiyuki, “To the victors go the spoils. Go ahead and claim your prizes, Akane.”

As was customary for a game of Fire Lord, the person with the highest “rank” got to choose the most comfortable seat. Because Akane was forced to stay in her wheelchair, she instead chose where she wanted to sit at the table, and then was served first. Prince Zuko sat on her left and was served next. The pattern continued with Kou, Lady Mai, and Kira. As Ryuu was the last person to get rid of their cards, they were the person of the lowest rank and was forced to assist Yoshiyuki in serving tea to the rest.

“I’ll sit out this time,” Ryuu dragged their chair back by Yoshiyuki’s, “It’s fairly clear that I’m no expert at cards.”

“I’d gladly welcome the company,” said Yoshiyuki, passing the teen a mismatched mug (the three remaining cups in the set had been claimed by the others already), “And you won’t be missing much, as this is the last round before anyone under the age of sixteen is sent to bed.”

There was a chorus of awwwwwww’s from the group of card players, “Now, now. No arguing. It is much later than the usual time for lights out. Just be happy that you’ve been allowed out this long, and finish the night off with an exciting game.”

Once the sergeant’s back was turned, Akane stuck her tongue out at him, “Lame. He can’t blame us for wanting to have a little fun. The past few weeks have certainly been anything but.”

“Eh. Look at it from his perspective. He’s in charge of making sure you and the rest continue to stay alive. And sometimes that means being a spoilsport and telling you lot to turn in for the night,” said Kira as she shuffled the cards.

“Yeah, but the fighting’s over. Can’t we just take a night to kick back, relax, and bathe in the afterglow of survival?”

“The battle may be over, but he and the rest of command have a lot more kinks to work out in planning for what happens next.”

“Like what?” asked Lady Mai, leaning over to lightly shove Prince Zuko to pay attention.

“Well, accommodations for one,” Kira started dealing out the cards as she spoke, “The Yuyan is a warrior clan. And like all warrior clans in the middle of a war, they are built on adoption. So long as you follow clan laws and do your best to contribute to the clan in any way you can, then we’ll welcome you with open arms.”

Akane scowled at her leg. The medics said it was too soon to know, but depending upon how it healed, she could wind up either needing a brace, a cane, or an amputation, “Does that extend to people who can’t fight? I can’t imagine any warrior clan being the most welcoming to a girl who can’t even stand on her own two feet.”

“Or what about people who can fight, but don’t want to?” asked Kou. He picked up his cards and started to sort them anxiously.

“Like I said, so long as you help in any way you can, we’ll welcome you. Warrior clans need food and clothes just as much as farming clans do. But I’m worried about a different problem,” said Kira, “How in the world are we going to file the clan’s taxes?”

Akane looked at the older girl incredulously, “We just walked away from battle some of us,” she pointed to herself and the three kids who were swapping cards again, “By the skin of our teeth or in their case by the mercy of a single shirshu. And you are worried about how you’ll file taxes come tax season?”

“You’ve never been a part of a clan, have you?” asked Kira. Prince Zuko laid down six coins, Kou laid six peasants, and Lady Mai laid six farmers. Kira looked at her cards, pouted, passed, and continued, “The Yuyan are self-sufficient enough to feed ourselves and make a little extra to either trade, sell, or store. When we file the clan’s taxes come winter, we’ll have to explain why we have it on record that we’ve either sold less than average, or we’ll have to explain why we expanded the amount of land we farm.”

“Just say you recently adopted a few more refugees than normal. It isn’t that hard,” Akane laid down six merchants and reveled in the groans and new whispers of the other three players as they started to adjust their game plan and swapped cards once more.

“If we do that, then we’ll probably have to explain where those refugees came from. We can’t exactly fake a natural disaster that affected a single town, a town that we would likely have to create out of thin air, no less. One where there were no adults left alive besides five soldiers who look suspiciously similar to the five deceased commanders of the Battle for the Forty-First.”

“Well, what if you don’t register the battalion members at all? Say there was a drought or a blight in your usual crops and that’s why you started farming more land.”

“That idea is still a bit short-sighted,” Prince Zuko finally played six sages, while Kou and Lady Mai passed. Kira passed again because she simply didn’t have six cards, while Akane passed because she couldn’t beat the sages. Prince Zuko shoved the cards to the side and the three planned their next joint move, “That idea requires every single visitor to Pohuai to miss the mass amount of extra children not on record. We may be semi-secluded in the mountains, but we still have to host generals, officials, and the like whenever one comes to us requesting help.”

“Do the Yuyan ever go on recruiting trips?” asked Prince Zuko as he laid down his next play.

Akane nearly jumped in her seat. She hadn’t thought the prince was still listening.

“Some of the warrior clans on the mainland visit orphanages and schools to see if there are any kids they want to adopt,” the Prince laid down four warriors.

“So?”

“So just say someone from the Yuyan clan took a recruiting trip to a nearby orphanage, and during the trip, there was an accident, and the orphanage burned down. A single orphanage is much easier to lie about than an entire town. And then, as an apology for the clan’s careless actions, they’ve taken in the entirety of the orphanage residents, including the five caretakers. You then have a believable excuse for why you need to farm more land, why you’ll have a sudden increase in clansmen, why you’ll have more firebenders on base than usual, and why battalion members’ parents would be flocking to Pohuai in droves.”

“How would a burned-down orphanage explain immigrants from the Fire Nation?” Akane asked, laying down four princesses.

“You just have to claim that the Yuyan are seeking out laborers and artisans to make up for the ones you already have being swamped with work,” Lady Mai explained while laying down her four cards. Akane got the distinct impression that the girl wanted to add a ‘duh’ and an eye roll to the end of her sentence, “That might even end up being the truth. Unless your clan has a few dozen workers shoved away in a basement somewhere.”

Lady Mai directed her last question to Kira, who simply shook her head.

“I might have to bring that idea up with the Commander. How did you think through the problem so quickly, anyway?” she asked.

Prince Zuko shrugged sheepishly, “Just administrative lessons, honestly. I’d be surprised if Tamotsu doesn’t come up with something similar.”

“Well still, that’s a pretty full-proof plan. Now let’s finish the game and get you four settled in bed. And from here on out,” Kira pinned the three with a scolding look, “No cheating.”

Chapter Text

There are old, ancient ideas about love.

Yoshiyuki has studied many of them in his youth -- for all his proficiency at firebending and his military life, he is a thinker first, warrior second -- but still, the ways of love elude him.

During the Siege, in the middle of those dreadful, lonely nights where there was nothing to do but pretend to be busy and wait for those fathomless walls to fall, Yoshiyuki once asked the members of his unit what they thought love was.

“Love,” said Tatsuya simply and surely, “Love is falling asleep dog-piled by my siblings. It’s hugs and kisses, cuddles and tickle fights. It’s getting a slap on the back from my dad and my older siblings whenever I learn something from them. It’s giving the little kids dragon-back rides as we rush down to meet fishermen at the docks.”

“Love?” asked Nobu, a bit surprised by the question, “Love is picking flowers for my mom in the springtime. It’s hunting through every market trying to find the perfect gift for dad’s birthday. It’s taking you all out to try new tea houses and street vendors, and then bullying you into letting me pay. It’s the look of joy on people’s faces when they unwrap a package to find a perfectly-tailored treasure inside.”

“Love,” said Minori as she helped him complete the incident reports from the morning’s forward march, “Love is sitting in the middle of a sweltering forge as my father explains to me how to properly strike dents out of armor. It’s watching over my mother’s shoulder as she does the bookkeeping. It’s sparring with Tatsuya until we’re both too tired to stand. It’s being able to sit silently in another person’s presence as you both do separate tasks, neither of you wanting to leave the room. It’s staying up late to help you with the extra influx of paperwork.”

“Love,” said Tamotsu hesitantly, thinking over the answer, “Love is telling people ‘I love you’ every chance you get. It’s compliments about everything: from their appearance to their fighting skills to the way they think. It’s giving a person a quick ‘congratulations’ when they finally nail that firebending form. It’s writing rambling love letters and corny poetry knowing that it’ll make the recipient smile. It’s memorizing sonnets so you can quote them in the middle of the royal court, sneakily telling someone that you love them without raising the attention of any eavesdroppers.”

“Love,” whispered Prince Lu Ten in the dead of night, sharing a cup of tea with Yoshiyuki, “Love is insisting upon helping the servants clean my dad’s room before he returns from a battle. It’s spending hours learning how to properly conduct a tea ceremony to surprise dad. It’s sneaking into my grandfather’s solar to fill out his paperwork for him. It’s helping Auntie Ursa with her embroidery. It’s teaching Zuko how to swordfight. It’s meditating with Azula at dawn. It’s studying from ancient masters, reading countless scrolls, and throwing together my own style of bending so the next person who doesn’t want to just use their fire as a weapon won’t have to. It’s doing my best to bring an end to this war and returning to the Fire Nation with ideas on how to best help our society recover.”

Love, Yoshiyuki concluded, was fluid. Many ancient documents -- and ancient was a stretch as most didn’t predate the beginning of the war and those that did were often altered -- were wrong in this sense. They painted a very strict picture of love with only three visible types: passionate love between a husband and wife, familial love between parents and child, and patriotic love for one’s country.

But as Yoshiyuki grew and spoke and learned of love, he found that these uncompromising definitions did not fit the love he knew. They did not fit how he would sacrifice everything for the people he served alongside. They did not explain how he thought of Prince Lu Ten, Minori, Tatsuya, Nobu, and Tamotsu instead of his own sister whenever he heard the word ‘sibling.’ They did not account for how he’d see Nobu and the prince dance around each other for months until Tatsuya would finally lock the two in the prince’s quarters the night before they left for Ba Sing Se, only for the prince to emerge the next morning with a skip in his step and bite marks on his neck.

And the more Yoshiyuki doubted the Fire Nation’s definition of love, the more he wondered about the other nations’ ideas of love. He wondered if the airbenders were truly the cold, passive, loveless beings they were portrayed as in the history scrolls, or if they simply thought keeping their burdens to themselves and keeping the ones they loved away from conflict was their definition of love. He questioned whether or not the Water Tribes were savages who lived at the poles in fear of the Fire Nation, or if they thought working alongside one another and ensuring each other’s survival in such harsh conditions was the pinnacle of love. He pondered the Earth Kingdom, and debated with himself on the merits of asking a colonial soldier if building a stable, secure home was how an earthbender showed love.

Other nations aside, Yoshiyuki was still learning how he defined love. At this very moment, love was setting up a hammock in a four-bunk room so he and the rest of the unit wouldn’t have to be separated. It was scavenging more bedding and distributing the softest pillows on Tamotsu’s bunk because he could never sleep with lumpy bedding. It was waiting patiently with a pot of chai tea knowing that they would all need a boost in energy for the inevitable long talks into the night.

Minori and Tatsuya stumbled into the room first. They walked in together and silently accepted Yoshiyuki’s offered teacups. Minori thanked him quietly and pulled out her jian, a rag, and a bit of polish. She sat down across from him on the floor and slowly and methodically cleaned her blade. Tatsuya claimed the hammock and pulled out the small knife he kept hidden in his boot at all times. He then grabbed a long, thin strip of leather out of his pocket and started to replace the fraying leather grip on the handle.

Nobu came in next. He climbed up to one of the top bunks, afterward reaching down to grab his tea. Once he had safely positioned himself on his perch, he pulled off the bow and quiver still on his back and took stock. The bow was quickly unstrung and set aside, while each arrow was systematically checked over: shaft checked for cracks, fletching replaced as needed, and arrow tips taken often and sharpened with a small whetstone.

Tamotsu was the last person to enter the room. He quietly checked over the occupants and closed the door tightly, latching the lock as the others put away their weapons.

“Thank you, Yoshiyuki,” said Tamotsu as he took the offered tea. The lieutenant colonel sat down and put his back to the front of the door like a guard. Yoshiyuki was incredibly thankful he had chosen to serve chai; the blend gave the drinkers a sense of alertness, but not the jittery nerves of its more caffeinated cousins. And based on the tension in his superior officer’s shoulders, extra nerves was the last thing he needed.

Once Tamotsu had taken a few sips of tea and set his cup to the side, he pulled out a few sheets of paper and a charcoal writing stick, “A lot has happened today. Many of our long-term plans are rapidly being changed once more, and we should take some time to discuss them before we enter Pohuai and are surrounded by unknowns.”

“Do you think the Yuyan untrustworthy, sir?” asked Minori, tightening her grip on her sword.

“The Yuyan are notorious for staying out of the Fire Nation royal court and politics in general, lieutenant. Based on their help today and their willingness to follow Prince Zuko, I wouldn’t label them as untrustworthy. But we don’t know them and we don’t know their beliefs. I only think we should exercise caution and tread lightly until we know the lay of the land.”

“Now, let’s talk about the elephant koi in the room,” said Tamotsu, “Prince Zuko is alive.”

There’s a quiet cheer from Tatsuya and Nobu before they are cut off by Tamotsu, “Yes, it is a relief. This entire event has proven the prince capable in strategy and political mechanisms if the deployment and planning of the Yuyan and the subsequent idea of how to explain the Yuyan’s greater intake of clan members is anything to go by. But he still must improve more in both mind and body before he can take the throne.”

Tamotsu set down one of his papers and started to read off of it, “We have three years until the prince comes of age, and a little under four until Sozin’s Comet returns. The comet is our biggest worry: we don’t know what Ozai plans to do, but we do know Ozai’s character. He is obsessed with his egotistical sense of superiority and wishes to proclaim himself greater than any Fire Lord before him. And if he wants to outdo his grandfather, then he will have to burn either the Earth Kingdom or the Water Tribes to the ground.”

“And that,” said Tamotsu fiercely, “Is why Prince Zuko must take the throne before Sozin’s Comet comes to pass. Tatsuya,” Tamotsu looked up at the man sitting in the hammock, “I want you to help Zuko with his firebending. I heard that he’s still trying to regain his confidence after the Agni Kai, but he has already taken the most important step in deciding to continue despite his trauma. Talk to Zuko and Master Raiden about helping in any way you can. As the most skilled bender and the one who got the farthest with Prince Lu Ten’s altered style of firebending, you’re the best person to teach him.”

“Minori, Nobu, you two will be in charge of making sure Zuko’s weapon handling stays sharp. Nobu, I already know you wrote to Master Piandao about coming to Pohuai to teach, but you two should step in as instructors and sparring partners until we receive word about what Piandao wishes to do. You two will also have the opportunity to interact with others and learn more about the Yuyan. The bounty hunter that escorted the prince and Lady Mai to Pohuai shows signs of attachment already, and Nobu especially will be able to interact with the archers.”

“Yoshiyuki,” Tamotsu turned to him, “You and I are on political lessons. Zuko is intelligent, and he cares about people. He isn’t the best at talking to others, but he’s endearing in his own way. We need to teach him the ins and outs of how to maneuver the infrastructural side of ruling without screwing himself over.”

“We have three years to make Prince Zuko the best Fire Lord he can be, but one man does not rule on his own. He’s going to need allies, and I think the Yuyan are the best place to start.”

“Does the clan as a whole know the prince’s identity, and are they willing to keep it secret?” asked Yoshiyuki.

“By my understanding, yes the clan knows. They’ll also be willing to keep it a secret on account of their general isolationism. But isolationism is a double-edged sword; there are no other clans that the Yuyan has particularly close ties with. Networking and convincing others of Prince Zuko’s identity will be a challenge.”

“If we get the White Lotus in on this, will that even matter?” asked Nobu, “By the time Zuko turns sixteen, the entirety of the forty-first battalion will have come of age. If we could hypothetically get the entirety of the Yuyan clan, Admiral Jeong Jeong’s organized forces, Master Pakku’s benders from the north, and the armies of Omashu, that’d be an army more than big enough to take Caldera. It’d also send the message that the prince has the backing of every nation.”

“But that could be spun as an imposter working alongside traitors and outsiders to overthrow the government. Zuko would have a hard time hanging onto power if he’s constantly being second-guessed by his nation.”

“He’ll have that problem regardless,” said Minori, “The best way to combat it is to start planting seeds of doubt now. Point out how the corpse of the prince was rumored to not have a head, and draw attention to how Ozai staged a private funeral and skipped the mourning period associated with a crown prince’s death. That should at least draw some suspicion and make the prince’s return more believable.”

“Believable or not, a ruler that promises to end the war and to undo Ozai’s mistakes will already have the support of most of the lower class,” said Tatsuya, “I may not know politics, but I know how my neighbors feel. Everybody’s tired these days. Tired of sending their brave sons and daughters off to war, tired of the crown forcing us to put worship on the backburner in favor of more ‘practical’ uses of time, tired of passing down traditional songs, stories, and dances in secret, tired of all of it. If someone comes along, says they’re ending the war for good, and agrees to start reviving important cultural and economic programs, then not a single person not of the nobility or the upper military command is going to protest.”

“We’ll tentatively count on local support then,” said Tamotsu, writing something down, “Now, I had this idea on how to spin the prince’s story as both believable and as something the general public would love. But it’d be a bit manipulative, and might not even work if the prince ends up taking after his cousin. Just. Keep an open mind as I run it by you.”

Yoshiyuki sat up a bit straighter and gestured for Tamotsu to continue. Tamotsu took a deep breath and started to explain, “We agree that we’ll have to explain Prince Zuko’s situation eventually. I was kind of thinking that we might be able to spin the prince’s survival as a love story.”

“Hear me out,” Tamotsu said quickly before Yoshiyuki could speak, “Lady Mai and Prince Zuko were already betrothed before this event. Lady Mai must love the prince strongly to save his life, even if that love is only platonic. If we spin it as the actions of a devoted girl ferrying her prince charming to safety, the people would eat it up.”

“I was simply going to say that the people would most likely view the story in a romantic light the second it is told,” Yoshiyuki took a sip of chai, “We are a passionate people, and many like to look for romance even when there are no signs of it. I highly doubt we could stop the general public from fawning over young love. But,” he took another sip, “That does not mean we should lean into it. If Prince Zuko and Lady Mai develop a love like that, I highly doubt it would take much to encourage the people. But if Prince Zuko and Lady Mai were to maintain a friendship and nothing more, then the public could potentially become bitter when they don’t run away into the sunset and have a dozen children. The backlash could potentially be both dangerous and unpredictable, therefore, discourage any retellings like that until we know for sure about how the two feel.”

“If you’re set upon spinning the story in the prince’s and Lady Mai’s favor, I would go for the more devoted route. Point out how Ozai broke many laws, both religious and legal, in the Agni Kai. Tell the world how no one present at the dual spoke in the prince’s defense. Paint Lady Mai as a strict follower of tradition who decided that the prince would never be safe in the clutches of such unfaithful scum, and instead helped him escape to the honored Yuyan clan, an ancient warrior clan dedicated to their beliefs. If you truly want to push the religious angle, tell the world that Lady Mai prayed to Agni for guidance and then received a vision instructing her to ensure the prince’s safety at all costs, as he is meant to take the throne.”

Tatsuya whistled, “Now that’s a story people will eat up. All you nobles might not take the spirits seriously, but outside of the bigger cities, it’s a major part of life. There’s a guardian spirit for everything. The river my village lives on even has its own designated spirit that we pray to for protection and good fishing hauls.”

Tamotsu wrote down the major points Yoshiyuki went over and looked up, “So our short-term plans are this: continue Prince Zuko’s education until we hear word from Master Piandao or Prince Iroh, and attempt to learn more about the Yuyan clan. Long-term plans are to start spreading rumors about the prince’s survival, prepare Zuko to take the throne, and find allies willing to help stage a coup before Sozin’s Comet arrives. Beyond the Yuyan and the White Lotus, where should we start looking for allies?”

“May I have permission to write my parents as well as other battalion members’ families on the mainland, sir?” asked Minori, “The Yuyan will certainly accept blacksmiths wanting to move out of Caldera, and I doubt there is any love lost between the parents and Ozai’s regime.”

“So long as you can get a reliable way to send messages, I’ll allow it. Starting small to test the waters won’t hurt anything.”

“I propose we try and find support in the colonies,” said Nobu, “They will most likely be the most open to following the prince, seeing as they are more disconnected from the mainland and prefer their local rulers to the Fire Lord.”

“Granted, Nobu. Who else?” 

The conversation continued from there, with the unit discussing the pros and cons of contacting different people and talking over other such ideas. Eventually, Yoshiyuki switched his pot of chai tea out for a pot of chamomile and tried to convince the others to fall asleep. After all, planning a revolution could wait until tomorrow.

Chapter Text

A buzz of emotion takes hold of the ships’ occupants as the site of the Pohuai Stronghold comes into view. 

For the Yuyan, it’s the pure joy of coming home; they find their jobs finished quicker and their smiles stretch wider at the thought of returning to their lives of archery, the clan, and the familiar rhythm of their base. A few of the forty-first members, those that had quickly bonded with their new companions, shared in the joy and whispered to each other what they looked forward to the most: learning the Yuyan’s hand language, devouring Cook Bunko’s lauded egg custard puffs, finally stepping back onto dry land.

Others of the battalion were a bit more hesitant. They were the ones who weren’t quite sold on joining or living amongst a warrior clan. The ones who had already decided that they had seen enough war for this lifetime, already had enough nightmares of being buried alive and other horrors that came to them in the dead of night. The ones who were tempted to take all that they owned and flee to some mythical place where a generations’ old violence couldn’t touch them. But a sense of loyalty and hope for something better let them put their fear to the side and look on towards the fortress hidden in the upcoming mountains. After all, they could always flee tomorrow.

The Tamotsu unit feels focused. With their talking and planning and strategizing behind them, the five were ready to continue with their plans. Nobu and Minori had approached Jiaying and June, and connected with their fellow nonbenders over weaponry and looking after reckless, courageous, idiot children (Nobu and Jiaying had even hit it off so well over different shooting practices that if Jiaying wasn’t currently mapping out the perfect plan to court June, and Nobu still not a bit heartbroken over his late lover’s passing, then they may have been in danger of falling in love). Yoshiyuki and Tamotsu had spent countless hours taking tea with Commander Hideaki, only to quickly turn tea time to impromptu politicking lessons once they realized the Commander was a loyal traditionalist and had the political awareness of a drunk toucan puffin. 

Tatsuya, surrounded by Yuyan clansmen who took after their clan head in political knowledge and battalion children who had already imprinted on him like flocks of turtleducklings, was in his element. He had no trouble charming either group with the age-old tactic of asking, ‘do you want to see something really cool?’ and then continuing to pull a hippo-bullshit insane stunt that earned him the admiration of anyone watching. The major reveled in his new friends’ company almost as much as he reveled in the exasperated (and in Tamotsu’s case, angrily frustrated) looks.

Zuko, Mai, and Kou were balls of delightful apprehension. Zuko didn’t know when or how Mai and Kou bonded, but whatever initially drew them together stuck. His friend had accepted the circus boy’s presence without much question and Zuko, seeing how Mai didn’t try to dissuade Kou from inserting himself into their lives, had followed suit. Now the three were waiting at the bow of the ship as they tried to point out the figure of Pohuai standing tall against the mountains, knowing down to the embers that they would enter their new home soon.

“Do you think I’ll be able to learn under a firebending master?” asked Kou.

“Master Raiden’s been getting me back up to speed before we left. He’s a lot nicer than my other teachers, and I’m sure he’ll be happy to take on another student,” said Zuko genuinely. 

Kou smiled and looked back out to the upcoming shore, “I’d be thankful for the opportunity. I’d always wanted to learn how to heal.”

Zuko bristled, but relaxed again, “I don’t think Master Raiden can heal with his firebending, but I’m sure there are tons of other moves he could teach you.”

Instead of consoling Kou, the boy instead looked confused, “Don’t all firebending masters know how to heal with their bending?”

“Fire healing was an extremely rare art, even before the war began,” Mai explained, “When the war started in earnest, Fire Lord Sozin ordered all benders to focus on training warriors. Healing just....didn’t garner the same respect or attention that fighting did. The last fire healer fell at the Siege of Ba Sing Se. I haven’t heard of one since.”

Kou drooped at the news like a moonflower in direct sunlight, “The first memory I have of bending is Master Sora using her flames to close up a cut on my dad’s leg. I always wanted to learn how to do that, but I didn’t start bending until after she died. I thought that surely at least one person in the entire Yuyan clan would know it.”

Zuko put a hand on his shoulder and thought, “Maybe you can’t be a fire healer, but that doesn’t mean you can’t be a healer at all. Even if fire healing, in general, isn’t widespread, there are some techniques that every field medic should know. Like cauterizing wounds. Or flushing out poisons.”

Mai nodded in agreement, “You could take lessons from the Yuyan healing halls. And June taught us a bit about plants and herbs. Oh, and there’s an old healer up in the mountains that the clan visits every so often to buy supplies from. Maybe she would take you on as an apprentice. I’m sure there are plenty of people you could draw inspiration from.”

“Yeah. Maybe. But even then, I’d still be missing a lot of old knowledge.”

Zuko paused, “Say that again.”

“I’ll still miss a lot of old knowledge?”

Zuko grabbed Kou, who grabbed Mai, “Of course! Come on, we need to find Tatsuya!”

*****

“I think this is the last of it!” cried Tatsuya to Hiroki, the stablehand driving the ostrich-horse-drawn cart, “I’ll follow the caravan on foot.”

“You sure you don’t want a ride?” asked the boy, gesturing towards the extra room on the driver’s seat.

“I’m fine. And besides, I don’t think the poor mares can take any more weight,” Tatsuya pointed to the cart overflowing with crates of armor, weapons, and extra supplies.

“If you’re sure then. I’ll send a search party if you wind up getting lost.”

Tatsuya waved the boy’s concern off and cracked his back. Those crates were heavy. With a snap of the reins, the mares started to trod off. Tatsuya swung his pack over his shoulder and started to follow when he felt the familiar feeling of a small person barreling into his side. He looked down and saw Zuko, Mai, and Kou; a little out of breath but none worse for wear.

“What put you three in such a tizzy?” he asked.

“Tats--” the prince wheezed, “What did Lu Ten base the Reborn Dragon form off of?”

Tatsuya paused in his step, “Why you want to know?”

“It’s important!”

“Important enough to drag your friends every which way on a wild viper-goose chase?”

Tatsuya chuckled at Zuko’s whine, but answered his question, “Your cousin studied a whole lot of ancient techniques to create that fancy firebending style of his. I don’t remember most of his sources, but as far as I understand it, it’s a bit of a hodgepodge between ancient fighting forms, fire healing meditations and practices, and forms and ideologies taken directly from the ancient Sun Warriors civilization.”

Zuko and Kou beamed, “Can you teach it to us?” they asked in unison.

Tatsuya’s face went pale, “What for?”

Please say fighting, please say fighting, please say fighting. I can teach the katas for fighting like any other master, but if they say-

“Kou and I want to learn how to heal!”

“Damn it!” Tatsuya thought, smile frozen on his face, “If they want to make any headway in healing, they’ll have to connect with their inner flame. And if they want to do that….”

Tatsuya’s thoughts turned to how, exactly, he and Lu Ten had learned the Sun Warrior moves. Those thoughts then turned to the very scary, very real threats to feed him to the dragon masters if he ever set foot on the Sun Warrior island again.

Tatsuya shuddered and steeled himself. He pictured Lu Ten’s excitement about creating a new form of firebending, and about his promise from last night to teach what little he knew to Zuko. Even if he hadn’t thought of the implications then, he still promised his word.

“Alright. I’ll teach you,” he said tiredly, “But you have to get the okay from Master Raiden first. Lu Ten didn’t start the Reborn Dragon style until he had already mastered the Phoenix forms. I won’t teach you until you do the same.”

“Got it,” said Prince Zuko, “I will endeavor to perfect the forms as quickly as possible.”

“Where are you at in firebending, anyways?” Tatsuya asked.

“I’m halfway through the Salamander-Tiger forms,” Zuko blushed with embarrassment.

Tatsuya froze. That meant he just had to finish the rest of the Salamander-Tiger forms and the Rooster-Lion forms, and then he’d be on Phoenix level.

“Stupid princes with their stupid work ethic,” Tatsuya cursed in his head, “I’m going to be dragon-chow before the year is up.”

*****

When Mai and the others finally made it back to Pohuai, they were ushered into the innermost circle with the rest of the forty-first members. When they were finally spotted by Jiaying, she pointed June their way and went off towards a group of adults talking with Colonel Tamotsu and Commander Hideaki.

“There you brats are,” said June, “They’re about to go over clan laws and other things we need to know if we’re planning to stay in the clan. And that begs the question: are you going to stay in the clan?”

Mai shot Zuko a look and turned back to June, “Aren’t we? That was kind of the whole point of hiring you to escort us here safely.”

June shrugged, “You two initially came here because there was nowhere for you to go. But now, you have options. The Yuyan is one of them, yes, but so am I.”

June kneeled down in front of Mai and Zuko, “I’m not that big on family and stuff. I’ve never been one to want to settle down and have a gaggle of snot-nosed brats. But you two are my apprentices now, and if you’re willing to travel with me and learn, I promise to keep the two of you safe and to teach you all I know.”

“And if we want to stay?” asked Zuko, lip wobbling.

June shot a look over her shoulder at the group of conversing adults, “I’ll still be around. Pohuai ain't exactly boring, and there are some people I’d like to check in on,” Jiaying caught June’s gaze and waved. June waved back and turned around to face them, “No matter what though, you two are still going to be my apprentices. I promise to write whenever I can, and check in on you two every month or so. But if you do decide to stay, know that what I’ll be able to teach you will be limited, and you’ll most likely have to find some other teachers to fill in the cracks.”

Mai nodded.

June mussed up their hair and chuckled, “I’ll be sticking around at least until the end of the week. Don’t try and feel rushed about this decision, it’s a bit of a big one to make. Now, I think they’re about to start.”

June turned to the group as one woman stepped forwards. She didn’t have archer tattoos, but she did have a striking scar over her face. It reached from her left temple, over her nose, and ended on her right cheekbone. Mai wondered where she got it from.

“Greetings, young ones,” she said enthusiastically, “I am Hisoka of the Yuyan clan. I’m one of the elders of the clan and married to that big lug over there,” she pointed to Master Raiden. There were a few chuckles, and Hisoka smiled at successfully breaking the tension, “Yes, yes, laugh at my husband. It keeps him humble. Now,” she clapped her hands and drew the attention to her once more, “The clan has already decided amongst ourselves that we are submitting an open adoption invitation to all of you. That means that if you wish to join the Yuyan clan, you will be welcome to do so. However! If you do not want to join the clan, there are a few options.”

Minori stepped up beside Hisoka and she began to speak, “For any battalion members of age, and this refers to anyone sixteen or older, not anyone who was legally emancipated in order to fight, you are free to strike off on your own if you so wish. You will be free to leave with any of your belongings, and a set amount of rations and money. For anyone under the age of majority who does not want to join the Yuyan, I and the rest of your commanding officers will be writing to your families and inviting them here to meet at Pohuai. All traveling expenses will be paid by us and the Yuyan.”

A teenage boy that Mai didn’t know spoke up, “What about if we want to stay here, but we also want to get our parents out of the Fire Nation?”

“For those of you, like me, who want their families to join the Yuyan, we will also be writing invitations to them and helping them travel to this base. If any of your immediate family wants to join the clan, there will be a probationary period where their character is judged and compared to the clan’s values. If they pass the probationary period, then they will be adopted into the clan as well.”

A girl around Zuko’s age quietly asked, “Are there any options for people who don’t want their parents to know?”

“Come and see one of the members of the command unit and we can talk over your options,” Minori said gently.

Hisoka looked around at the rest of the battalion members, “Well then! If there are no other questions, let’s eat!”

Chapter Text

Zuko gazes reverently at the table before him.

The Pohuai mess hall was decked out in fine decorations. Red silk banners with characters for luck, reunion, and welcomes covered the walls. The eight long tables that stretched the length of the room were set with beautifully embroidered table cloths, and dinner was set on finely painted china instead of the usual wood or porcelain dishes.

But none of that registered as Zuko took in the sight of the food.

Every inch of the tables was covered in various dishes, most of which Zuko only ever ate at festivals during the solstices or the equinoxes. Yakisoba noodles so heavily seasoned with fire flakes that they appeared a violent, angry red were passed down the table. Bowls of onigiri and dumplings with every flavor imaginable were quickly replaced and swapped with new servings. Hungry Yuyan clansmen hurried cups of motsuni from Chef Bunko’s kitchen to the waiting eaters who devoured them in minutes. Skewers of everything, from fried chicken-squirrel, to hippo-steak, to octopus littered the table. People chomped down on cobs of tomorokoshi and washed it all down with hot cups of tea.

Mai hooked her elbow through the crook in his arm and led him and Kou over to an empty table. Kou, June, and Jiaying followed, Jiaying flashing a few signs that Zuko still didn’t know, and a few like kind and dinner and food that he did. They sat down, Zuko grabbing his chopsticks and mumbling a quiet thanks to the spirits. His hands drifted towards a plate of dumplings, intending to pluck a few onto his plate when suddenly, they were snatched by another.

“Hey!” said Zuko, following the offending pair of chopsticks attached to a sun-splotched arm, and the arm to the face of the food thief, “That was mine!”

The man finished chewing and swallowed, “If it ain’t in your mouth, it’s fair game kid.”

Zuko scowled and quickly grabbed a few other dumplings. He plopped one into his mouth and swore he could have cried. The gyoza melted in his mouth and the savory hippo-beef fell apart on his tongue. Was this love? Was this what people meant when they talked about finding ‘the one ?'

Zuko’s chopstick floated down to grab another dumpling, only to find them grasping at air. He looked at his empty plate, and then at the thief. He had the audacity to wink at him before swallowing one of Zuko’s dumplings whole.

Oh, it was on.

Zuko, plate in one hand, chopsticks in the other, lunged at the stranger. The man yelped and tried to cover his face with his arm, only to be surprised when he instead went for the plate in front of him. Zuko threw one dumpling in his mouth and chewed hard while his hands got to work filling his plate with the stolen goods. Once he noticed what Zuko was doing, the man cried in indignation and threw himself into the fray. Dumplings rapidly switched hands and were eaten at lightning speeds. Zuko’s hands were smacked by the man’s chopsticks, making him yelp and drop a dumpling onto the waiting plate. Zuko gave just as good as he got, skewering one of the man’s dumplings with a chopstick, and pulling the food off of the chopstick with his teeth.

By the time the last dumpling was eaten -- Zuko swallowed it whole after wrestling it away from the thief -- everyone else at their end of the table had served themselves and started digging in.

“You done yet, brat?” asked June.

“Yeah,” said Zuko, now seeing that both he and the stranger had empty plates.

“Can you stop acting like the thirteen-year-old beside you and just enjoy Bunko’s food already?” the stranger translated Jiaying’s signs before answering her question, “Well maybe if the thirteen-year-old would just acknowledge that I am the superior food fighter, we wouldn’t be having this problem.”

Jia shot the man a look, and he raised his hands in defeat, “Fine, fine. I won’t aggravate the tiny fire ferret.”

Zuko, guard still up from more food theft attempts, started to fill his plate once more, going for a few more dumplings, a cob of the tomorokoshi, and a hefty serving of yakisoba. The man asked for two cups of soup, one miso, and one motsuni, and introduced himself while a kitchen runner went to get them, “I’m Satoshi, mechanic extraordinaire. Jia should have talked about me. My friendship is, after all, the only interesting thing about her.”

“Not a word,” Zuko said with a deadpan glare. Jiaying had, actually, mentioned an ‘annoying man-baby that I was unfortunately befriended to,’ who worked on base as a mechanic. But because Jia hadn’t ever given a name, and because Zuko wanted to vex the dumpling thief as much as possible, he feigned ignorance.

“Jiaaaaaaa,” Satoshi pouted at the woman sitting across from him, “Why is the baby fire ferret completely ignorant to the most amazing member of the Yuyan clan?” He tried to steal a piece of ikayaki off of her plate, but Jiaying slapped his hand away before he could grab it.

Zuko’s already met me, Jia signed.

“Of course he’s met you. You’re trying to make yourself the boy’s stepmother. He has my condolences.”

Zuko opened his mouth to try and ask what Satoshi meant by that, only to be prematurely cut off by a panicking Kou.

“Hot, hot, hot, hot, hot!” shouted the boy. He opened his mouth and started to fan his tongue, “Water! I need water!”

“Don’t be such a drama queen,” Mai deadpanned, “You only had one bite of noodles. They aren’t even that spicy.”

Zuko took his first bite of yakisoba, “Mai’s right. The noodles are great, but they don’t have that much of a kick to them. Noodles from Taniga Valley, on the other hand? Those are spicy.”

Tears were starting to run down Kou’s face. He kept fanning himself and said manically, “You two. Are psychopaths.”

“Here, kid,” said June, offering up a glass of milk, “Don’t mind the Fire Nation brats. Everyone from the Fire Nation mainland burned their taste buds off long ago.”

Kou slammed down the milk. He shoved the empty cup towards June, silently asking for a refill. She quietly obliged, reaching around Jiaying and Satoshi trapped in their own food war for the pitcher of milk. After Kou gulped down another two glasses, he silently split his noodles between Mai and Zuko, and let June restock his plate with foods she knew weren’t going to kill him. 

“Baby,” Mai huffed under her breath.

Zuko smiled a bit and started to eat again. The tomorokoshi was delicious, and the act of biting the grilled corn off of the cob was an immensely satisfying, methodic process. He ate more servings of foods he loved, and a few new ones that he didn’t know. In the end, he finished off nearly three rounds of food and swore that he’d never be able to eat another bite again.

That was until Tatsuya came up to them with a plate of taiyaki and asked if anyone wanted dessert.

The variety of desserts was just as vast as the variety at dinner. It was an endless supply of different custard-filled and fruit-filled delights, and Zuko was in paradise. He had two treats: one taiyaki that was almost as big as his hand, and one mooncake that Kou claimed was just like the ones served in Jyutseng, the town his circus would settle in every winter until the weather became nice enough to travel. Mai devoured two sticks of dango and Kou consumed nearly half a dozen mochi. Jia tried to feed June egg custard puffs, but June ignored her attempts for the sugary donguri ame.

By the time Zuko truly couldn’t take another bite, he and half of the mess hall occupants were scarcely a few moments away from falling into food comas. Zuko was going to have to burn so much energy off during firebending practice tomorrow if he didn’t want to completely lose all of the meager muscle on his narrow frame.

“Alright, kids,” said Hisoka patiently, “Let’s get you all to bed. Agni knows you’ve had a long voyage and before that, a long few days.”

*****

Zuko and Kou had been quietly ushered into a room with two other boys around their age. It was different from the room Zuko had shared with June and Mai while they were still being held at arm’s length from the rest of the Yuyan. In contrast to the old room’s single large bed that the three had had to share, this room had enough space to comfortably hold four different beds big enough for one person each. Where the old room had been a bit cramped with three people and their various weapons, this one had enough space (in armoires, under beds, on shelves, in closets), to hold all of their belongings and then some. While the old room had offered no privacy what-so-ever and was small enough that Zuko, Mai, and June had to take turns kicking each other out so they could change, this room was built for it with each bunk having curtains that they could draw around the bed to isolate themselves from the others.

By all means, Zuko’s new room was, on paper, far more preferable to his old one.

But for some reason, Zuko didn’t like the room. Long after the candles had all been extinguished, the prince had readied himself for bed and laid down on the comfortable cotton sheets. But sleep eluded him as he stared up at the pitch-black ceiling.

He didn’t completely understand why. He’d slept before in much more unfavorable conditions. He’d slept perfectly fine on the hard ground under the starry night sky as June had escorted Mai and him to Pohuai. He’d quickly gotten used to sleeping on the Yuyan ships to and from Kitobetsu with him, Mai, and eventually, Kou pushing their cots together on the cold, metal floor and sharing blankets. So why couldn’t he fall asleep here?

Groaning, Zuko sat up and looked at the others. The two new boys were sleeping soundly, but Kou seemed to be having the same problems as him.

“Can’t sleep?” Zuko asked pointlessly.

“I think I’m too used to noise to sleep here,” said Kou, “Back in the circus, we’d all lay our sleeping bags next to one another and I’d drift off to the sounds of snoring and people talking long into the night. It wasn’t too different back at camp, and the ship had the sounds of the ocean. But here, it’s just too quiet.”

Zuko nodded in understanding and started scooping up his blankets, pillows, and sheets, “Come on. Let’s see if we can find somewhere with a bit more life.”

Kou grabbed his stuff and followed Zuko out. They wandered for a bit down the silent, empty corridors of the base before they stumbled upon Mai walking about with a long blanket trailing behind her.

“Couldn’t sleep either?” asked Zuko.

Mai nodded, pulling the blanket tighter around her shoulders. 

Zuko sighed and thought, “Can you think of anywhere where we could sleep? I’d try the stables, but I don’t think we should get the bedding too dirty.”

Mai thought for a second, and then looked up tiredly, “Do you think there’s any birds nesting on the roof?”

Zuko followed her gaze, “I don’t know, but the rafters would at least let us hear anybody walking below us.”

Mai nodded in agreement and started to scale the wall up to the high ceiling joists. Whoever had designed the building had made little platforms that hung from the roof, most likely intending to give archers a nice place to hide and shoot if invaders ever breached the base’s walls. The platform that Mai had climbed to was barely seven-foot by seven-foot square and would serve perfectly as the foundations for a bed.

Zuko climbed up after Mai and tied her long blanket and a few of his sheets together. He then threw the make-shift rope over the side for Kou to climb. Kou tied the blankets he had to the rope and then climbed. Once Zuko and Mai pulled him up, they lifted the blanket rope and untied it as they went until they had all of their original bedding. Then, it was a race to become the most comfortable, laying down blankets and sheets and pillows into a comfy nest.

It was in this nest, cuddled together, over twenty feet off the ground, and in the arms of their closest friends, did the three children find sleep.

Chapter Text

Mai woke the next morning to the feeling of Zuko stretching his hand into her face as the rising sun woke him. Kou, it appears, is similarly attuned to his inner flame, and is beginning to stir as well. It’s annoying to be woken so early, and because she’s in the middle of a firebender sandwich, Mai can’t simply turn on her other side and doze off again. With a pout, she sits up and begins to stretch out, too. She looks around to try and see if anyone’s caught onto their position, but the halls are dark and empty. 

“Do you think anyone noticed that we snuck out?” she asks the way too awake boys on either side of her.

“If June or Tamatsu haven’t hunted us down yet, then I say we’re safe,” said Zuko, “Come on. Let’s clean up and head to the practice yard. If we just pretend that we agreed to wake up early and meet each other, then I think we’ll be able to get away with it.”

Kou nodded and started tying their blankets and sheets together once more. When the makeshift rope was long enough, he gave one end to Mai and Zuko and tossed the other to the floor. Mai tightened her grip on the sheets as Kou shimmied down. Once she saw that he was standing on solid ground, she dropped the tied blankets and started tossing down pillows and other things left up on the platform.

Zuko shared a look with her after Kou caught the final pillow in his hands, and without sharing a word, they both leaped from the platform and raced the other down. Zuko used spare, uneven stones as hand and footholds, while Mai grabbed a nearby tapestry and let gravity glide her down. She ended up beating Zuko by a hair and felt her eyes smile as she neutrally nodded to him in acknowledgment.

“Okay, you two have got to teach me how to do that,” said Kou, “I’m the one who grew up in a circus. It’s unfair that you two are the ones who would look at home on a trapeze.”

“From what Ty Lee’s told me, you can keep the trapeze to yourself,” said Mai, “I’ll stick to knife-throwing or something. Much better than doing tricks in the air like a hog-monkey.”

Zuko picked up some of the bedding and shrugged, “I’d do something cool with my swords.”

“The only sword trick in my circus was sword-swallowing. And I’d think the colonel, the major, and the others would have triple heart attacks if you ever took up that job.”

Mai paused for a moment, imagining her friend dying because he accidentally slit his throat from the inside-out, and then shuddered, “No sword-swallowing.”

Zuko, however, seemed to be actually considering the idea, “But if that’s the only thing I can do with my swords--”

“No sword-swallowing.”

Zuko gulped, “Got it. No sword swallowing.”

Mai glared at him to drive the point home, and then grabbed the linens from Kou and Zuko, “I’ll get this stuff put away, and find us some breakfast. You two can meditate together and maybe try and pester Major Tatsuya into teaching you the basic exercises for the Reborn Dragon style. I’ll find you in half an hour with breakfast, and then we can have our morning spar.”

“Sounds like a plan,” said Zuko. He turned to Kou, “I’ve got a great place for morning meditation. Follow me.”

Mai watched the two boys leave and then turned down the hall. It took a bit of retracing to find the boys’ barrack that they had abandoned sometime late last night, but she’d found it quickly enough. Quiet, so as not to wake the others still sleeping, Mai tiptoed in and gently shut the door behind her. Wary of squeaky floorboards, she hesitantly made it to the two bare, empty beds. She sorted the sheets and blankets in the dark and made the first bed as neatly as she could. She had a bit of trouble figuring out how to put the sheets on, but in the end, it looked neat enough. Routine figured out, the second bed went a lot faster.

That done, the rest of Mai’s morning went a lot faster. She quickly slipped out of the boys’ room and found her way to her own. She didn’t have to worry about making her own bed, seeing as she hadn’t slept in it or stripped it like Zuko and Kou, and instead folded and packed away the single blanket she had stolen earlier. Once again careful to not wake the other people sleeping, Mai left for the mess hall.

There she met the first people of the day that weren’t Kou or Zuko. Chef Bunko, a plump and kind-faced man, greeted her with a smile and a good morning. He told her that there were only left-over pastries and miso soup right now, but if she wanted to wait a bit, there’d be a larger breakfast spread in about an hour or so.

Mai thanked him but said she’d just take a dozen pastries for her and her friends. Chef Bunko nodded and sent her off with a large porcelain bowl of various fruit-filled and custard-filled goodies. She nodded hellos to a few farmers waking to tend the fields before the late summer sun became too hot, and exchanged morning pleasantries with every guard and archer that she crossed in the halls. Eventually, she left the main building and made her way towards Zuko’s meditation spot.

A few days after arriving at Pohuai, Zuko had found a small pond squirreled away near the stables. Mai knew it reminded him of Princess Ursa’s turtleduck pond, even though no turtleducks resided there. Nevertheless, Zuko had taken to meditating there every morning, watching the small pool of water gradually fill with color as it reflected the light of the rising sun. That is where she found him and Kou this morning, the two slowly breathing in and out, each with a flicker of flame in their hands.

“Food,” she said, breaking the two out of their trances. She tossed a pastry to the both of them, “It’s dessert for breakfast. Eat it up before someone hunts us down and steals them.”

Zuko thanked her, but scowled at her words, no doubt thinking of Satoshi from the night before. Kou bit into a peach and cream-filled roll with delight, forgetting all decorum in the face of such deliciousness. 

Mai didn’t blame him; they were amazing pastries.

“I think we need to talk,” she told Zuko, setting the bowl to the side.

Zuko frowned and took another bite to give himself more time to think, “I know what we sacrificed - you sacrificed - to make sure we ended up at Pohuai safely. But I-- it’s just--”

“June.”

Zuko slumped in on himself, “Yeah. June.”

“She’s already promised to be okay with whatever we decide to do. And that if we do end up staying, she’ll write to us and visit whenever she can.”

“I know. But don’t you feel like. Like we owe her?”

“Why would I?” Mai asked, “June initially agreed to escort us so long as we paid her the stolen money. We paid her, and she got us to Pohuai. But she stayed because she cared. June cares about us, Zuko. And when you care about someone, you do things and expect nothing in return.”

“That’s not how it works, Mai!” Zuko snapped, “Use your head. When was that ever the case back home? If I wanted Father’s attention, I had to sit through every lesson he gave me. If you wanted a new knife, you had to let your parents parade you around like a doll. If our parents, the people who love us most in the world, expect something to give us their love, then why wouldn’t it be the same with June? Or the Yuyan? Love doesn’t come without a price.”

“If that’s the case, then why didn’t I let you die after the Agni Kai?” Mai shot back, “What was in it for me? I didn’t get money, or knives, or some grand reward for helping you escape. All I got was a crash course in caring for a feverish firebender and calluses from sailing the ocean by myself.”

“Then why did you? Why keep the useless prince alive for longer than you needed to? Why lose everything you ever had for a boy who was lucky to be born?”

“Because you’re worth it!”

Mai breathed hard as Zuko’s face filled with shock, “You are the only person who ever bothered to look past my masks and told the thing you saw underneath that you liked them. You get me, Zuko. You like me. You are the first person I’ve ever met who I didn’t hate. Not even a little bit. And the more time I spent with you, the more I realized that I could be genuine with you. Genuine in a way I’ve never been with anyone else. Who cares about what I’ve lost? My parents, Azula, my titles, my wealth. It doesn’t hold a candle to you. And neither does what I’ve gained: June, Kou, the Yuyan, the forty-first. Freedom. I’ve got a life now. One that’s more exciting than I could have ever dreamed. So listen here, Zuko. You are worth it. You are worth the stress and the craziness that comes with being your friend. And you deserve a safe place where you can just live.”

“Please, Zuko,” she finished, holding his scarred face in her hands, “Please, stay. Stay with Colonel Tamotsu, and Major Tatsuya. Stay with Lieutenant Minori and Lieutenant Nobu and Sergeant Yoshiyuki. Stay with the Yuyan and the forty-first division. Stay and learn and heal. With me.”

Zuko, by this point, was crying openly but silently. He covered her hand with his and locked his eyes to hers.

“Well. I don’t mean to interrupt here,” Mai jumped at the sound of Kou’s voice. So caught up in her emotions, she had forgotten he was there, “But seeing how you’re probably done by now, I’d just like to add that I think you’re both really, really amazing. And if you two were to leave, I’d miss you.”

Zuko wiped his eyes and sat down next to Kou, “I’d miss you too. I just feel like I have to make a hard choice. Or at least one that I think is hard to make. And if I end up choosing wrong, then I’ll have to live with the wrong choice forever.”

“There is no right or wrong here, Zuko,” said Mai, “It’s just a choice between living in the base and learning all you can from Master Raiden, Major Tatsuya, and the others, or living with June and learning from her and anyone else she can find on the road. And it’s not like you can’t change your mind. If you pick one and then decide a year from now that you want to try out the other option, then you can. No one’s ever said you can’t change your mind about something.”

Zuko wiped away the still-flowing tears and curled up into his legs, “Can you give me some time to think? Alone?”

Mai squeezed his shoulder and grabbed another pastry from the bowl. She nudged it towards him, bumping it against his side as a reminder to eat. Kou stood and followed her away from the pond, leaving Zuko to think over his choices.

*****

Zuko doesn’t appear again until sunset. Mai had periodically gone to the pond to check on him throughout the day, but he was never there. She, Kou, June, and the forty-first command unit had kept an eye out for the wayward prince, occasionally searching Pohuai’s various shrines in case he had decided to pray to the spirits for guidance. 

When Zuko finally appears in the mess hall for a late dinner, Mai punches his arm and then pulls him into a tight hug.

“You good?” she asks him.

“Yeah. Sorry if I worried you.”

Zuko sat down and turned to the bounty hunter exchanging notes with Jia, “June?”

“Yeah, kid?”

“I think I want to stay here.”

“Okay, kid. We’ll get you settled, and I’ll bargain for a good messenger hawk.”

“Just like that?”

June’s eyes softened, “Yeah brat. Just like that.”

“You’re not mad?”

“Not in the slightest.”

“And you promise that you’ll visit?”

“Whenever I get the chance. Once every few moons at the minimum.”

“Okay.”

“Okay?”

“Okay.”

Zuko turned to her and smiled, “Looks like we’re both staying.”

The edges of Mai’s lips quirked into a smile, “Yeah, Zuko. Looks like we are.”

Chapter Text

“Okay, kids. Let’s see what you’ve got!” cried Nobu, as he tossed two bare bows to Mai and Zuko.

They caught the small bows easily and shot each other a confused glance, “How can we show you how well we can shoot if there’s no bowstring?”

“Before anybody can start practicing archery, they need to know the basics of bow care. June and I have already verified that you both know the safety procedures when it comes to shooting, which is why you’re out here with me instead of over there with the others,” Nobu gestured to where Jiaying and Kamiko were carefully signing out instructions to the group of forty-first members that wanted to join the archers. Hisoka was helping translate as necessary, while four archers Mai and Zuko didn’t know were demonstrating basic safety rules, “I’m just here to make sure you know how to properly care for the modified Yuyan bows, and then I’m to take you to the shooting range and let you test them out.”

Zuko nodded and began to inspect the bow for cracks. He turned the bow in his hands, marveling a bit at the lightweight. Assured that the bow was in fair condition, he asked Nobu for some string.

Nobu gave him the end of the spool of bowstring and asked him to say when to cut it. Once the string was about four inches shorter than the bow, Zuko gave the okay to cut. Bowstring in hand, Zuko started the process of stringing the bow.

He looped the bowstring and put the loop in the notch. Then, he reached for the other end of the string and lopped it as well. Zuko pinched the loop between his finger and thumb and started to carefully and slowly bend the other end of the bow towards him. Feeling that the bow was holding a safe amount of tension, he put the bowstring loop through the top of the bow and pulled it clean through the top notch.

Strung bow in hand, Zuko turned back to Mai and Nobu, who was checking over Mai’s work. After nodding in confirmation to Mai, Nobu held out his hand, silently asking for Zuko’s bow. He handed it over and waited as Nobu systematically tested the string’s tightness, examined the ears of the bow to ensure that they weren’t taking too much or not enough pressure, and then drew it, verifying that the bow had the right amount of tension to fire.

“Looks good. Let’s get you two set up on the range.”

Nobu ushered them past the class overviewing the safety rules of archery and down to the training fields. Zuko waved at Kou, who was working through a few dry katas under the eye of Master Raiden. He quickly waved back before returning to the movement, determined to catch up to where Zuko was at in the Salamander-Tiger forms so they could learn the Reborn Dragon forms together.

A fair amount of distance away from where the firebending lessons were taking place was the shooting range. Lined up on the ground were stations where archers could stand and shoot at targets of varying distances. The longer down the line went, the farther the targets got from the stations. At the absolute longest distance, targets were four hundred yards from the archers. But still, there were harder shots.

Beyond the four-hundred-yard targets, there were more variations of the archer stations and the targets themselves. Some targets were smaller and shaped differently than the standard bullseye; Zuko spotted some that looked like small birds, some were hung by strings and swung in the air, and one ambitious archer was even shooting at a lit candle intent on putting the far-flung wick out with their arrow. The stations themselves also seemed to become almost dangerous as the line continued. Most stations became higher farther down the line, forcing archers to stand and shoot on smaller and smaller surfaces high up in the air. A few forced shooters to align themselves in different positions: lying down on platforms, hanging upside down on tree limbs, and while holding themselves up on a dangling rope just to name a few.

Zuko watched in awe as arrow after arrow hit its mark. He gazed in wonder at the practiced warriors, then turned to his own bow with a sad look. He’d never be as good as these masters of their craft, so why was he even out here? He’d just embarrass himself.

Zuko felt someone flick their finger against his forehead. He looked up and saw that Nobu was giving him an indulging smile, “Hey now, drop that expression. I know that look. It’s the look you get when you’re being too hard on yourself.”

“I’m not being too hard on myself. I’m just thinking--”

“What's the point of training if there’ll always be people better than you?”

Zuko snapped his mouth shut as Nobu continued, “If you’re worried about not being the best at something, then why do you still learn firebending? You haven’t earned your mastery yet, and there are thousands of master firebenders in the world.”

“Because if I don’t, then I won’t ever improve.”

“Exactly. Zuko, you’re currently halfway through mastering two things that take most people lifetimes to learn. And you want to add a third, equally difficult skill to that list. Many people, many skilled warriors, even, are content with just mastering firebending, or sword fighting, or archery. But you’re insistent on learning all three. So cut yourself some slack every once in a while. Who cares if you’re not on the Yuyan archers’ level? They’re the best in the world, and they’ve had a lifetime longer to learn. You just need time to work your way up. Allow yourself the time and dedication you need, and you’ll get there eventually.”

Zuko nodded and approached the targets. They were about twenty yards or so from the platform he and Mai were standing on. Mai had already started shooting and was nocking back her third arrow. Zuko breathed and lined himself up with his target, making sure his feet were facing perpendicular to the center of the bullseye. He grabbed an arrow and put the front in the carved-out arrow rest and the bowstring into the nock. Arrow nocked in place, he adjusted his grip, making sure his pointer finger was on top of the arrow while his middle and ring fingers were below it. 

Zuko raised the bow towards the target and pulled the string back to his ear. He aimed steadily, keeping the center of the target in sight. With a twang, he loosed the arrow and let it fly. The arrow lodged itself into the inner circle of the bullseye, held his position for a few more seconds, and relaxed.

“Nice shot, Zuko! But don’t let Mai get ahead of you!” Nobu called. Zuko looked to see that Mai had already shot her fourth arrow and was nocking her fifth. How was she going so fast? He grabbed the next one and positioned the shot.

Practice continued from there. Between rounds and moments of waiting for others to stop shooting so they could collect their arrows safely, Nobu gave tips to Mai and Zuko, occasionally adjusting their grips on the bows or telling them to relax their grip. Zuko’s shooting was a little all over the place. While he did hit within the inner circles more often than not, there were a few times where his aim would go wide and he’d land in the white outer rings of the target.

As time went on, frustration and tiredness began to take their toll. More and more of Zuko’s shots fell outside of the golden center, and Zuko could feel his arms begin to stiffen.

“That should be enough for today,” came a new voice, a familiar voice, from behind Zuko, “Return tomorrow with a calm mind. You’ll do better then.”

Zuko dropped his bow in an instant and turned around. There, standing tall and proud with his usual small smile on his lips was Master Piandao.

“M-master,” Zuko quickly dropped into a bow, “What are you doing here?” he asked, keeping his head low.

“I’ve come to see some old students of mine, of course,” said the master.

Zuko kept his head down as he continued to speak, “This student is unworthy of your presence, Master Piandao. I have lost my honor and have brought disgrace to your name. I shall remove myself from your sight and--”

Arms wrapped around Zuko’s shoulders and pulled him in close, “This teacher refuses to allow you to do any such thing, Prince Zuko. I ask for your forgiveness, my prince, for I have failed you in a way that is unforgivable. I should have never let you step foot in the Agni Kai chambers alone.”

“But you weren’t there.”

Piandao’s arms squeezed him tighter, “I know. And I don’t think I can ever make it up to you that I wasn’t. Even if you don’t blame me, the guilt I carry shall stay for as long as that scar on your face.”

“Make sure it’s not a lot of guilt, okay? Mai got me out, and we were able to save the forty-first. So don’t have more than like, a spoonful of guilt.”

Zuko felt Master Piandao’s chuckles vibrate through his chest, “Very well. As my prince commands, I shall carry a single spoonful of guilt from this day hence. Now, where is my other pupil? I do believe she’ll like to see me as well.”

“She took a water break earlier, so she’d be somewhere in the dining hall. She’s going to be so excited to see you, Master Piandao. Oh, and you have to meet Kou. He wants to be a fire healer, and I think he has the skill for it, I really do.”

Zuko dragged his teacher off, babbling on about everyone that’s helped him so far, Master Piandao smiling indulgently the entire time.

*****

To the Grand Lotus of Fire,

My friend, there is much to discuss. The most promising knotweed tile is still intact. It has discovered other powerful knotweed tiles to help retake the far western side of the board and hopefully win the game. Amongst them are the tangled vines that once reached towards the sun with the past most promising knotweed tile, the young sprouts that were and continue to be protected by the tangled vines, and the brave white dragon that stole the knotweed tile away from the rotting roots of the Fire Lord’s garden.

They have all found fertile soil to grow in at the Mountain of the Many Reeds. The flowers already in bloom at the mountain’s base and the mountain’s peak have taken to help their new companions flourish. I have barely lived within the mountain for a few days, and I have already been introduced to species of flowers I hadn’t known to grow in such an environment. Chief among them is a thorny rose that directed the white dragon to the mountain, various minor rock tiles, two mid-level rock tiles, and a fire lily with the intent, dedication, opportunity, and skill to become a medical herb.

I have been informed by one of the tangled vines that the Grand Lotus of Air has yet to respond to the vines’ summons. In the event that he never does so, I ask that you come in his place and ready the knotweed tile for its debut into the game.

Many thanks, and may Agni shine upon you,

The Grand Lotus of No Element.

*****

To the Grand Lotus of No Element,

My friend, you truly discover the most promising gossip. I would very much like to know how you are always the one to learn such things first. 

There is much to say, but not much time to write. I must keep this short as I must once again uproot my garden (The flowers continue to bloom, but they droop now more than ever). 

It sounds like the knotweed tile has discovered a beautiful garden to grow in. Its beauty will be complemented by the flowers surrounding it. However, some advice from gardener to gardener. The tangled vines have the best of intentions, but they may choke out the knotweed if they continue to smother it as I remember. Remind them that the knotweed tile must occasionally be allowed to grow on its own, or it will never fully bloom.

The unusual flowers hidden in the mountain sound promising, the young fire lily especially. Please keep me updated as it blossoms. I and many others may learn much from its path for ---

Please excuse the inkblot. My secret garden has been found sooner than expected. 

Will write soon,

The Grand Lotus of Fire.

*****

To the Grand Lotus of Fire,

Are you and your garden safe? I have not heard news of your replanting or your demise. Where have the flowers taken root?

Yours,

The Grand Lotus of No Element

*****

To the Grand Lotus of No Element,

Our fertilizer has been destroyed. No flowers of my garden have died, but it becomes harder to make sure all have the right amount of nutrients needed to thrive, especially as the warm summer turns to brisk autumn and an eventual cold winter. I am loath to take a late vacation to the mountains with my garden in such dire conditions. I may have to postpone meeting the knotweed tile a bit longer.

The Grand Lotus of Fire.

*****

To the Grand Lotus of Fire,

Though I am new to your acquaintance, I assure you that I am an extremely experienced gardener. I have the space to temporarily house your wilting flowers in one of my glasshouses. It will be free to you every winter from here on but know that I will not be offended if you choose to let your flowers take root elsewhere. My only request is that you notify me by the Autumn Equinox so I may prepare the glass garden you will stay in.

Regards,

Apprentice of the Mountain of the Many Reeds

*****

To the Apprentice of the Mountain of the Many Reeds,

I humbly accept your proposition. I and the many flowers in my garden will join your fellows half a moon’s turn after the Autumn Equinox. We shall endeavor to take on any extra work required for winter and will do our best to not become a burden in the cold, harsh months.

My thanks,

The Grand Lotus of Fire

Chapter Text

Piandao followed along after Zuko, letting the prince lead him through the halls of the unfamiliar base. Listening to the boy’s chatter, the swordsman knew that his student was safe here in the mountains.

Whenever Zuko would come to him in Shu Jing, there was always an adjustment period before he truly became comfortable. The first time the boy had arrived at his estate had been the worst. He had been inseparable from his cousin and too timid to remain in a room with him alone. But Piandao was a patient man and knew he couldn’t force the child into accepting his presence and the simple fact that no harm would ever come to him within the halls of the estate. His patience had paid off, and two weeks into his first visit had resulted in polite hellos being exchanged and the occasional spot of tea.

With each visit, the prince became more comfortable and brought newer and larger milestones: the first game of Pai Sho they shared, the first sword lesson overseen, the first time Zuko stayed a few nights alone. By the time the boy had arrived for his fifth stay, he had wasted no time dropping his guard and showcasing every emotion and reaction as they happened naturally.

And looking at that same, vulnerable look of joy on his student’s face, Piandao knew that the prince had found an equal amount of safety and stability as he had in Shu Jing.

“-and Jiaying hit it off with June right away. Jia’s been super nice to us, but some of the others say that’s just because she wants to impress June. I think that’s kind of weird though, to impress a bounty hunter by being nice to their apprentices. Anyway, here’s the dining hall,” Zuko stopped at a pair of large carved doors and pushed them open, “Mai, Kou, June, and the unit usually eat over there,” Piandao turned to look at the table Zuko was pointing at only to quickly dodge a kunai that was flying towards where his right eye had previously been.

“Ah,” thought Piandao with a smile as he drew his sword, “It seems my other student has chosen to greet me with her usual welcome.”

Absent-mindedly, Piandao reflected the next two thrown weapons and looked to see where Mai was. The girl was a little red-faced and tired from what Piandao assumed was hours of archery practice, but overall no worse for wear. He didn’t see any visible injuries on her person, and there was a gleam of excitement in her eyes as she drew more knives in each of her hands.

“Lady Mai,” Piandao gave a polite bow, “How lovely to see you again.”

“You as well, Master Piandao,” said Mai, bowing in return, “Please, allow me to present you with the traditional gift between master and student.”

“And what gift will that be?” Piandao asked, falling into the familiar song and dance he performed with Mai every time she sought out his teachings after their first introduction.

“Puncture wounds.” 

Piandao smiled fully now as more knives flew in his direction. He dodged and taunted his student, “Now, Lady Mai, you do not speak the truth. I’ve yet to receive even a prick.”

Mai responded with her usual reply, “It is just a matter of time, master,” and with that, the greeting continued.

Piandao kept up with the exercise, being sure to only reflect weapons away from the scarce few people milling around the mess hall for a quick snack or a drink. It ended as it always did; Mai, tired of his refusal to do anything but deflect, grew bored of throwing and decided to move in closer. Kunai in each hand, she swiped at him and he batted the blades away with his sword. The close combat then continued until first blood was drawn (in this instance, Mai getting a lucky swipe at his forearm and gifting him a shallow cut), after which they both lowered their weapons and bowed to each other, signaling the end of the impromptu spar.

“It is good to see you again, Master Piandao.”

“And you, Lady Mai. Zuko tells me you’ve become acquainted with a colonial boy?”

“Yes. Private Kou is endearing, if a bit much at times,” she rose from the bow, “Would you like to meet him?”

“I’d be honored to,” Piandao followed her over to the table where Zuko and another boy were both seated and watching on.

“Zuko, might you help me? I have a bit of a craving for tea,” said Piandao, pulling out a bag of tea leaves hidden in his sleeve. 

“Of course, master,” the boy said. He grabbed the teapot full of water off of the table and placed it into his hands, slowly heating them and allowing the pot to warm. 

“Good,” thought Piandao as he set the bag of tea leaves on the table, “The prince is still comfortable with his inner flame. At least enough to use it for smaller things, even if he may not be ready to resume firebending training yet.”

He turned to the new face at the table, “Hello, young man. My students tell me that you wish to be a fire healer?”

“Ye-yeah,” said the boy nervously, giving him a look that he’s seen all too often in some of his past students, “And you’re. You’re--”

“Master Piandao. I taught Zuko and Mai how to handle bladed weapons,” said Piandao. He kept his voice calm and his hands folded on the table where the skittish boy could see them. He pondered for a moment why his patron spirit always dropped the scarred children in his lap before dismissing the thought. Each child was a gift, and he could not condemn them for how they reacted to his presence (even if he mentally skewered every adult that had ever hurt them with each and every one of his blades).

“Hi. Uhm. What was with the thing Mai was talking about? The gi-gift? For the master and student?”

“Traditionally, if a student wishes to gain the guidance of a master or teacher, they must first present them with a gift of some sort to show the teacher that they are serious in intent and honored to gain their knowledge.”

“Does that mean I’d ha-have to give Master Raiden a gift for teaching me how to firebend?” asked the boy.

“Well, that depends. Have you already started lessons?”

The boy nodded.

“And did you go to Master Raiden and request to learn, or did he offer his knowledge freely?”

“Master Raiden offered to teach all of the forty-first members.”

“Then you need not worry about giving him a gift. The tradition does not apply to you,” Piandao explained, “Firstly, if a teacher seeks out a student like Master Raiden has, then that means the master is already impressed by the student and the intended pupil need not prove themselves. Secondly, the tradition mostly applies to strangers, as the teacher needs a way to judge their students, and nobility, who never turn down a chance to flaunt their wealth and show up others with shinier gems and purer gold. As we are in the colonies and you are a future clanmate and past brother-at-arms, it is Master Raiden’s duty as an elder clansman to educate you for the benefit of the clan.”

Kou nodded along and Mai asked a question, “Speaking of masters, what are you doing here?”

“Nobu sent for me,” said Piandao easily, not wishing to lie to the children, “His letter mentioned a request for me to teach here at Pohuai.”

“Really?” asked Zuko in excitement, nearly dropping the still heating teapot.

“I expect to stay and teach, though I do not know for how long. I must speak to Commander Hideaki about that.”

His two students became delighted at the news, though Mai downplayed her emotions as usual. The prince continued to smile, his wide grin pulling on the scar tissue of the left side of his face, “The best archers of the world taught by the best swordsman. Nobody would ever oppose the Yuyan then.”

“I’ve yet to meet a person who thought themselves the best only to be blindsided by a better opponent. I refuse to call myself the best swordsman until I can face every other warrior in their prime and beat them,” Piandao refuted.

“Still better than my father,” said Mai.

“Ukano’s superior, on the other hand, is a title I’ll gladly claim,” he agreed. The man had always been too close-minded, too unpleasant, too arrogant, and too sloppy when fighting with his non-dominant hand for Piandao’s taste. The fact that there was genuine debate over which of the two was the better bladesman had always grated on his nerves, and the sheer vindication he felt when Mai proudly declared him the superior teacher was indescribable.

“Pass me the tea leaves, please,” said Zuko, “I think it’s time to add them.”

Piandao did as he asked and untied the bag for the boy before placing it in his outstretched hand. Piandao could see the moment the scent of the tea hit the boy’s nose because Zuko started to tear up a bit.

“Jasmine,” he whispered, weighing the bag thoughtfully, “Uncle’s favorite.”

Hesitantly, the boy poured the tea leaves into the teapot, “How is Uncle?” he asked, not looking up.

“Iroh misses you every moment of the day, Prince Zuko,” Piandao said honestly, “I’ve paid my condolences already, but I have to ask. Why haven’t you written to him?”

“I--I. It’s complicated, master. I’m so scared that he’ll be disappointed in me. He’s always told me to be careful about what I say and to think things through. And then I go and run my mouth in the middle of a war meeting. Father even told me beforehand that I should stay silent, and then I wound up disobeying them both. I just can’t face the anger Uncle will have for me when he finds out what I did, and then finds out I ran away from the consequences.”

“He would be far from angry, Zuko. He could never be mad at you.”

“Even so, it’s better that he stays. If he comes here, he’ll give up so much stuff he loves in Caldera. New tea blends, visits to the Dragon Claw Temple, tsungi horn concerts, Ember Island trips. Uncle deserves a calm life after everything he’s been through. Let him have it.”

“He’s taken up having tea with the Ty Sisters and assisting Princess Azula with her firebending,” Piandao offered.

The prince nodded and relaxed at that statement, “Good. Uncle’s helped me a lot. If Azula’s the crown heir now, then that means she’ll need all the help she can get. It’s a lot to handle, especially at first. I’m happy that she went to Uncle and not some of the ministers that would try to use her like they did me.”

Mai snorted back a laugh, “Sweet Agni. Those were terrible. Remember when you were almost tricked into entering a betrothal contract with Representative Yuka’s daughter.”

Zuko groaned, “Don’t remind me. She’s nearly ten years older than me. It would have been so weird if I ended up marrying her.”

“At least Prince Iroh was able to shut that down in time. Fire Lord Ozai would have just insisted upon you going through with the marriage.”

“Is this what nobles think about all day? Marriage and war?”

“Yes,” said Piandao brazenly. It had taken him so long to get used to the nobility’s mannerisms. Somedays, he just wanted to go back to being the nobody with a sword from Shu Jing, “But don’t worry. You’re not the only one baffled by their choice of discussion topics. Let me tell you about how I almost got myself into a duel because I accidentally sent a neighbor the wrong flowers in the wrong colored vase.”

He dove into the story while his two students continued on about the unmarriable Chouko. Piandao would hunt down Fat, Nobu, and Commander Hideaki later. For now, he let himself be caught up in good tea and good conversation.

Chapter Text

Piandao looks over the young woman standing in front of him as she does the same.

June the Bounty Hunter, as she introduced herself, is a few years younger than Nobu, Lu Ten, and their lot. She’s well-put-together and catches the eye like most bounty hunters, but similarly to other bounty hunters, she has a tangible aura of danger surrounding her. Her shiny black hair is pulled into a clean top knot with the rest of it cascading down her back, and he doesn’t doubt for a second that her covered eye is a statement. One that declares to the world that she doesn’t even need to see to know when an attack is coming and that she can be just as dangerous with her guard down as in the middle of a fight for her life.

Her makeup would have made Lu Ten green with envy on the days he felt more comfortable with skirts and the nickname Tenten. It’s bold and compliments her air of ‘don’t mess with me,’ perfectly. She holds herself with confidence, not flinching away from his gaze in the slightest.

Piandao respects that. He’s met enough cowering sycophants to last him more than a single lifetime.

“So,” she said slowly, “You’re the brats’ swordmaster?”

“I am,” he said, “And you’re the woman that brought them all the way here on a whim?”

“It was a job. The brats’ paid for the service.”

“After they stole from you if I’ve heard the story right. I’m surprised you let them walk away from that. I’ve known much weaker people to demand startling reparations for much lesser slights.”

June shrugged, “I’ve never been one to go after kids. Especially kids like them. You didn’t see them in that alley. A scared and desperate little boy and girl. Once I got closer, I could see the outline of ribs underneath Zuko’s shirt, and that bandage on the burn was worn and filthy. Mai’s hands were covered with calluses and rope burns. They both almost fell asleep on Nyla when they spilled their guts to me about fleeing the Fire Nation. And that was another thing. They didn’t know what information to keep to their chest, and Zuko’s still a shit liar even if Mai has a good poker face. I found out through a combination of guessing the right thing, reading their reactions, and shutting up when they started talking. They wouldn’t have made it another week on their own. So I took their money, agreed to take them here, and taught them what I thought they needed to survive.”

Piandao listened to her words before speaking, “And I and many others could never thank you enough. I’ve known Prince Zuko and Lady Mai for years now. The both of them hold the future of the Fire Nation in their hands, and what you have done for them cannot be called anything less than saving that future. So thank you, June the Bounty Hunter, for keeping the future of our nation bright with possibility and hope.”

“Just June, old man. And you’re welcome. But I’ve got a bone to pick with you.”

“I think I know where this is going.”

“Why, in the ever-loving fuck,” she said venomously, “Did you leave the two of them in the Fire Nation? Do you know how much that place fucked them up? They are both prodigies at every type of weapon I’ve had them try, but they kept dismissing themselves and their skills because they weren’t always perfect all the time. And when they weren’t perfect, it was like they were expecting some, some beating or something. They said you never laid a hand on them, and that’s better than I can say for most of the fuckers who taught the brats, but you’d have to be blind, deaf, and dumber than hog-monkey shit not to see what was going on.”

“And do you think I was ever happy about that?” Piandao asked, “That I was apathetic to their obvious abuse? That I willfully left them in those environments? I am a deserter of the Fire Nation army. The only reason I haven’t been executed is that I had less than two years left on my military contract and because I was too much of a successful propaganda piece to get rid of. I tread an extremely fine line as it is, and ferreting away the crown prince and an heiress would have been the final straw. I would have been stripped of any goodwill I had built up over the years and would have lost not only my reputation, but my resources, estate, and savings as well.”

“A man who values his gold over the lives of children is no man at all!”

“Do you honestly think for a single moment that Zuko and Mai are the only students I’ve helped over the years?”

Piandao continued before June could speak again, “I have been a teacher for over twenty years. They are not the only mistreated children I’ve come across, and they won’t be the last. I’ve long since recognized when I have the power to intervene, and when intervening would mean even worse repercussions falling onto the heads of the children in question. Sometimes the only thing I can do is offer a safe place for my students to escape, and keep my doors open to those who need it. Sometimes it isn’t enough. But I must continue to do what I can for as many as I can, or else all will be lost.”

“And besides,” he finished, “It’s extremely hard to help those who don’t even realize they need it. Zuko and Mai don’t even comprehend that they’ve been wronged by their parents and their teachers. Zuko thinks what his father did to him in that farce of a duel was justified. Mai thinks that if she were just well-behaved enough and silent enough and perfect enough, her parents would give her the love she deserves. They won’t properly acknowledge the mistreatment until years down the line if they ever do so at all.”

“You can’t put out a fire if you don’t even know you’re getting burned,” said June quietly, “My dad used to say that sometimes. He’s usually talking about getting screwed over when it comes to accepting jobs for minuscule pay because the employers weren’t honest, but it sounds like the sentiment works here.”

“That it does.”

There was a moment of awkward silence before June finally spoke again, “Did you teach Zuko how to dual-wield dao swords?”

“I did,” said Piandao, “They’re his best weapons.”

“How did you get his movements so fluid? I’ve seen masters with choppier forms.”

“The trick is to see the swords as two parts as the same whole. Instead of starting Zuko off with one sword, I had him learn with two.”

“So that way he could get used to the movements much more quickly.”

“Also because then he wouldn’t have to unlearn poor habits that he’d pick up from using a single sword. Transitioning from two to one is much easier than going from one to two. In fact, if you could show me to the training grounds, I could demonstrate the common mistakes others usually make when they….”

*****

“Jia, chill. The silver fox ain’t here to steal your girl.”

Shut up, Satoshi. Just look at them! June’s laughing!

“So? She laughs when you tell jokes?”

Not this often, she doesn’t! Shit, he’s got hot dad energy. Hot dad energy meshes with hot mom energy so well.

“I said chill. They just met today, and you weren’t there for their initial meeting. June may be laughing now, but she was angry as a charging komodo rhino earlier. You’ve got nothing to worry about.”

Jiaying whimpered as Piandao corrected June’s dual dao form. If she wanted to get the girl, she’d have to step up her game. 

Maybe it was time she approached the kids for help.

*****

That night after a nice dinner in the mess hall with Zuko, Mai, and the unit, Piandao and Fat walked into Commander Hideaki’s office. He was alone, save for Tamotsu and Master Raiden, who were sitting around a small, empty tea table in the middle of the room instead of at the commander’s desk. Piandao followed suit and sat in an empty armchair. Fat took his place on a sofa away from the table.

Master Raiden turned towards Commander Hideaki as he started to sign, “Please excuse the need for a translator. Raiden holds my every confidence and will keep everything we discuss here a secret.”

“It is no problem, Commander,” said Tamotsu easily, “We understand your loyalty to your vows.”

“Indeed,” said Piandao, “I know we must discuss my tenure here as a master if said tenure will even come to pass. But there is something I need to ask first.”

Fat stood from the sofa and unfolded the Pai Sho board he brought with him, “Will you play a game with me, Commander?”

The man shared a look with Raiden before nodding. Fat laid the board down on the tea table, and the pieces were split between Piandao and Hideaki, “I’ll concede the first move to you.”

Commander Hideaki nodded and gingerly picked up a knotweed tile. He placed it in the position one spot away from the middle and acknowledged Piandao’s turn.

“Hm. It seems your piece craves balance, Commander. Is it balance you seek?”

“Yes, but balance comes with what? Philosophy,” Master Raiden translated as Commander Hideaki laid down a wheel piece next to the knotweed tile, “Beauty,” the next piece, a boat, was played, “And truth,” the commander laid down the final piece in the circle, a stone token.

“And balance you shall find,” Piandao placed his first and only piece on the board, dropping the white lotus tile in the very center of both the board and the Commander’s circle of pieces, “Does the game speak for both player and translator?”

“It does,” said Master Raiden, turning back towards him and away from his clan head, “Neither of us will swear for our clansmen, but we swear ourselves. That colonel of yours makes some compelling arguments, even if he is a bit young to be leading a revolution.”

“I lead nothing but my unit, master,” said Tamotsu easily, “All I do is point out obvious facts as needed. Including how the order and this clan can mutually benefit from aligning themselves.”

Commander Hideaki rapped the table to gain their attention and began to sign once more, “Obvious or not, we needed them brought to our attention. If the current regime ends this war on their terms, our clan will only suffer for it. We’ll lose at least a fifth of our clansmen to earthbender and Earth Kingdom purges, and our clan’s culture as a whole would be gutted. It’s in our best interests to do what we can now before it’s too late to protect ourselves from annihilation.”

“It also helps that the prince is one of the newest clan members to be,” said Tamotsu easily.

“There is still more to discuss. Tamotsu. You said you’ve written to the Grand Lotus of Air. Has he responded at all?”

Tamotsu frowned, “He’s stayed silent. I sent my letter the same day as Nobu, and through faster channels as well. He should have received it and sent a response at the very least.”

“His silence says one of two things: either he failed to receive the letter, or he is in no position to make a move at this time. Knowing his actions in court before I left, I’d bet a rather large amount on the latter. If this is true, then we must reach out to others to help Prince Zuko finish his education.”

“I’ve got firebending covered,” said Master Raiden, “He’s moving through the final forms pretty quickly, though I’d urge him to practice each one until he can do them without thinking.”

“Tatsuya’s going to teach him the Reborn Dragon forms when he’s ready,” Tamotsu offered, “I’ve got politics, and you can cover the philosophy of other elements.”

“He’d still need the philosophy of firebending itself,” said Piandao, “That’ll need either the Grand Lotus of Air or the Grand Lotus of Fire to complete. It takes a firebending master to teach another firebender.”

There was another rap on the table and Master Raiden translated once more, “Invite them here. If the boy changes his views or, Agni protect him, has a Revelation Fever, I’d rather it take place here where we can help him through it.”

“I’ll write the Grand Lotus of Fire and breach his opinion on the matter,” he promised, “And how long shall I stay at Pohuai?”

“How long do you need?”

Piandao hummed and thought, “As much as I’d like to stay, I cannot abandon Shu Jing. I’ve much work to do there as both a teacher and an in with the nation’s nobility.”

“Could you stay through the winter?”

“That would be more than doable,” Piandao reached into his robe and pulled out two white lotus tiles, “I’ll leave you, Apprentice of the Mountain of Many Reeds and Apprentice of Mountain Storms. Welcome to the Order of the White Lotus.”

Chapter Text

Zuko and Mai are almost done eating their breakfast when Jiaying sits down across from them with a polite smile and a dragged-along Satoshi to translate for her.

“Good morning,” says Zuko politely, pushing his empty bowl of miso soup away from him.

Good morning, Jia signed. They had learned a few basic words and phrases of the Yuyan signing language, and so didn’t need Satoshi’s translations until Jia moved onto her next phrase, which had a few different signs that the pair had yet to learn.

“She’s asking how archery practice’s been since yesterday. She saw Nobu and that teacher of yours giving you advice.”

“Archery’s fine,” said Mai, “Master Piandao mostly gave us general advice, since archery isn’t his strongest suit. Nobu is going to supervise us until we need a Yuyan teacher.”

“Sounds good,” Satoshi translated for Jia, “What’s June been teaching you?”

“June still spars with us and gives us exercises to learn for poisons and general survival skills,” said Zuko.

Mai nodded, “I’ve got a new paralytic to coat some of my knives in.”

“Sounds good. Will you be having lessons with her today?”

“No. June’s with Kou going over how to treat injuries and make medicine on the road.”

So she won’t be with you today?

“No,” said Mai, “Why?”

Jiaying and Satoshi exchanged a glance before Jia signed out, I need your help.

“What’s wrong?” asked Zuko.

“Nothing’s wrong, kid. Unless you think Jia’s useless pining is a problem.”

“What is it, if not a problem?” asked Mai.

“The best source of entertainment I’ve had in months,” said Satoshi. Jia slapped him on the arm and started signing again, “She wants to know what she should get your mom for a courting gift.”

“She’s not our mom!” Mai and Zuko said simultaneously.

“Fine, she wants to know what to get your guardian as a courting gift.”

Zuko turned his head to the side in confusion, “Why?”

“Why what?”

“Why does she want to court June?”

Because she’s pretty and fierce and I want her thighs to-- Jia signed on for a bit, but Zuko lost track of what she was saying as she started using different signs that he didn’t know the meaning of.

Mai saw his lingering confusion and spoke up, “It’s like in ‘The Tale of the Tolling Bell’ when Judge Yori falls in love with Arai the Dancer, but Jiaying wants to marry June without dying in her arms.”

Zuko’s eyes lit up in understanding, “Ohhhhhh. That makes sense. Get her something practical.”

Jia gave him a confused look, and he continued, “Courting gifts are kind of stupid when they’re super extravagant. I remember Lu Ten going on tangents for weeks after one of the mining clans gave him a gem-encrusted golden sword.”

“In your cousin’s defense, it was an extremely impractical weapon,” said Mai, “I know we were too young to exchange courting gifts, but I would have had my parents call the whole thing off if you gave me something as useless as a shiny weapon that I couldn’t even stab people with.”

Zuko nodded sagely, “Flowers and food are definitely the way to go. They show that you care, but they’re also either eaten immediately or thrown out after a week. Less clutter and if they’re memorable enough, then they make a good impression.”

Mai signed, “I wish everyone did courting the same way the Onta clan did.”

“What does the Onta clan do, exactly?” asked Satoshi, for both his and Jiaying’s benefit.

“The Ontas are another warrior clan like the Yuyan. If someone wants to marry into the clan, then they have to defeat their future spouse in a duel of their choice.”

“Nothing’s more romantic than knowing your spouse can match you blow for blow on the battlefield,” Zuko agreed.

Yeah, Jia agreed, mind wandering to the first time June pinned her in a hand-to-hand spar. She must have been blushing crimson for weeks after that.

“Okay, you three’s stupid fighting kink aside,” said Satoshi, “That still leaves us with a problem. Jia can’t cook or bake for shit, and it’s the very beginning of fall. There aren’t any flowers blooming this time of year that won’t be used for medicine or poisons. And if we diminish the Herbalist and the healers’ medicine supply, then the weird cat spirit that hangs around the Herbalist’s home will be the least of our worries.”

“Well, you’re an archer, aren’t you?” Mai asked, “Just go out and shoot Nyla some dinner. June loves her shirshu more than anything else in the world. If you show her you care about Nyla, that’s practically saying you care about June.”

What do shirshus eat, exactly?

*****

“Boar-q-pine! I can’t believe we’re out here hunting one of the most dangerous animals on the continent just because Jia’s got a lady boner for the hot bounty hunter.”

No one’s making you stay, signed Kamiko as she trudged through the thick underbrush, You don’t need to be here. You could just turn around and leave Jia to here search for, as you’ve so eloquently put it for the last five minutes, “fucking boar-q-pine.”

“I’m here to talk you two suicidal idiots out of this. The kids said that shirshus are omnivores. We can find Nyla some hay, or some groundhog-squirrels, or literally any woodland creature except for the one that’s going to maul us to death!”

But no small woodland creatures are going to impress June, Jia retorted, It’s boar-q-pine or nothing.

“Why are you so obsessed with making some grand gesture all of a sudden? You were just fine with taking things at a natural pace the other day.”

That’s before he showed up.

“For the last time, the silver-fox swordsman isn’t going to steal June from you.”

Are you sure about that? Kamiko put in teasingly, They seemed awfully comfortable last night when they were gushing about the kids.

Satoshi pointed his finger at her, “Don’t you add fuel to the fire. Or do you want me to remind you of the time you almost put an arrow through my eye trying to impress Shouto?”

Kamiko gave Satoshi a string of extremely vulgar and explicit signs before being cut off by the sound of quiet rustling coming from somewhere in the underbrush. Jiaying gave the sign to keep silent and approach slowly. The party of three cautiously approached a bush of raspberry brambles that something was moving in. Jia, reaching it first, slowly moved the branches away to reveal half a dozen boar-q-pine piglets.

Jiaying threw her hands in the air and started to jump around in victory. She kept mouthing the words, ‘yes, yes, yes!’ to herself silently, careful not to scare the piglets away. 

Kamiko shot a glare towards Satoshi and smugly signed, Yes, the eight-pound babies are going to kill us. I’m shaking in terror.

“Yeah, yeah. Laugh it up,” said Satoshi with a roll of his eyes, “Now let’s get the bacon and go. I’m not missing dinner just because you two wanted to play hunter queens of the mountain.”

Should we kill them here, or wait to do it at home? asked Jia, who had stopped jumping around and pumping her fists, but still had a beaming smile across her face.

Let’s bring them home. Let them get a bit bigger and get some actual meat on their bones before we bring them to the butcher, Kamiko stopped in her explanation, amused smirk melting into a pondering look.

“What is it?” asked Satoshi.

Just kind of weird that the piglets are alone, Kamiko explained, They look small enough to still be suckling, so….where’s their mother?

An ear-piercing squeal echoed throughout the forest. The three turned towards the sound to see a colossal boar-q-pine sow barreling towards them. The sow’s blood-red eyes were pinned on them as it charged at Jia, who was closest to the piglets. The sow reared its tusks towards Jia, who hastily dodged them, only to get punctured by a few loose boar-q-pine’s quills that were flying off the sow.

“Shit, shit, shit, shit,” said Satoshi, “Run!”

Satoshi, Kamiko, and Jia ran for it, enraged sow in pursuit.

*****

“And now that the quills are out, we have to check for any major internal damage,” said the healer that was explaining to Kou how to patch up a boar-q-pine injury, “We have to make sure that the wounds are clean and that no major nerves of muscles were pulled out of place. The barbs that are attached to the quills expand with heat, meaning that they may have expanded with the victims’ body heat.”

“I’m never going hunting again,” said Satoshi with a groan, tuning out the healer’s explanations to the boy, “Give me wrenches and machines any day. I utterly refuse to ever go near any of those evil spirits in disguise again.”

Jiaying and Kamiko groaned in agreement, shuddering a bit at the reminder of what happened after the sow had chased them off.

When it became painfully clear that the boar-q-pine was not going to be outrun, they had climbed up a tree in the middle of the woods in the hopes of waiting it out. They had relaxed for all of a minute, confident that they were safe, as they knew that pig chickens and moo-sows couldn’t climb trees.

Well apparently, boar-q-pines could.

Thus had started a long, tiring process of running as far and as fast as they could, climbing up trees when the sow would catch up to them, and then dropping down from the trees as soon as the boar-q-pine sow was a little more than halfway up.

By the time the sow had decided to show them mercy and stopped pursuing them in favor of returning to its piglets, all three of them had resembled living, breathing pincushions full of quills. They were lucky to have been so close to Pohuai and could receive treatment immediately, instead of walking much further with the quills in their backs, arms, and legs.

Never again, Kamiko signed in agreement, wincing as her sore arms were forced to move, We’re never going to live this down as is.

Once it became obvious that all three of them were going to survive intact with no permanent injuries, Commander Hideaki had given them a lecture on bull-headed stupidity and when to use their common sense and tell their friends not to do stupid things. The man had then given his daughter an even longer lecture about proper courting gifts, and how there was a reason that people only ever hunted boar-q-pines in large hunting parties.

Look on the plus side, Jia offered, Dad isn’t going to punish us for this.

“Yeah, because he said our two weeks’ worth of bed rest and the teasing from the rest of the clan is going to be punishment enough.”

There was a knock on the healing hall door, and the three patients looked up to see June standing there with a vase of pink, red, and white flowers. She walked over to them and sat at the foot of Jia’s bed, “Heard you had an interesting morning.”

“Interesting is one way to put it,” said Satoshi while Jia just blushed. Kamiko’s arms were being examined and rewrapped by Kou, so she was essentially gagged for the time being.

“I also heard from my apprentices that the only reason you did that was for little ol’ me. Well, little ol’ me and my Nyla.”

Jiaying sheepishly nodded, blushing, even more, when June just laughed, “Well, I can’t say I have a whole lot of experience with this whole ‘courting’ deal, but the kids said that flowers made a good first gift.”

With that, she gently set the vase of flowers on Jia’s bedside table, “I’m no expert on flower language, but Zuko said orchids meant love and beauty, and Mai said pink camellias were a confession of romantic love. So, I’ve got some red orchids and pink camellias for the beautiful archer I think can one day steal by heart for good.”

Satoshi looked away from his friend and her bounty hunter, wishing desperately that he was anywhere but here. Jia just blushed harder and harder as June laughed at her reaction.

“See you around, Jia. I’ll be taking a few bounties in the area and won’t be around for a week or so. By the time I get back, maybe you’ll have a response ready for me. Just no boar-q-pine, ‘kay?”

Chapter Text

June tied her bag securely on Nyla’s saddle and scratched him behind his ears, “You poor baby. Probably going stir crazy stuck in here with all of those big, bad, conflicting smells. Don’t you worry. We’ll get you some fresh air and some exercise soon enough.”

She hummed a bit and thought about her plans from here. The Yuyan had set her up nicely with everything she could possibly want: provisions, money, new clothes, a place to crash for the night that wasn’t a run-down tavern or a rocky campground. If she was a bit more world-weary or a bit more willing to let domesticity sink its claws into her, settling down at Pohuai with its consistent meals and safe walls and good company would have been very, very appealing. But as it was, June still had that thirst for adventure. That bone-deep need to get out and see what was out there. The pride and stubbornness people got when they learned to rely upon nothing but themselves, and that even more stubborn refusal to ever give that independence up.

There might be a time years down the road when she’d finally grow tired of it all. When she’d finally get one injury too big and decide that the rush she got from a good hunt wasn’t worth her life, and she’d come back to Pohuai for good. But for now, she was more than content with leaving Jia a blushing mess in the infirmary and the promise of seeing this place and the people in it later.

“I’ll be back in two weeks unless you hear differently,” said June as she looked down at her apprentices and the small party that was there to see her off, “It’ll just be a quick trip around the area looking for jobs. I won’t take anything too long term unless there are no other jobs, but I doubt that’ll be the case. I’ll try and send a letter a week in, but don’t worry if you don’t get one. It’ll be even odds on whether or not I can find a good messenger hawk for rent that’ll know their way here.”

Zuko gave her an ‘okay’, while Mai just nodded. She stepped away from her shirshu and held out her arms, “And finally, get in here you brats.”

Mai and Zuko hesitantly stepped forward, before Zuko threw himself into her arms once he understood she wouldn’t be pulling away. Mai followed suit, and they held the hug for a few moments.

“Remember to keep up with your lessons until I get back,” June said into Zuko and Mai’s hair, “If you both aren’t hitting bullseyes at twenty yards, I’ll have you running laps around the base until you puke.”

Her apprentices pulled away and walked back to stand by their friend, “Keep the two of them alive. They’ll both overwork themselves to death if you don’t keep an eye on them.” She ruffled Kou’s hair and then turned her gaze on Piandao.

“I’ll look out for them, don’t you worry.”

“You better. Or else I’ll use some of those handy tricks you showed me and make you regret it,” June said coldly, though there was barely any bite in her words. The teacher had turned out to be alright, as far as crotchety old men go. The fact that he hadn’t once eyed her up like a slab of meat, patronized her over her fighting skills, or gave her a condescending smile and asked when she would finally settle down and have kids probably helped more than she’d like to admit.

She put her foot in the stirrup and pulled herself up into the saddle, “See you soon. Let’s go, boy.”

June snapped the reins, giving one last wave over her shoulder as she set off towards the walls. She nodded to the guards monitoring the flow of people in and out of the base, and went through one, two, three doors before she was off in the open. Keeping Nyla at a slow walk, June thought over her options.

She had been occupied at Pohuai for a while, first with helping Mai and Zuko get to the Yuyan, then escorting them to save the forty-first, then helping them get settled at Pohuai. She hadn’t had any big, noticeable jobs in a little over three months. If she wanted to keep her reputation as one of the best bounty hunters on the continent, she’d have to pick up something flashy that she could boast about later.

“Kuashi shouldn’t be too hard of a ride,” said June to herself, “That’s a little less than a day if I keep the pace consistent. I would arrive right when the taverns start serving their late-night rush and suss out some work there.”

Mind made up, she snapped the reins again, urging Nyla into a trot. Kuashi it was.

*****

June showed her Fire Nation papers to the soldiers patrolling the road leading into Kuashi. They gave it a quick once-over and then waved her through.

She entered Kuashi and led Nyla to a promising tavern with golden light and loud music rushing out of the windows. However, it was a bit hard to maneuver with the crowded streets packed with the filthy, blackened figures of the miners.

Kuashi was one of the first colonies conquered by the Fire Nation. It had been targeted by Fire Lord Sozin because of its rich, vast coal mines that were used to fuel the advanced tech of the firebenders used to combat the Earth Kingdom armies. To date, it supplied nearly a third of the coal needed to keep the Fire Nation steamboats and tanks going. But if they wanted a lot of coal, that meant they needed a lot of miners.

June must have just arrived as the night shift was getting out. She saw dozens of large, muscled men covered in coal dust milling about and dragging themselves home. She swore that the inky black dust drifting off of them nearly darkened out the vibrant sun that was sinking down behind her.

A myriad of bustling miners crossing the street in front of her forced June to a halt. Right when she was about to lose her patience and order Nyla to jump the tiresome workers, June felt the tell-tale soft touch of a pick-pocket brush against her leg.

With practice ease, she threw out her whip, which quickly wrapped around the offending outstretched arm. She heard a small, high ‘eep’ of surprise, and she blinked down at the tiny figure below her.

The kid was covered head-to-toe in coal dust. Their clothes were raggedy and filled with tears and holes. Their hair was matted with filth and grime and stuck out every which way. The large, emerald eyes that stuck out of a too gaunt face looked up at her in fright. The longer June stared down at them, the more fear started to show on their face, and they began to tremble where they stood.

“I’m sorry, I’m sorry, I’m sorry, I’m sorry,” they blabbered, tugging on June’s whip, trying to free themselves. It was no use, however, as their bone-thin arm stood no chance against the quality leather of her whip.

“Sweet spirits, when was the last time you ate?” June asked, loosening her whip and letting the child free. They stumbled back and fell into the dirt road below, breathing hard as they cradled their arm to their chest.

June would later blame Zuko, Mai, and the entirety of the Yuyan clan for making her go soft for scared and scarred kids, but she didn’t think for a second before pulling out her purse and tossing the kid a gold coin, “Get yourself some food. And if you want to ditch this town and wind up someplace better, meet me at the city gates on the night of the full moon. I know a safe place that won’t ask questions and will give shelter to any kid who wants it.”

The child hesitated for a moment before clenching their fist around the gold coin and sprinting off in the opposite direction, occasionally giving June a look over their shoulder, waiting for her to chase them down, or call the soldiers after a thief.

June, for her part, just sat there and watched until the child was out of sight and made her way to the inn. She tied Nyla to a post, and secured her purse to her belts, making sure that they wouldn’t be lost or stolen throughout the night.

She then swaggered confidently into the tavern and ordered a drink. She sat back and drank, letting her ears adjust to the uproar of the bar. Eyeing up a small crowd of arm wrestlers in the corner, she watched and waited as two muscular men (miners either clean from the morning shift, or waiting until they had to join the night shift, no doubt) were doing their damndest to force the other’s hand to the table. When one finally pinned the other, forcing the loser’s hand to hit the table with a ‘bang,’ June gulped down the rest of her drink, stood, smirked, and strutted over to the arm wrestlers.

“Hello boys,” she purred, placing down a bet of five silver pieces to match the others at the table, “Room for one more?”

*****

After flushing the miners out of a few days’ worth of salaries, June is finally approached by a potential client.

“Excuse me,” asked a high, nasally voice that June desperately wanted to ignore, if only so that they wouldn’t continue talking to her.

“Yes?” she asked instead, turning to the source of the voice and flashing a smile when she saw that the voice belonged to a person cleaner, fatter, and better groomed than anyone else she’d seen so far that day. Perfect. If he could afford to look like that, June could afford to charge him extra without getting called out for it.

“I am Yu Weizhe. I have heard you specialize in finding anyone, no matter how hard they try to hide.”

“That I do,” said June, keeping her polite smile on her face, “Is there anyone, in particular, you need me to find?”

Yu’s eyes darted around shiftily before landing back on her, “Is there perhaps a different place we could discuss this? The matter is a bit….delicute.”

“I think this tavern has private rooms. We could talk there if that’d be better.”

“That would be acceptable. Waiter, get me a tea room. Miss June and I need to speak privately.”

June stood up from the table and walked after the man. She was led down a narrow hallway, and into a tight room that may have been a broom closet not too long ago. The waiter that escorted them bowed and closed the door tightly behind him.

“Who am I looking for?” asked June easily once it was clear that the client wasn’t going to start talking.

The man huffed and passed over an impressive sketch of a young lady, “My daughter has run away from home. I demand that you return her to me. I will pay you ten gold coins upon the completion of the job.”

June laughed in the man’s face, “Buddy, I don’t know what world you’re living in, but I don’t do jobs like these for ten gold coins. My usual rate is fifty, with half of it paid up front.”

Yu Weizhe gasped in horror, “That is highway robbery! Other bounty hunters would do the job for half the price.”

“Well, other bounty hunters ain’t me. If you want a subpar completed job, go to these other bounty hunters and hire them. And besides, your girl looks to be older than sixteen. If she ran, and I hunted her down and returned her to you, that’d be kidnapping, not bounty hunting,” said June. While she was, technically, bumping up her price a bit, she was speaking the truth about her usual prices being much higher. This man, who she would confidently say could afford the extra charge, clearly didn’t respect his adult daughter’s wishes and didn’t deserve that hoarded gold, “If I take this job, I want fifty.”

“Fine,” said Yu, “Will you need anything else from me?”

“Something that belonged to your daughter for one,” said June. The man, for all his haggling about the price, obviously came prepared and passed over a bag of silk clothes before she had even finished, “And I need to know why your daughter split and ran.”

“That’s hardly any of your business,” said the man, “She’s just being difficult about accepting a hard truth.”

“Mhmm. Well, then just give me half my payment now, and I’ll be on my way.”

“How will I know you won’t just take off with the money?”

“How do I know you won’t refuse to pay me once the job is done?” shot back June, “Just give me the money, and I’ll be on my way to find your daughter.”

The man glowered, but pulled out a coin purse and started counting out coins, “Here, then. And don’t expect a copper more until you return with my daughter in perfect health.”

“Pleasure doing business with you,” said June, shoveling the coins into her own purse before leaving.

June pulled out a red silk dudou and held it in front of Nyla’s nose, “Screw that fucking cheap stake,” thought June, “I’ll find the girl and hear out her reasons for running. And if I like her arguments enough, I might just do what that bastard suggested and cut out with the twenty-five gold pieces without finishing the job.”

Once Nyla caught the scent and started getting antsy to chase after it, she untied him and hopped on the saddle. Looked like she had some searching to do.

Chapter Text

After five days and nights of near-constant riding, Nyla finally starts to hone in on the scent of the client’s daughter near the base of the Moonlit Mountains. The mountains, which span from the heart of the Gaoling region to the Ba Sing Se Channel, are over a thousand miles from Kuashi. If June hadn’t lucked out and found an (only somewhat) shady ferry to take her and Nyla a good chunk of the way there by water, they would have never been able to return to Pohuai in time.

Whoever this runaway is, they certainly didn’t want to be found.

Nyla follows the trail away from the small farming village at the mountain base, and towards a long-overgrown trail leading into the heart of the peaks. He starts with a grunt and a steady trot, while June just watches on in confusion.

“Okay, this is getting weird.” June cracked her whip to order Nyla to a standstill before he stepped on a pile of unbalanced rocks. She dismounted and walked in front of the shirshu, “There’s no civilization for miles. What in the world would a prissy little noble’s daughter be doing out here?”

Nyla pulled against the reins and towards the side of an upcoming cliff face jutting out of the mountain. June turned towards it and saw the sheer face with the yards of honeysuckle-ivy growing up the rocks. Curious, she slowly approached and touched her hand against the side.

“Did she bend herself a shelter into the mountain? No, her father said she was a nonbender. A secret door, maybe?” June walked down the side of the mountain, keeping her hands against the rock searching for an oddity in the stone. Suddenly, she felt nothing but open air along the side of the cliff. She dropped Nyla’s reins and grabbed two fistfuls of honeysuckle-ivy. With a stretch, she threw them aside like a pair of curtains and was met with a wide, circular tunnel leading deep into the mountain.

“Found you,” she said with a smirk. She hopped back onto Nyla and guided him into the dark. Nyla picked up the scent again and professionally brought her down, sinking and rising through the tunnels, turning left and right, until the dark tunnels started to illuminate with small candle places carved into the wall. 

The cave brightened even more as she went deeper and deeper until she came to a stop at a line of people.

A man in an olive green getup walked up to her and held up a hand, “No non-service animals in the arena.”

“Arena?” June asked.

“Earth Rumble III and its sponsors do not allow non-service animals into the wrestling arena and adjoined seating as they could disrupt the rest of the audience. You will, however, be able to leave your animal companion at our provided animal daycare for the extra cost of one silver piece . Of course, if you purchase a Platinum Ticket, all animal care will be paid for in full.”

“Look, buddy, I’m just here on a job. Nyla’s nose says that my target is somewhere in there. Just let me in, and the both of us will be out of your hair in a jiffy.”

“I’m sorry, but I simply can’t let you in without buying a ticket. If the price is too steep, our front row seats are three copper pieces, and our nosebleed sections are five. Now, if you want a complimentary beverage and pretzel, then our Silver Ticket is a single silver piece--”

“What package is going to give me full access to the joint so I can get in, find the client quickly, and then get out?” June asked in frustration.

“That would be our Platinum Ticket with the additional purchase of an exclusive backstage pass--”

“How much?”

“Five silver pieces.”

“Done,” she grabbed her purse and tossed the coins to the man, “Not get out of my way. I’ve got a job to do.”

“Ma’am, I must insist that you wait in line and purchase your ticket from the proper sales representative--”

“Hey sweetheart,” June yelled at the ticket girl as she hopped off of Nyla and sent him towards the stable-shaped area carved into the side of the cave, “I gave the windbag my money! Can I have my Platinum whatever?”

“Yeah, sure,” the bored teen said, tossing a black braided leather bracelet and a cord of tied hemp with a string of beads to June, “Just be sure to wear these if you want to get wherever.”

“Thanks!” she called over her shoulder, shouldering past the other buyers and into the cave.

The shorter tunnel opened up into a grand, open arena. All along the walls of the cave were rows and rows of seats, most of which were half full. In the middle was a large, rectangular field with lines carved into the stone and earthbenders mulishly moving around boulders.

“Huh. Wonder why the front row is cheaper than the nosebleed section.” As soon as the words left her mouth, a cry of ‘get down!’ came from behind her. June dove to the ground in an instant, just to look up and see a boulder fly right where her head had been a few moments before.

“Huh. That’s why.”

June stood up and brushed herself off. Reaching into her pocket, she felt around for the sketch the client had given her and examined it carefully. She looked at the large arena that was quickly filling to mass capacity and sighed to herself. 

This was going to be a mess.

*****

After an hour of searching, June had done nothing but proved herself right.

Wading between bleachers and stepping on people’s feet made for slow-moving. She had stepped on countless toes, squeezed by who knows how many audience members, asked just as many if they’d seen her target, and annoyed quite a few people to death.

“Fuck this, fuck the client, and fuck the people who wouldn’t let me bring in Nyla,” she whispered to herself, “I’ve got two more places to check, and if she’s not there, I am grabbing some food and waiting outside the mountain with the shirshu.”

Although breaking into the private boxes of the hoity-toity wealthy fans sounded like fun, June decided that it would be quicker and easier to check the betting booths before she started kicking down the doors to the private boxes. She wandered over to that general direction and peeled her eyes for any sign of the target all the while.

After climbing up the steep steps leading to the upper floors, and circling her way around to where they had the betting tables set up, June finally laid eyes on the girl.

She double-checked with the sketch real quick, and yep, that was the same bone structure and the same beauty mark near the corner of her eye. She didn’t even care if this was the right girl or not; she just wanted to get the fuck out of here.

“Yu Peizhi, you’re coming with me,” June said, stepping forward and picking up the girl.

“Hey! Let me place my bet!”

“No can do. I’m on a schedule, and we’ve got to get back to Kuashi.”

“Get back to Kua-- did my father send you?”

“Yep. And I have dealt with enough tonight to not want to ever come back here again. You’ve got until we hit the ticket line to convince me to let you go.”

“That’s a little out of place for my father’s cronies,” Peizhi said disbelievingly.

June snorted, “I’m nobody’s cronie. I’m just a bounty hunter on the job. Now start talking. Why’d you run?”

Peizhi sniffed, “My father,” she spat his name like venom, “Is dirtier than the coal miners he forces down the shafts. He’s been stealing coal from the nation, mistreating workers, and embezzling money.”

“And that’s supposed to be my problem?” June asked condescendingly, although she did jot down a mental note to poke somebody high up in the Yuyan who would care about this sort of thing.

“As a fellow citizen of the Fire Nation, it should be,” the girl in her arms huffed, “There’s no way for me to make any respectable money in the Fire Nation, but the land we will soon conquer as our own has a bit more….looser morals. Therefore I acquired the amount of money my father set aside for my dowry and came here to see if I could expand that amount.”

June raised an eyebrow, “You stole money from your dad and want to double it on earthbending bets.”

The girl huffed and looked away, “Crudely put, but essentially true. I just need to gain the coin I need to file the court forms against my father, and then I’ll be able to take over Kuashi and treat our people properly.”

June mulled that over in her mind and shrugged. Sounded reasonable enough. And she already disliked the oily weasel who hired her to hunt down his technically adult daughter. Sounded like the girl was a better choice anyway. At the very least, if she promised to pay, then June thought there was a higher chance of getting her money.  “Alrighty then. Pay me the rest of what your father promised me, and I’ll escort you back home.”

The girl looked at her suspiciously, “Is that so?”

June nodded, “Swear it. Won’t go squealing to your dad or anything, hunter’s honor.”

With a hint of distrust, Peizhi agreed, “Then place me down and allow me to make my bets. The fights start in fifteen minutes, and I won’t be able to make any once they do.”

“Sure thing.”

“My thanks,” the girl said, as June set her down, “Now return me to the betting booth. I need to ensure that my turtleducks are all in a row.”

They walked back to the booth as June examined the fighting bracket, “Who’re you betting on?”

“The Boulder is the favorite to win. He’ll be the safest option.”

“Yes, but not the richest. Look at his placement,” June pointed to where The Boulder was at the one seed on the bracket, “That’s a safe bet, yes, but the odds are skewed in his favor. You’ll hardly make any money off of him.”

“Should I go for one of the worse ones then?” Peizhi asked, nodding at Avalanche, the bender in the lowest seed placement, “The odds would be less in their favor, and I’ll win more if they do.”

“No. If they’re ranked that lowly, then they’re probably there for a reason,” June said, “And besides, they’re up against The Boulder first. You need to find a balance. Someone who holds promise, but who people wouldn’t usually think of when they imagine the champion. And preferably someone who can fight a few good fights. They don’t need to win the whole thing, but they should go a decent amount or win a few upsets if you want to see any real cash. Are there any first-time fighters?”

“The legend in the corner says that all break-out fighters are printed in red ink, while the experienced ones are in black.” 

The pair scrutinized the bracket for a bit before June pointed at the nineteen seed, “There. Break-out bender is up against the Mountain Guide. It’ll be an upset, but I think it’s plausible that they’ll beat him. If they can keep that momentum going, they’ll be good until at least the last eight benders. Just enough to get you the money you need.”

“Are you positive?” Peizhi asked.

“I think it’s the best you can do with knowing nothing about this Earth Rumble thing.”

“Okay then.” Peizhi walked up to the betting booth and carefully laid her bags of stolen money on the counter. She slid them under the broker’s slot and met their eyes, “I’m putting all my money on the Blind Bandit.”

Chapter Text

Peizhi and June find seats in the front row and hunker down to watch the fight. The first four or so rows of seats are mostly empty, save for a few people like June who decide that a good view and extremely cheap cost is worth the gamble. She does, however, side-eye the group of three bulky men that are sitting front and center in the first row. They’re close enough to reach out and touch the ring and are loudly proclaiming to some girl they know in row six about how she should come up and sit with them.

“Don’t be a downer, Suzu. There’s plenty of room.”

“It’s not the room I’m worried about,” huffs the girl who, from what June can guess, must be around her age, “It’s the out-of-control flying boulders that’ll crush you to death.”

“Ahhh, we’re benders, we’ll protect you.”

“If you had the reaction time necessary to ‘protect’ me, you’d be in the ring making extra money, not out of it watching the show. I’m a bored girl looking for a night of entertainment, not suicidal.”

Peizhi leaned up to whisper to June, “I agree with the woman. Spirits know there are enough meat-heads in the world to fill Kuashi five times over.”

“Do you want to move back?” June asked.

Peizhi shook her head, “No, I feel safe enough. And besides, the show’s about to start.”

Sure enough, a tan man with black hair made his way to the center of the ring. He raised his arms to silence the crowd, and then started to speak, “Ladies and gentlemen, boys and girls, earthbending fanatics everywhere, welcome to. EARTH. RUMBLE. THREE!”

The crowd cheered wildly for a bit until the man raised his arms again and spoke once more, “I’m your host, Xin Fu. The rules here are simple: just knock your opponent out of the ring. Any deadly injuries to other competitors will result in an automatic disqualification and banishment from this and any future Earth Rumbles. Anything else? Fair game! Now let’s get started!”

More cheers went up as some firebenders hidden somewhere snuffed out every candle and lantern save for the ones illuminating the stage. Xin Fu bent himself a stone pillar and started to slowly move out of bounds, “In this corner, he’s lean, he’s mean, and he’ll shake down anyone in his way, it’s THE AVALANCHE!”

A man in a dull gray hopped up on stage and tried to wind up the crowd to little effect. While he was failing to get watchers to shout out his name, Xin Fu continued with his announcements, “And in this corner, a man who needs no introduction, but I’ll give him one anyway. The earthbender who could grind you into a pulp and then eat you for breakfast, your reigning champion: THE BOOOUUULLLDDDEEERRR!!!!!!”

June had to quickly slap her hands over her ears to muffle the deafening cry of the audience. It took no prompting from the bender to get every person on their feet and screaming themselves hoarse as a shirtless man slowly walked into the ring.

“THE BOULDER WOULD LIKE TO THANK ALL OF HIS FANS FOR SUPPORTING HIM THIS FAR!” he yelled, and yep, June disliked him already. She knew what it was like to have to put on a persona to draw in customers (her reputation as a flirt who could always get the job done at the end of the day had filled her pockets with more gold than normal word-of-mouth), but seriously? Referring to yourself in the third person? That was just tacky and made you look foolish.

“AND NOW THE BOULDER WOULD LIKE TO DEDICATE THIS VICTORY TO ALL OF YOU!”

“I wouldn’t promise them a victory too soon,” said the Avalanche, “Because I’m the one that’s going to come out on top.”

“THE BOULDER WILL SEE ABOUT THAT.”

“Ready?” called Xin Fun from his podium, “Fight!”

The fight was quick. The Avalanche started strong by stomping the ground and pulling a rectangle of dense stone out of the arena floor and sending it hurtling towards the Boulder. The Boulder, however, proved himself more nimble than first thought and swiftly dodged the stone and started running towards the Avalanche. He was visibly caught off guard and hesitated in attacking again, clearly unsure of how to recover from his failed assault. Unfortunately for him, that was all the Boulder needed. He stomped on the ground forcefully and the Avalanche was quickly buried into the arena to the neck.

“Uh-oh, looks like the Avalanche is pinned. If he can’t get out in ten seconds, the match’ll be over. Count it down with me folks! Ten, nine,” Xin Fu announced to the audience. Others started shouting out the numbers with him, but June suddenly couldn’t breathe as her mind went back to the Battle of the Forty-First.

“Eight, seven.”

Being buried alive with Mai, not knowing where Zuko was or if he was safe.

“Six, five.”

Those few desperate moments when she looked out onto the battlefield for the first time and wondering if Zuko’s body would ever be found, let alone finding him alive.

“Four, three.”

Adrenaline and denial coursing through her veins as she unfurled her whip and threw herself into the thick of things.

“Two.”

Convincing herself that the brats were safe, only to see them fighting their way off of the field and dodging volleys of friendly fire.

“One.”

The pulsing anger and relief she felt when she finally ordered everyone onto Nyla and set course for the ships.

“KNOCK OUT!”

June was suddenly snapped out of her memories to the sounds of cheers and the sight of the Boulder bringing the Avalanche up to the surface. Sweet, cold air filled her lungs as she took a shaky breath and slowly came back to herself in pieces.

“I’m taking a walk,” she told Peizhi, “Don’t wait up for too long.”

Before she could get a response, June was up and walking out of the arena and making her way towards the pseudo-stables. She needed Animal Time, as Zuko would say, and she needed it now.

*****

Twenty minutes of petting Nyla, five minutes of scaring off the annoying salesman from the beginning of the night, four complete laps around the arena, and about seven matches later, June refinds her seat next to Peizhi. 

“Just in time,” Peizhi said over the loud sound of the ring being reconstructed, “The Blind Bandit and the Mountain Guide matchup is next. I’d also take off any delicate clothing if I were you.” 

“My my, Lady Peizhi. I didn’t know you were the type to enjoy strip-teases. It will cost you extra, of course, but I wouldn’t be opposed.”

The young lady blushed and slapped her on the arm, “It’s nothing like that! Just some people talking. The Mountain Guide’s signature move is to kick up a lot of dust and blind his opponents.”

“Is he a sandbender?” she asked, mind going immediately to a job that had led her to the Si Wong Desert. She shuddered a bit at the mere thought of having to deal with that much sand in that many places. Never. Again.

“I don’t think so. I think it’s just a lot of big boulders being dropped quickly and repeatedly. Leaves his opponents blind to attacks, and he usually just sends them flying with a few good punches.”

“Is that legal? I thought this was a bending-only tournament.”

Peizhi shrugged. “Anything goes as long as it’s not lethal. And the more confident the bender….”

“The less likely they’ll have any other fighting experience,” finished June easily, “Sounds like a fair enough strategy, but let’s hope the Blind Bandit won’t fall for it. You’ve got money to win back.”

As soon as she finished, Xin Fu jumped back to his podium and started announcing again, “In this corner: it’s the only man alive who can guide you through the places you can never see. It’s the MOUNTAIN GUIDE!”

Another buff man, more muscular than the Avalanche but nowhere near as colossal as the Boulder, walked on stage in a miner getup. A bit of an odd choice seeing as his whole shtick was mountain guide, but whatever. 

“And in this corner! Making her first Earth Rumble appearance tonight, everybody give a warm welcome to THE BLIND. BANDIIITTT!”

June leaned up a bit in her chair when Xin Fu said that the Blind Bandit was a woman. The first female competitor of the night, actually. She wanted to see how she stacked up against the others. She momentarily pictured the Boulder but clean-shaven and with boobs, but that mental image was thrown out the second the Blind Bandit entered the ring.

“Holy shit, she’s tiny!” The girl, although standing tall and walking with confidence, was short. Shorter than any brat she saw on the regular, and that included the still somewhat malnourished and growth-stunted Kou. The torn-up play clothes didn’t help anything, and the audience was dead silent as she walked into the arena.

“....Are you lost, kid?” asked Xin Fun, “Is your dad one of the benders?”

“Nope,” she said easily, popping the last syllable, “I’m exactly where I’m supposed to be.”

The Mountain Guide shifted from side to side and looked her over, “Are you sure you want to do this, girlie? There’s no shame in walking away from a fight you’re not ready for.”

“Oh, I’m plenty ready,” the Blind Bandit said, cracking her knuckles and then her neck, “But if you’re not, then feel free to forfeit. After all, there’s no shame in walking away from a fight you’re not ready for.”

With one last look at Xin Fu, the Mountain Guide stepped into the ring proper and took a ready stance. Xin Fu called out the word, ‘fight!’ and the round started. Immediately, the Mountain Guide pulled up dozens of large and medium stones and dropped them in tandem all around the ring.

“And it looks like the Mountain Guide is starting with his signature move, the Wolf-Bat Cave. For any newcomers, he uses this opening move to confuse his opponents and knock them out. It doesn’t always work on experienced benders, but it’s a sure thing against newbies like the Blind Bandit. And what’s this? It sounds like he’s made contact already.”

Sure enough, there was the scraping sound of stone on stone in the arena and a dull thud of rock meeting skin. With a whoosh, a body was thrown out of the ring and hit the seats of the front row hard.

“I don’t think I’ve ever seen such a quick match! And with that, the Mountain Guide….hold on a second folks! It wasn’t the Mountain Guide that made that hit. That means….”

All eyes turned in tandem to the fighting ring. When the dust settled, everyone could see the Blind Bandit standing there, one fist punched forward, and not even two steps from where she began the match.

“The Blind Bandit. WINS!”

The Blind Bandit huffed out a breath and blew her bangs out of her eyes. With a feral grin, she started to walk out. But before she could, she turned back to where the Mountain Guide was moaning on the stone seating.

“Hey dunderhead,” she shouted, “A piece of advice. The next time you try that trick of yours, make sure your opponent isn’t already blind.”

*****

The Blind Bandit wins her next match.

And the next one.

And the next one.

Eventually, it’s the semifinals, and only four benders are left: The Boulder, the Stone Goblin, Seastar, and the Blind Bandit. 

The Blind Bandit and Seastar are up first. The crowd is, by and large, anticipating this fight more than even the Boulder’s match. Everyone is watching with bated breath to see if this tiny powerhouse of a bender can make it to the finals and win it all.

“In this corner,” Xin Fu gestures to the man dressed head to toe in seafoam green, “The menace of the ocean that’ll drag you down and sacrifice you to La, it’s SEASTAR!”

“And in this corner. The girl no one saw coming but everybody wants to see. The bender that’s taking Earth Rumble Three by storm. It’s the BLIND BANDIT!”

Cheers shook the stadium as the Blind Bandit made her way up, “You ready for the butt-whoopin’ I’m about to give ya’?” she asks her opponent.

The man doesn’t respond and instead nods at Xin Fu to start the match. With a resounding ‘Fight!’ the semifinal match begins and rocks meet together in the stadium. 

Five minutes in, which is already longer than most of the Blind Bandit’s fights, it’s clear who the winner is going to be. Seastar has experience and skill, but he’s no match for the Blind Bandit’s stone-cold precision and creativity with her element. When she backs him into a corner and it looks like the fight is done for, Seastar sends out one last boulder.

Directly towards June and Peizhi.

June drags Peizhi down to the ground and prays that the cover from the bleachers would be enough to keep them from being completely squished. But the painful, crushing death doesn’t come. June looks up to see that the enormous stone was stopped in midair, hovering scarcely a few inches from them, so close she could touch it.

“MOVE!” yelled the Blind Bandit harshly, “The idiot’s fighting me for control and I don’t know if I can hold this for much longer.”

June, not one to ignore clear and necessary instructions, hauls ass away from the seats and scrambles to the sixth row with Peizhi in tow. Once they’re out of range, the Blind Bandit lets the boulder drop and turns on Seastar.

“What in the name of Grumbar was that?” she demands, menacing scowl directed right at the man.

“A gamble,” he said simply.

“....and after an extremely dirty play from Seastar, The Blind Bandit has been knocked out of bounds,” says Xin Fu remorsefully. Sure enough, the girl has her foot on the outside of the ring outline, obviously unable to see the boundary and not having paid attention to her footing when she rushed across the ring to stop the boulder from squishing them.

The girl stands there dumbfounded as the spectators start to boo Seastar, demanding for him to be disqualified or for a rematch. Xin Fu holds up his hands to silence them and announces to the crowd, “As much as it pains me to admit it, Seastar was well within the rules of the match. I cannot disqualify him now, but rest assured. After tonight, he will never participate in an Earth Rumble event ever again.”

Xin Fu continued over the bender's protests and instead gestured at the Blind Bandit, “And in the meantime, can we get a round of applause for the Blind Bandit? This is the farthest any rookie has gotten in the history of Earth Rumble, and it’s very clear that the young lady had a bright future ahead of her. Give it up for our youngest competitor!”

Cheers echoed throughout the stadium, as Xin Fu continued, “We’ll get on with the second semifinal match quickly, and then have another match between the Blind Bandit and the loser for third place. So stay where you are folks, and be patient.”

The Blind Bandit had long since made her way out of the stadium as Xin Fu made his last announcement. June frowned to herself and patted herself down to double-check her belongings. Her hands brushed against a cord of leather, hemp, and beads balled up in her pocket. Making up her mind, she settled Peizhi down and went to go find the backstage area.

*****

Toph rubbed at her eyes and sniffed a bit. Damnit. Damnit, damnit, damnit. Stupid Seastar and his stupid cheating. This was supposed to be her night. The night she went out and proved that she wasn’t just the fragile little doll her parents thought her to be. And she got knocked out by a cheater of all stupid things.

She had hidden away in a burrow of rock. It was private and close enough to the stage that she could feel the comforting vibrations of rock being moved around a floor above her. 

It also had the downside of drowning out the sound of footsteps and the softer vibrations of a light-footed person approaching her.

“Are you okay, brat?” asked a smooth voice out of seemingly nowhere.

“Ahhh!” she most definitely did not screech as she threw pebbles at the place where the voice came from.

“Hey, watch it,” the voice said, though now that Toph was paying attention and felt one of the pebbles land, she felt that the voice did not actually come from nowhere, and instead came from a person a few feet away.

“Don’t know how to break this to you, but I can’t watch anything,” she quipped, rubbing at the place where she could feel the tears and snot mixing on her face.

Surprisingly, the voice chuckled, which was kind of weird. Mom and Dad never chuckled when she said stuff like that, “Have you been crying?”

“NO!” she said, ignoring the tell-tale tha-thump of her heart that told her when people were lying.

“It’s okay if you do. One of my brats cried the day I met him, and he’s still a badass.”

Toph privately filed the word ‘ badass’ away for future use. “Just leave me alone.”

“Nah. Don’t think I will. If there’s one thing I’ve learned recently, it’s to never leave crying badass kids alone. That’s when the real weird shit goes down.”

“Yeah, well I’m not so badass. I don’t even got a stupid champion belt to prove it.”

“Is that what you’re crying about? I get that, but you have to look on the bright side of things. For one, the only way you lost was to a cheater who was willing to put my life and the life of my bounty at risk just for that ‘stupid champion belt’ you’re crying over.”

“Seastar was a damn cheater,” Toph agreed, wiping at her face again.

“And I don’t think I’ve seen better earthbending anywhere. And I’ve seen earthbending before. A few of my….in-laws are earthbenders and they’ve got nothing on you.”

Even though the voice had choked around the word in-laws, the heartbeat attached to the voice hadn’t wavered for a second. They were telling the truth.

“Well, that still doesn’t help me any,” Toph grumbled.

“No. But it is something to think about. You’re what, seven?”

“Nine.”

“Right, nine. You’re nine and you’re already the best earthbender I’ve ever seen. Imagine how fast you’ll wipe the floor with all these chuckleheads when you really get going.”

“My parents aren’t exactly going to agree with you.”

The voice paused, “Why not? You’ll be the best in the world.”

“Ugh, hello? I’m blind?”

“So?”

“So, aren’t you going to say something about how I’m too delicate to be doing stuff like this?”

There was a snort, “Delicate my ass. You made at least two grown men cry tonight. You’re about as delicate as a saber-tooth moose-lion.”

“And you aren’t going to say I’m helpless?”

“Again, you made two grown men cry and beat up who knows how many more. You aren’t helpless.”

Toph sniffed one last time and leaned against the stone wall, “Thanks.”

“No problem kid. Your parents sound silly. Sure you don’t want to run away with me? The place I’m staying at would welcome you with open arms.”

Their heartbeat was kind of fluttery but still steady. It was playful but truthful. For a second, Toph thought through their offer and pictured running away for more than a few days at a time. Leaving behind the Beifong name and all the expectations and rules that came with it.

“No thanks,” she said, letting the daydream die away, “I’ve still got a few things to learn from my earthbending teachers, and I’ve got an Earth Rumble to win next year. Can’t do that if I run off now.”

There was a rustle of fabric and a few soft vibrations. The voice shrugged, probably, “Suit yourself. But know that it’s an open invitation. Just head to the Pohuai Stronghold and ask for June. Or Jia, if I’m not on base.”

“Well, if Toph Beifong ever arrives at a Fire Nation base, you’ll know.” There was a rumbling and cheers from above them. Toph smiled. “That’s my cue. Catch you later, June.”

Chapter Text

Tatsuya comes to consciousness when a pillow whips him across the face.

“Rise and shine, country hick,” Tamotsu says easily, “You’re on teaching duty today."

Tatsuya groans, missing the golden warmth of sunrise that usually wakes him, “I’m on teaching duty every day, and I never get rudely awakened before Agni even has a chance to open his eyes. And for the last time, ya’ brat, it’s a fishing village, not a farming one.”

“Does it look like I care about the difference?” Tamotsu asks, “And if I have to be awake, then so do you. At least you slept through the night and haven’t been up painstakingly breaking down every single courtly and political lesson into the simplest, most blunt wording possible. I swear, the Yuyan recruits are worse at politics than you. I didn’t even think one such person existed, let alone an entire clan’s worth.”

“How are the new White Lotus members taking your secret boot camp, anyway?” Beyond scouting recruits and connecting with them enough to get a feel for their loyalties, Tatsuya had had zero contact with the White Lotus newbies. He knew what he was good at, and subterfuge ain’t it. He was a good soldier, a good friend, a great older brother, an amazingly entertaining piece of arm candy, and a halfway decent teacher. But he was never and would never be a good spy or politician. His knowledge in that field ended at knowing when to keep his mouth shut and lie through his teeth when needed.

“It’s like telling adolescent dragons when to attack. They’re knowledgeable enough to understand the words I’m saying, but it flies over their heads so they end up raining down fire and death when it really, really isn’t necessary,” grumbled Tamotsu.

“Or volleys of arrows, in their case,” Tatsuya smiled a little, “Enjoy your misery of staying awake. Once the sun’s up, you won’t be able to catch a wink of sleep until it starts lowering after midday.”

“I’ll take it with dignity if it means you’re the one that’ll have to deal with Jeong-Jeong.”

Tatsuya fell out of bed and onto the floor in shock, “I’ll be dealing with who?”

Tamotsu flashed him a smile that had way too much satisfaction in it for Tatsuya’s liking, “Didn’t I remember to tell you? The Grand Lotus of Fire, Jeong-Jeong, will be arriving today with his followers.”

“And he’s going to muscle his way into firebending lessons with my students,” Tatsuya spat out in anger.

“I really don’t see why you hate the man so much,” Tamotsu said, holding out a hand for him to grab, “He’s a master of his craft and a successful teacher to many wonderful firebenders.”

“I don’t hate him. I just violently disagree with his philosophy on bending.”

Tatsuya knew, he knew, that there weren’t many people who had learned from the original masters as he had. Hell, with Lu Ten gone, he might be the only living person outside of the Sun Warriors to have done so. And as much as he shook in his boots at the mere thought of returning to the ruins to teach Prince Zuko and Kou, he’d do it all in a heartbeat if it meant experiencing that again.

Tatsuya wasn’t a scholar. Before he attended the military academy, he couldn’t even read and write more than his name, the names of his family, the names of the spirits he prayed to, and the characters for ‘fish’ and ‘river’ and his village. But even if he had the same learning Yoshiyuki, Tamotsu, and Lu Ten had, he still couldn’t have put it into words. 

How the eternal flames had synced up to his inner flame so quickly, it felt like he was holding a brand new soul in his hands. How climbing up and up and up the steep staircase felt like he was constantly taking one step closer to Agni and the heavens above. The pure awe that Master Ran and Master Shaw instilled in him the first time he laid eyes on them. The pure freedom, innocence, and joy he felt dancing with the dragon masters. The beauty the masters had shown him, colors he had never even known.

The rightness he felt radiating throughout his soul when he finally understood: fire was life. It was anger, mercy, passion, apathy, love, hate, and everything in between. Fire was him. Fire was his people. Fire was life.

So to have someone, a so-called ‘master firebender’ proclaim that fire was evil? To declare to his subordinates and masters and everything under Agni’s merciful glory that it could do nothing but hurt people?

It was nothing less than blasphemy.

“If I had my way, the Admiral would stay far away from the training grounds. Or better yet, he’d arrive humbled, willing to learn, and I could teach him the truth about fire.”

Tamotsu slapped him atop the head, “Quit it with that poppy-cock. You’ll show him the respect he deserves as a superior in age, rank, and social standing. He’s years more experienced. You might just be the person that’ll learn something.”

Tatsuya grumbled, “We’ll see about that. But I swear, if he messes with any of my students, his life is forfeit. Especially if it’s Zuko or Kou.”

“I’m begging you, ‘Suya. Stay polite, please.”

“I make no promises.”

*****

Despite grabbing an early breakfast and arriving at the training grounds before the sun had truly risen, the kids had still beat him there.

“Why the long faces?” he asked as he made his way over, “You’re all usually a flurry of activity by now.”

“We got a letter from June,” pouted Zuko, crossing his arms and slumping further into himself.

“Isn’t that a good thing?”

“She’s coming back late,” Mai mumbled.

Seeing that the two pouty kids weren’t going to give him much, Tatsuya turned to Kou and gave him a look that mixed his older brother, ‘I know you know something and you are going to tell me or so help me spirits,’ look and his major’s ‘as your superior officer, I am telling you to speak the truth or you will be court-martialed so fast it’ll make your head spin,’ look.

“June helped overthrow the governor of Kuashi, installed a more competent woman in his place, made nearly one-thousand gold pieces off of some bet, and is coming back to Pohuai with a gaggle of street kids. Her pace is slow because she has to accommodate the kids, and she’ll be back two weeks later than expected.”

Tatsuya whistled, “Damn. And that’s just her usual life, huh.” He should also tell Tamotsu, Minori, or Yoshiyuki about the Kuashi situation. That’s probably important. He’ll let the people who know how politics work hash out how having an in with the new governor of Coal Mining: the City would be useful. 

“Well, can’t do jack about that now. But, because you’re all in a mood, let’s have some fun and wipe those frowns off your faces. How’s Fire Snake sound for a warm-up today?”

That got their interest quick enough. Zuko shot off towards that turtleduck pond he was so fond of and looked for some croco-cattails. He came back with a handful for Mai, and the three lined up beside Tatsuya.

With a smile and a clap, he made a small ball of fire in his hand before passing it to Kou. Kou caught the flame and fed it a bit when it started to waver, before lighting one of Mai’s plants. Mai then passed the flame on to Zuko, who held it carefully. Once it looked like Zuko was ready to pass it on, Tatsuya abandoned his spot in the line and ran next to Zuko to catch the ball of fire.

Fire Snake was a common game for firebending kids to play, but it was also a wicked training tool. It took skill to keep a handle over the size of the fire, and it was quick to teach kids how to control flames not their own. Tatsuya had known master firebenders who couldn’t do that, and every time he just wondered what kind of world they lived in that they didn’t have a skill he had learned at five. 

The game could go on forever; so long as the flame didn’t die, then it wasn’t over. He remembered one village-wide game that had lasted over three days and three nights. Benders had swapped in and out for days until a rainstorm had finally come and ended it for them. Tatsuya saw a few more people add themselves to the line and smiled. Looked like this game might go the same way.

The ball of flames continued to pass from hand, to hand, to weed, to incense stick, to hand, to piece of parchment, to hand once more. Benders and nonbenders alike gathered around to keep the Fire Snake slithering, and Tatsuya had to run past dozens of people, children and adults alike, to make his way from one head to the other and catch the fire from Zuko.

A few people later, a small child with a burning feather cried out in pain. As one, the rest of the Fire Snake turned to her to see that she had run straight into a man, and was sitting fallen on the ground holding her burned hand.

“I am so sorry, little one,” said the man. He was on the older side, and looked ragged from living in the wilderness, “Are you alright?”

The kid did nothing but sniffle a bit and blink up at the man. Master Raiden stepped forward and picked the child up in his arms, “I apologize for my niece. Would it be too presumptuous of me to ask if you’re Admiral Jeong-Jeong?”

“You would be right, sir. My people are waiting outside. I insisted on scouting the region before they approached. We have had one too many traps set upon us in the past few days for comfort.”

“Then I welcome you to the Pohuai Stronghold. I’ll call some of my people to help yours. The Commander should be in his office by now.”

“Thank you,” Jeong-Jeong bowed to him before turning to the child, “And let this be a lesson to you, young lady. Fire is very dangerous. You are lucky you weren’t hurt more. I hope you take this to heart and don’t carelessly play with it again. That’s how so many get burned.”

And with that, Tatsuya decided to step in, because he’d be damned if the blasphemer got even a single ounce of reassurance in his beliefs, “But if you don’t play with fire, you’ll never create something new.”

“I don’t think I’ve heard that version of the saying before,” Jeong-Jeong said stiffly.

“It was something a friend was fond of saying,” Tatsuya bowed in the style of the flame, “Major Tatsuya of Ortai, at your service.”

Jeong-Jeong very pointedly did not return the bow; even a peasant nobody like Tatsuya could recognize the stiff nod in acknowledgment for the snub it was, “I believe I’ve heard of you and your exploits, major. The Phoenix of Ortai, if I’m not mistaken. Are you proud of how you can burn down a thousand able-bodied men in less than an hour?”

“Considering how my personal record is sixty-one in an hour and scarcely one-hundred in that amount of time with my unit at my back, I don’t think I can comment on that rumor.”

“Are you so proud of the destruction you cause that you’ll celebrate the lives you’ve taken?”

Anger burned bright and hot in Tatsuya’s belly. The sixty-one had all been Ozai supporters that had commanded him to slaughter his own men, and the one-hundred had been the earthbenders he and the Lu Ten unit had had to fight on their way out of Ba Sing Se. But that didn’t matter. What mattered was that this man dared to rebuff him when he had done so much worse. He had killed many, many people in his career as a soldier, and he knew he had a trial and a possible execution date when the dust settled and Zuko was on the throne. But never had Tatsuya ever laid a hand on an innocent.

Jeong-Jeong couldn’t say the same.

There were many, many things he could say to wipe that self-important look off the deserter’s face. The Battle of the Bloody Ice, the Massacre of Dia, Shimabiro, Monta, Aska, and countless others. But Tatsuya had a point to prove, and that point meant showing the blasphemer that he had the moral upper ground.

“Never imagine for a second that I take pride in what I’ve had to do to ensure my men’s survival,” Tatsuya said, “But ensuring people’s survival doesn’t mean endless slaughter. It takes healing, too.”

He turned to the little girl and gave her a soft smile, “What’s your name, miss?”

“Emiko,” the little girl said, burying herself into her uncle’s shirt.

“Emiko. What a pretty name. Does your hand still hurt, Emiko?”

The girl nodded.

“Do you want to see a magic trick that’ll make the hurting stop?”

“What kind of magic trick?”

“A pretty one. Here, I’ll show you. First, I take the place that hurts,” he gently held out his hand, which was soon cradling a smaller, swollen red one, “And then, I make a special kind of fire.”

Reaching deep within himself, Tatsuya brought forth the multi-colored dragon flames he kept buried around others.

“Pretty,” Emiko said, looking at the changing rainbow of colors.

“They’re about to get prettier, watch.” Tatsuya’s mind wandered to a happy memory of his, one of him fishing with his siblings in the river that fed his home. In no time, the colors of the flames had settled into a steady, solid gold.

“And then, I take the place that hurts and cover it with the pretty flames,” he explained as he worked, engulfing Emiko’s hand in the gold fire. She giggled a bit at the warmth, and Tatsuya smiled, “Then, when I’m sure it’s finished with its magic, poof.”

He extinguished the flames to reveal Emiko’s soft hand, no longer red and swollen. She wiggled her fingers in wonder and lit up, “It really is magic!”

“Mhmm. Now go get breakfast. Kids like you need to eat.”

Emiko smiled and asked to be set down before running off towards the dining hall. When she was out of sight and out of earshot, Admiral Jeong-Jeong finally spoke, “I thought--”

“That the last fire healer died at Ba Sing Se?” Tatsuya finished easily, “That’s still true. I can heal small injuries just fine, and I’ll even patch a major one good enough to hold until a medic can get them, but I’m no healer.”

“But the fact that you can at all is revolutionary. The one redeeming use of our element is not lost to the world! You should be teaching others about this, not wasting your time and safety on a battlefield! If you perish before you can pass on your teachings--”

“In case you haven’t noticed, Admiral, I’m not exactly on the field right now,” he said waving to the base around him, “And I’m already teaching every member of the forty-first, and Prince Zuko, and any Yuyan bender that’s interested. I’ll even do the same to your men if you’ll allow me to. But if I do, I need to make one thing clear right here, right now.”

Tatsuya shot him a narrow-eyed look, “They are my students. They learn from me first and foremost. If you want to help them with their katas and their meditations, by all means, be my guest. But not a single word of philosophy will pass your lips. To be a healer is to bare yourself to others, body and soul. A healer has to be completely confident in what they are doing at all times. If even a flicker of self-doubt flashes through their mind, their flames go from healing to deadly in an instant. And I can already imagine how far they’ll be set back if they listen to your hippo-bull about how fire brings nothing but suffering.”

“Master Tatsuya, so long as I and others can learn from you, I don’t think any stipulation, no matter how ridiculous, could deter me. And as far as stipulations go, requesting that you, the only person who could possibly teach a healer’s philosophy, be the person to teach the healer’s philosophy is har from ridiculous.”

“Glad we agree,” Tatsuya slapped Jeong-Jeong on the back, “Welcome to Pohuai. Let’s get you men settled before breakfast is over. Chek Bunko has these meal spreads that are just to die for.”

Chapter Text

“Kaede, stop poking Miho. Chou, don’t you dare eat that plant. And Mayumi, for the last time, we’re almost there. You don’t have to ask ‘are we there yet?’ every five minutes.”

“Okay, Mom,” Mayumi, the brat, sasses back.

“Not your mother.”

“Really? ‘Cause, you’re kinda’ acting like it.”

June groans to herself, regretting for the thousandth time that she ever tossed that gold coin to Mayumi on the streets of Kuashi. Did she wish she hadn’t acted and left the girl to starve? No. Did that mean she welcomed the idea of fourteen street rats following her back to Pohuai like a pack of rabid polar bear puppies? Absolutely not. Seriously, two and a half apprentices were more than enough to keep her on her toes. June did not want and/or need more.

The six kids on Nyla, six more walking behind, and two babies strapped to her chest did not change that statement.

“Hey, Miss June,” called Miho, a tiny five-year-old perched on Nyla’s saddle, “What's the white stuff.”

“What white stuff?” she asked, grabbing ahold of Chou’s hands because she would not stop poking at the fucking poison ivy growing in the ditch.

“The white stuff falling from the sky.”

“I don’t know what you’re talking ab--” June looked up from where she was guiding Chou and felt herself choke on her words.

It was snowing.

Fuck.

“Everyone, on Nyla.” Fuck, fuck, fuck, fuck.

“But you said all of us can’t ride Nyla or else he’ll get hurt.”

“Except in special circumstances,” June said, “We need to get to Pohuai. Now.”  

June hadn’t had the chance to buy the kids clothes. This big of a group would have raised too many questions in a bigger city or on the main roads, so they had spent a longer time on the backroads in favor of avoiding suspicious Fire Nation patrols. They had been lucky so far, never being stopped and the mountain belonging to the Yuyan clan was in sight.

But none of that would matter if they got trapped in the snow.

Hypothermia and exposure killed just as easily as soldiers and bandits. And if any of the kids got sick, June didn’t know if they’d survive. Living on the streets did not put one’s body in the perfect position for fighting off disease.

“Scoot over, help each other up. Hua, please grab the tarps out of the saddlebag and use them to cover as many as possible. We’ve got to do our best to keep out the cold.”

“It’s so pretty,” said Miho, still enchanted by the snow.

Mayumi boosted herself up next to the kid and wrapped the tarp around them both, “You’ll be eating those words in an hour when you’re soaked to the bones. It might look pretty now, but I don’t think I’ve ever seen people freeze faster than when snow stayed on the ground.”

“Right you are,” June snapped Nyla’s reins and led them towards the base, “If anyone can’t feel a part of their body, tell me immediately. Now stay warm and hang on. We’re almost home.”

*****

Zuko and Mai stared up at the sky in wonder. They had stopped sparing when the delicate flakes started falling in earnest, entrapped in their own little world of winter. They disregarded the others on base rushing around them to pack away the training equipment and running to the nearest hearths to warm themselves in favor of studying the diamonds of white falling to the earth.

“I don’t think I’ve ever seen anything so beautiful,” said Mai, watching snowflakes melt in her hands, “Each one is so different.”

“What made these?” asked Zuko, “Were they crafted by spirits? Tui and La? Maybe a storm spirit, perhaps?”

“Try and catch some on your tongue,” said Kou, “That’s what me and my siblings did whenever it snowed.”

The two others dutifully stuck their tongues out, trying to catch the mysterious carvings of white that continued to drift down. Minori found them not too long after, tongues still trying to grab as many white specs as possible.

“Private Kou, Lady Mai, Prince Zuko. I must insist that you come inside. You’ll catch your death if you stay out here much longer.”

“Minori! What is all of this?”

“It’s snow, Prince Zuko,” she said with a chuckle, “I and the others were all baffled by it as well the first time we saw it. Sergeant Yoshiyuki had to explain it to us.”

“Does the Serg live in the colonies?” asked Kou.

“No. He is the second son of the Han clan. The Hans live at the summit of Mount Bai on the main island of the Fire Nation. It’s one of the only places on the mainland to ever see snow.”

“When did you see it for the first time?” Mai asked, big, blinking eyes drawing attention to the snowflakes caught on her lashes.

“It was the first winter at Ba Sing Se. We were all enamored by it at first, but by the time it started slowing down supply routes, giving people colds, and forcing us to cover our eyes for fear of blindness, it had lost its original endearing qualities.”

“Oh yeah, didn’t Lu Ten write to me about this?” Zuko waved up at the sky, “He said it was cold and wet, but it still sparkled like gemstones whenever the sun rose in the morning.”

“That it does. I believe I remember a certain care package filled with tea blends to keep out the cold. Now come. There’s tea and company enough inside by the fire.”

Minori started to corral the trio away from the training grounds and towards the inner building, only to be interrupted by a commotion at the gate.

“Get me healers, now!”

The quartet looked up to see the familiar figure of June standing outside the innermost wall of the stronghold, Nyla and children standing behind her, a small, motionless form held tightly in her arms. The guard at the gate tried to ask for identification, but June wasn’t having any of it, “They stopped moving nearly fifteen minutes ago. I thought they just fell asleep, bu-- but they aren’t breathing-- please!”

“I know her,” Zuko said, desperation in his voice feeding off of the sight in front of him, “Open the gate, I know her, I’ll vouch for her.”

“Kid, it doesn’t work like that--”

“I said, open this gate, now!”

There must have been something in Zuko’s tone or face, because the guard and the others around him rushed to do as he said, throwing the inner gate wide for the bounty hunter and the children. Kou ran forward and reached for the babe. He gently grabbed it before June could protest, held the swaddled form close to his chest, closed his eyes, and breathed.

“I can still feel their inner flame,” said Kou after a heartbeat of breathing, “But it’s weak. Mai, you’re the fastest. Get Tatsuya and take him to the healing halls. The rest of you, follow me. You’ll all need checkups after traveling so far in the cold.”

*****

“You got them back just in time,” Lihua the head medic said to the group of people congregating in the healing halls, “A moment later and I doubt they would have made it. As it is now, if they make it through the night, they’ll likely make a full recovery.”

“Thank Agni,” said Tatsuya, laid out on a cot, exhausted from the healing session, “That was too close for comfort.”

“Here here,” said June, laid out on a separate cot from the stress of it all. The kids she had brought to Pohuai through the thick, swirling snowstorm were busy talking to the visiting Yuyan. The story had spread like wildfire when Mai had run through the base in search of the major, and many a curious clansman had followed down to the healing halls to find out more for themselves or distract the other children as Lihua and Tatsuya worked. June would have preferred it to just be her, the brats, the new brats she had picked up, and the healers, but beggars couldn’t be choosers, and she had welcomed the break from babysitting.

Mai, Zuko, and Kou pushed their way next to her and started recounting the month and a half she had been gone, trying to ease the tension out of her shoulders. It worked a bit, and when Chef Bunko wandered in with platters of dinner and the largest pot of miso soup June had ever seen, it got all the better. The warm food eased something in the pit of her stomach, as it appeared to ease others if the sound of chatter and the warmth that suddenly filled the room were anything to go by. 

When Kou, Zuko, and Mai stood to go and serve themselves, Jiaying took their place on the cot and nudged a box into June’s hands. She looked at it and the beautiful wrapping over for a bit before slowly opening the box and lighting up at the sight inside.

“Is this the same candy from the welcoming feast?”

Jia nodded and slowly started to sign, I remember you liked it.

June nodded with a smile, “It was my favorite. A bit better than boar-q-pine, don’t you think?”

Much better, she agreed quickly, Does this mean you accept?

“I’m not too familiar with courting traditions, but I accept. What does that mean for us, exactly?”

Jia started to sign a response, but she soon realized that an explanation would take more than the limited vocabulary June had learned. She whistled at somebody and waved them over. Sure enough, Master Raiden made his way to the cot and sat down across from them with his bowl of soup.

Jia asked him to translate and then started to sign to June again, “Traditionally, we’ll court for a period of time agreed upon by our two families. We’ll have outings together, see if we’re compatible, and continue to exchange gifts. At the end of the time period, we’ll decide to either break it off or get married.”

“How long does that usually last?”

“Depends on the couple. Some take days, others take years. What feels right for us?”

June gulped and thought, “I’ve had partners in the past, but nothing consistent that’s lasted for long. The longest was a year. If we can make it until then, I’ll know whether or not this is it.”

“Okay then. I look forward to a wonderful year of courtship with you. Should you find the kids and see if they approve? I’ll find my father.”

Before June could protest that wording too much, Jia smiled, pecked her on the cheek, and wandered off to find the Commander. June huffed and went looking for the brats, figuring that they could at least give her an idea of how this would work from here on out.

She found them right outside of the healing halls, hugging the life out of their old teacher, and crying their hearts out.

“What’s wrong?” she asked quickly, reaching for her whip and scanning for threats.

“Master Piandao has to leave soon,” said Zuko, pulling out of the hug and sniffing.

“I thought you were staying through the winter?”

“Something’s come up in Shu Jing,” the teacher said, still hugging Mai, “I don’t know much, but according to Prince Iroh, it’s urgent. Something about one of the Ty sisters getting caught and the family needing a place to lie low.”

“Look after them,” Mai said forcefully, “If it’s Azula, it should blow over soon. But if it’s someone else, or, spirits help them, Ozai, they’ll need you.”

“Worry not, Mai, I’ll look after your friends. I’m not leaving right away, but as soon as Fat and the others deem it safe, I must make for the mainland at once.”

Mai held on for another second before letting go of the swordsman and bowing deeply in thanks. June stepped forward and took that as her cue to distract them, “If you’re done saying your extremely early goodbyes, I think I need your help,” she pulled out the box of candy and showed it to them, “How do you court someone?”

Chapter Text

Azula shines.

There is a royal ball being held in her honor - in honor of the Crown Princess holding her title for a year’s time - and not a single person in the room can dispute that the young princess, all of twelve years old, is absolutely radiant. More radiant than Angi himself. With her crimson silk dress, glittery gemstone accessories, and golden crown woven into her hair, she shines brighter, more vibrant than the dying sun.

(Azula wonders exactly how many can see the bars of her cage like she can. Prisons have many forms, and a dark, dank cell is only one. A beautiful palace is another.)

She is nothing but polite throughout the night, holding herself with an air of indulging aloofness no matter who she speaks with. She talks with many people on many subjects: politics, the war effort, strategy, culture, the music, Pai Sho. Azula knows it all, and not a single person can find a gap in her knowledge.

(Nor a chink in her armor. Azula is no fool. Knowledge is power and power keeps her alive. But some knowledge is only as powerful as the number of people who know it.)

(A voice not entirely her own sings in her head: two can keep a secret if one of them is dead.)

She is given gifts throughout the night to celebrate the occasion. More silks and gemstones and golden trinkets. The craftsmanship is divine, and the price tags are enormous. She takes each with a gracious smile and promises to treasure them always.

(Silver bracelets make beautiful shackles, and golden necklaces a lovely hangman’s noose. Azula would rather die than willingly wear either of those things with an unknowing smile.)

The guests make headcounts and gossip about who’s there, who’s not, who’s early, who’s late. They whisper to each other on who the princess favors that night, and who she does not. Everybody speaks of the Ty Sisters’ unfortunate fall from grace, and how only three received an invitation tonight. Nobody acknowledges that Prince Iroh is not in attendance.

(It’s funny how easily Azula can make the world believe up is down and down is up. She despises the general’s son she’s laughing with now; that’s why she’s laughing with him. She’s painting a pretty little target on his back so another grasping family can carefully take aim and do the deed for her. As for the Ty Sisters and Uncle, they’re all exactly where she needs them tonight.)

She is called forth to showcase her firebending, and she performs the Phoenix forms with nary a single hair falling out of place. There is polite, cheerful applause and lovely smiles all around.

(Azula’s learned that you can hide many things in a smile. Her weapons of choice are dagger-like teeth to emphasize her cutting words.)

When the hour is struck and the Crown Princess can make a proper exit to leave the adults to drink and party and talk into the night, Azula does so, bowing to her father and making the rounds of goodbyes before obviously making her way to her quarters. 

(And then sneaks her way back out. Zuzu and Mai were kind enough to leave a legacy behind them, one of secret notes and even more secret passages. It hurt a bit to learn that they had secrets to keep from her, but she does not begrudge them now. She’s long since learned that some things no one is meant to know but you.)

Azula makes her way to the city and towards the district of homes scarcely outside the palace walls. Even with Ty Liu, Ty Lao, Ty Lat, and Ty Woo’s recent troubles, their family as a whole still holds enough power to keep their vacation home in Caldera. It is there that Azula goes to meet with Ty Lee, Uncle, and the sisters.

She slips in a servant’s door and follows Ty Lee’s instructions to find the proper room that the four are hidden away in. Once she arrives and knocks out the pre-decided pattern, the door swings open, and Azula feels herself temporarily relax at the sight of the only eight people in the nation that she trusts farther than she can throw them.

“Azula!” says Ty Lee, who quickly ushers her in. The others begin to rise and greet her, before she holds up a hand and slips off her hood, “Don’t bother. We don’t have much time to lose. Girls,” she turns to where Ty Liu, Ty Lao, Ty Lat, and Ty Woo are bandaged up and waiting with their bags. Uncle’s shipping them off somewhere to keep them safe, and Azula knows this will be the last time she can speak with any of them for a while, “What were you thinking? You told me when you began sabotaging my father that you’d be careful.”

“We were,” said Ty Woo.

“Then why were you caught pranking his office?”

“It wasn’t a prank. At least, not originally,” Ty Woo turned to one of her sisters, who nodded and passed her a series of scrolls, “We initially went in there to snoop, and we found something. Something big. Something you needed to see. But we couldn’t just steal it without someone noticing. But a ‘prank’ that accidentally went too far and destroyed the papers in the room was the best cover we could think of.”

“So you the four of you took a beating and exile from court just so you could steal some documents? How is that any better?”

“Because we knew you wouldn’t believe us unless you had proof,” Ty Woo said, and gave her the scrolls, “Read them.”

Azula huffed and reached for a scroll. She untied it and started to read. It was written by Father’s hand, so at the very least it was important. Only the most vital and private of documents weren’t written by one of the Fire Lord’s many scribes. She rushed through the letter but felt her blood freeze. She reread it, and then reread it again.

“No. No, it can’t be,” she thought, dropping the scroll and reaching for the next one. And then the next, and then the next. Each one was identical, the only differences were who they were addressed to. She stopped on the one addressed to the Great Fire Sage and stared at it in shock as it finally dawned on her that this was real.

To His Holiness, Great Fire Sage Shig, the Sixth of His Name,

I write to inform you that my daughter, Princess Azula, is no longer heir to the Fire Throne. I fear that my elder brother is corrupting her against me, and do not believe I can trust her to remain my heir. I shall halt her firebending training immediately and make her loyalties right once more. On the day of her sixteenth birthday, I plan to wed her to my new adopted heir of choice so that she may make herself useful and continue the line of succession.

If she comes to you seeking shelter, sympathy, or loyalty to herself over me, she will be treated as a traitor to the throne effective immediately. Any others found assisting her in her treachery will suffer the fate all traitors face.

May Agni guide you towards the right choice.

His Shining Excellency,

Fire Lord Ozai, First of His Name

“Princess Azula, what does it say?” asked Uncle.

“Don’t act like you don’t know!” She threw the scroll at him and continued to scream, “This is all your fault! This was your plan from the beginning, wasn’t it? You saw that I was becoming too powerful, so you planned and manipulated me into forcing Father’s hand! I’ve lost my crown and my bending in one fell swoop and it’s all your fault!”

Her uncle looked shocked at the news, “Lose the crown? Your bending? What are you talking about? I never meant anything but to help.”

“Then explain that,” she pointed accusingly at the scroll. Uncle bent down to pick it up, and she could visibly see the color drain from his face, “Princess Azula, this was never my intention. I would never willingly do something to bring you harm, and especially not something as cruel as cutting you from your flame.”

“No, it has to be you! It has to be!” Because if it wasn’t Uncle, then that meant. That meant--

“Azula,” said Ty Lee softly, “Breathe, and think this through. What would Prince Iroh gain from this? He’s still not in the line of succession. Who does this benefit?”

Azula’s mind was splitting in two. It was Uncle’s fault. Uncle and his fuddy-duddy ideas about peace and mercy. 

(Things that Azula’s never known. Things that seem so fragile and out of reach, but some beautiful that she can’t help but long for them.)

“Think, Azula, think. Who’s pulling the strings here? Who could possibly force the Fire Lord into doing anything? Who’s at fault?”

(The man who usurped the Fire Lord. The man who commands an army without having ever stepped foot on a battlefield. The man who killed Zuzu.)

“Father,” she whispered harshly, before being taken by the black and the feeling of her flames burning her up from the inside out.

*****

“AZULA!” Ty Lee screams, panic filling her voice. No. No, no, no, no, no! She can’t lose her last friend. Not here, not now. 

“Poison,” she whimpers out, “Ty Liu, get your healing kit. There has to be something that can help.”

“It’s not poison,” said Prince Iroh gravely.

“What do you mean? It has to be. It can’t be anything else.” Because if it’s anything else, I can’t save her.

“I’ve seen this before. I’ve lived through this before,” said Iroh, “Get her on the bed and get her comfortable. The silks are thin enough to stay, but the jewelry must go. Azula is facing the mightiest of battles. One many never have a chance of winning.”

He stepped forward to remove the crown from Azula’s head, gently running his fingers through her hair and releasing the smallest amount of tension from her head, “My niece is at war with herself. If she emerges victorious, she will have a new understanding of herself and the world around her.”

Ty Lee swallowed back tears, “And if she doesn’t?”

“Then her inner turmoil will consume her, and she may never wake again.”

*****

Azula opens her eyes to see a grand, golden dragon circling her. Its eyes stare into her very soul, and she feels both shameful and agitated all at once. As if this dragon finds her unworthy of something, but at the same time, who is some dragon to judge her?

“Why have you brought me here?” she asks.

“You’ve got it wrong, princess. You’re the one who brought me here.” The dragon continues to circle her, flying around the room, always reappearing in the corner of her eye.

“Well, then off with you. I have no use for your presence, and if you don’t want to be here, you may leave.”

The golden dragon laughed, “Such a thoughtful princess. But I’m afraid that’s not how this works. You’ve got a choice to make. One that’ll affect the very history of the world. And you and I cannot leave until it is made.”

“And what choice is that?”

“You already know what it is. But maybe I can offer some insight. Who do you wish to hear from?”

“What?”

“Whatever you decide affects the entire world. If such a thing hangs in the balance, don’t you think the world should have a say? Come, let us hear the voices of the world.”

There was an ear-splitting ring and then voices so numerous and loud, Azula felt as if her skull was beginning to split open.

“I hope that brother returns soon--”

“Just hold on! Medic! Medic!”

“Why are you out so late, Princess Yue?”

“Watch for the flames on the horizon--”

“Don’t let those bastards inch closer.”

“Nee-chan? Where are you going?”

“I’ll be safe, I promise.”

“Longshot, take Smellerbee and run!”

“Ha! I win again.”

“We need more food--”

“More clothes--”

“More iron--”

“More coal--”

“More wood--”

“It’s nothing, I just have a lot on my mind.”

“Keep Dad safe, please.”

“Keep Sokka and Katara out of danger, I beg of you.”

“Commander, keep on course.”

“When will this battle--”

“--this famine--”

“--this day--”

“--this year--”

“--this siege--”

“--this war--”

“END?”

“Enough!” Azula shouted at the dragon, clenching her head in pain, “What was the point of that?”

“What? Can’t handle a few prayers? I thought all you humans wanted to know what us gods felt like.” The dragon smiled and continued to circle. “But I do guess that was a bit much for a dragonling still in the nest. Perhaps a more focused search?”

“Show me,” heaved Azula, “Show me my father. Let him answer my questions.”

“Very well.” The dragon circled once more and flew away to reveal Father and Uncle Iroh.

“I thought I told you to show me my father?”

“I am,” said the golden dragon, “One of these men is your father, the other is an imposter who is nothing but a worm beneath your heel.”

“Why did you disown me?” she asked, ignoring the dragon’s cryptic words.

“Because you have outgrown your purpose, and I now see that you are not what I once thought,” her father said, “Embrace your new purpose, and then, perhaps you will regain my love once more.”

“Do not listen, my niece. It is not love, and it never was. You are worth more than what my brother has given. See the truth: you deserve more than what he thinks of you. Become the beautiful princess you have always meant to be.”

“Azula,” her father spoke, “Stop this nonsense at once. You know exactly where your loyalties lie.”

“No, Princess Azula, look to yourself for answers. You know what the right choice is. Choose it. Grasp it with both hands and embrace your destiny,” Uncle said.

Azula shook her head and took a step back. She did her best to steady herself, as the dragon circled once more.

“That was getting us nowhere. You’re running out of time, princess. Any other ideas?”

Azula sucked in a breath and exhaled, “Show me,” she stuttered out, “Show me my brother.”

*****

“We don’t have a lot of time,” said Ty Woo, “We have to leave before daybreak. And how are we going to get the princess back in the palace before someone notices she’s gone?”

“It is too dangerous to move her,” said Iroh, “Her body needs rest. If we move her now, she may lose whatever ground she has gained.”

“Is she getting any better?” Ty Lee switched out the wet rags in her hand for a fresh one and began patting Azula’s brow once more.

“I do not know. All we can do is wait.”

*****

Azula looked at the two strangers in front of her. One was a tall man with bronze skin that had long since faded to a sickly pale color. He was thin, thin enough that Azula could see his ribs sticking out of his chest. His hair was oily, and he was filthy all over.

The second stranger was younger. A boy still, not a man. A few inches taller than her, with short black hair, golden eyes, and a wicked burn scar covering half of his face. He was much cleaner and more pleasant to look at than the other stranger.

“Lala?” the boy asked.

“Zuko? Azula?” the man looked between the two kids in wonder.

“Zuzu, Tenten?” Azula asked, finally recognizing the strangers.

For a moment, the three stared wide-eyed and in wonder, before they raced forward and threw themselves at each other into a tight hug.

“I’m sorry, I’m sorry, I’m sorry--” they all started saying, before they stopped, “Sorry? Why are you two sorry?” they asked, still speaking in tandem.

“I left you two,” Lu Ten said, “I left you with a war and our family’s mess to fix by yourselves. I was the one who was supposed to stop all of this. You two were going to be our nation’s future, untouched by this spirits-damned mess. But I left you instead, and now it’s you two that bear that burden.”

“At least you did it because you fought bravely. I just couldn’t keep my mouth shut, and Mai and the forty-first suffered for it. If I just stopped and used my head, then Azula wouldn’t be alone.”

“I’m the one who brought this all upon myself,” said Azula, “I couldn’t open my eyes to the truth, and now I’m suffering for it. At least you two knew that the war had to end and did something about it.”

“No, Azula, this is not your fault. You’re a kid. You shouldn’t be fixing my and the family’s mistakes.”

“You know now, Lala. And that’s what matters,” said Zuzu. He hugged her tight, “Come on, tell us. Why did you bring us here?”

“Because the war needs to end. And soon. And when the dust settles, it won’t be Father on the Fire Throne.” Azula hugged him back, taking comfort in this small, simple thing they never did when he was alive.

“It won’t be easy, Azula. But we’ll be with you every step of the way.” Lu Ten joined the hug, and Azula felt the two start to fade from her grasp, “Remember, Azula. We love you, and we have faith in you, every step of the way.”

“Even if you fumble and fall like I do,” said Zuzu, “Oh, and tell Uncle that we said hi!”

*****

Azula’s eyes opened to the light of the rising sun shimmering through the window.

“Azula!” Ty Lee yelled and dropped the wet rag she was wringing out into a nearby pot of water, “You’re awake.”

“Are you well, Princess Azula?” asked Uncle, “What did you see?”

Azula groaned and rubbed at her eyes, “Zuzu and Tenten say hi,” she said first, making sure to pass on the message before she forgot it, “And I’m doing just fine, Ty Lee.”

The princess of the nation rose from her bed and surveyed the palace from the view of the Ty Family penthouse. “Make a note, Ty Lee. We’ve got plans to make, a war to end, and a throne to take. Today is the start of a new day!”

Chapter Text

Kou takes a deep breath in, holds it, and exhales softly as he feels the sun slowly peak over the horizon. To his left, he feels Zuko’s inner flame follow that same, calming pattern, and hears Mai’s methodical cleaning as she examines her many, many blades.

Normally, meditation would nearly be over by now, and the three of them would be readying themselves for some other training or chore, be that weapons training (Mai and Zuko), firebending lessons (Zuko and him), poison making (him and Mai), healing lessons (him), mystery lessons with Colonel Tamotsu (Zuko), tricking the blacksmiths into making even more throwing knives so they could be promptly stolen (Mai), or shirshu lessons, games of Fire Snake and Pai Sho, cleaning, helping with the harvests, and sneaking around base (all of them).

But today is not a normal day. Today is the first anniversary of the Battle of the Forty-First, and despite how absolutely nobody knows how to feel about the day, everyone agrees that it is far from normal.

It’s not a day of mourning, for they are lucky enough not to have anyone to mourn, but it’s certainly not a happy day either. Everyone is haunted by memories. Some parents that have packed up their lives and followed their children to Pohuai have refused to let their children out of their sight, fearing that if they do so, they will disappear once more. Others, who are without any family save for the ones they’ve forged in battle and blood over the past year, cling to each other instead, sharing whispered memories and sleepy conversation as they aimlessly wander the training yard.

There are a few familiar figures that Kou spots. Akane, with her ever-present leg brace and walking stick, is trying to play wing-woman for Kira and Ryuu. The two have been dancing around each other for months, and Akane’s taken it as a personal challenge to get the two to finally admit their feelings. Lieutenant Minori is accompanying her parents for a roundabout the yard, and Kou sends her a mental good luck. Coaxing the two blacksmiths out of their forge is like pulling teeth, and Kou imagines the two of them will be right back in the thick of the sweltering heat once they’re done with breakfast.

June and Jia are sitting under a cherry-willow tree and entertaining Kenji. The young toddler had officially been adopted by the two women once it became clear that June had become a bit too attached. There were plans, Kou knew, of even more adoptions after they officially ended their courtship and got married, but the baby that he and Major Tatsuya had helped save all those months ago was the only official one so far.

He hoped, quietly to himself, that he would be one of the ones that’ll be adopted.

Zuko’s inner flame stopped its steady movement, and Kou heard his friend say, “What’re you thinking about?”

“Life, I guess,” Kou said honestly, “The future. But it’s people, mostly.”

“What about people?” Mai asked.

“You know. The people around us. The others in the clan. What’ll you think it’ll be like another year from now? Five years? A hundred? Do you think we’ll be around to see it? Think it’ll change much? Think we’ll be sitting here, going on and on about how things were in our day, and complaining about how the kids have it easy.”

“If I ever resort to such a boring conversation topic, put us both out of our misery,” Mai deadpanned.

“And if I ever complain about the future generations having it better than we did, slap me upside the head and remind me why I have the scar on my face,” Zuko rolled out his neck and shrugged the tension out of his shoulders, “It’s our job to make sure our kids and grandkids don’t have to repeat our mistakes. I’d rather they be soft and never know war, than hard and bitter because they lived through one.”

“Here, here,” Kou mumbled, “May the ones that come after us never experience an ounce of the tragedy we have.”

“Here, here,” the other two echoed, sharing a glance. Kou huffed and looked away. For all the three of them were friends, Mai and Zuko had a bond stronger than the one they shared with him. Kou didn’t hold it against them. He’d imagined anybody who grew up together and faced what they had together would be the same, but it annoyed him to no end when they held their own private conversations with nothing but a glance.

“Let’s find Tatsuya, and at least try to make an attempt at firebending practice,” said Zuko finally, breaking off from Mai’s gaze.

Kou groaned, “Do we have to?”

“Come on, you’ve almost mastered the eighth Phoenix form. Finish that, and you’d be completely caught up with me.”

Kou stood, “Fine. Let’s find the major.”

It didn’t take long to find Tatsuya, who was talking with Lieutenant Colonel Tamotsu and doing his level best to push the other man down into the mud.

“Major,” the two men broke apart and looked over to them, “Firebending lessons, please.”

“Now?” the major smirked at the colonel and whispered something to him, “Alright. Go through the warm-ups with Zuko. I’ll be there in a bit.”

Mai grabbed the two boys’ sleeves, “I’m going to practice my archery. Have fun burning each other to crisps.”

“See you later,” said Kou. Zuko waved, and the two wandered over to the training area.

Zuko dropped into a practice stance, and smiled, “You ready to show me what you got?”

Kou smiled back, “You’re on!”

They bowed to each other, reentered their stances, and charged.

*****

Mai pulled back an arrow, releasing a breath and solidifying her aim at the hundred-yard practice target.

Steady.

Steady.

Stead--

“WHAT?” twin voices yelled from the general area of the sparring area, causing Mai to lose her concentration and let the arrow fly.

She cursed and watched as the arrow went wide, completely missing the target and burying itself a few yards to the far left of the bullseye. 

“Stupid boys,” she thought to herself, “What in the world shocked them like that?”

*****

“What do you mean that was the final Phoenix form?” Kou asked incredulously.

“I mean, you and Prince Zuko have officially graduated from the Sozin school of firebending,” Major Tatsuya said, “And you’ve also just won me a fair amount of coin because I told my unit that you two would finish before the year was up.” He directed that last part towards the colonel, who was groaning and complaining about prodigies under his breath.

“Does that mean we’re master firebenders?” Zuko asked, shocked to learn that he would have technically gained his mastership a month ago when he had mastered that final form.

“Oh hell no,” said Tatsuya, “If this was back on the mainland with those crappy tutors of yours, then sure. But just because you graduated from Sozin’s forms, does not mean I deem you two ready for the title of master. You won’t be getting that until you can do all of these forms in your sleep, and you’ve mastered the more advanced moves I and your cousin came up with over the years.”

“Wait a minute….” Zuko looked at Tatsuya, realization dawning on his face, “We’ll be working on the Reborn Dragon forms?”

Tatsuya nodded, “Got it in one, kid. It’s the Reborn Dragon forms, and then, if you’ve got a knack for it, healing.”

Kou grabbed Zuko’s shoulders and started shaking him, “Oh spirits, it’s happening, it’s happening, it’s happening!”

“I know, I know, I know!” Zuko grabbed hold of Kou’s arms and started shaking them as well, “We’re one step closer to making you a real healer.”

“AAAAAHHHHHHHH!” Kou screamed, “I’m going to be a fire healer!”

Tatsuya laughed at his two students, “Yes you are. But first, we’ve got to start you two on the forms. And that means a field trip.”

“Field trip?” Zuko dropped Kou’s arms, “What for?”

“Before anyone can learn the Reborn Dragon forms, you’ve got to learn about the original masters first.”

“Can’t you just tell us?”

Tatsuya shook his head, “If I gave you the answers, the lesson wouldn’t be as impactful. And there’s another layer to it, too. This is a learning experience, but it’s also a test.”

“What kind of test?” Kou stopped jumping up and down, entirely focused on his teacher.

“A test of character. This’ll determine whether you two are truly worthy of learning the Reborn Dragon forms. Don’t worry, though,” he assured at the two’s nervous gulps, “I have every confidence you two will pass.”

“If you’re sure,” said Zuko, “Then we’ll be ready to learn.”

“I’m sure,” Tatsuya bowed to the two students and waited a beat as they returned it, “We’re departing for the Fire Nation mainland in five days. I’ve already talked to June, and she’s agreed to let the two of you and Mai go with me. We’re taking a ferry there, and then we’re heading to the ruins of the Sun Warriors. It’s there that you’ll find your test of character, and learn the true secret of firebending.”

“Are you sure that’s safe?”

“It’s as safe as it can be. And besides, it’ll be faster than two kids making their way across the sea in a stolen, rickety fishing boat.”

“That’s probably for the best. I don’t think my or Mai’s sailing skills are up to par. It has been over a year since we last sailed on our own.”

“As long as you can regain your sea legs in an appropriate amount of time, it’ll be fine.”

“Will we be back for June and Jia’s wedding?” Kou asked.

“Unless something goes horribly wrong, then yes. It’s mid-summer now, and their courtship doesn’t end until late autumn. I doubt the wedding will be before early winter.”

“Don’t jinx it. With my luck, that could be true,” said Zuko.

Tatsuya shook his head, “Okay, angst-lord. Looks like you’re entering that stage of teenagehood. Just enjoy the surprise feast that Chef Bunko has planned for tonight, and be ready to depart on the right day. In less than a month’s time, you two will be learning the most important lesson you’ll ever learn.”

“Any advice?”

“Sure,” Tatsuya flashed a smile, “Don’t worry too much about the giant dragons. I’m at least fifty percent sure they aren’t going to eat you.”

“Tatsuya, give us some actual advice!” Zuko shouted, but the older man ignored it. He was already turning around and chuckling quietly to himself, walking away from the annoyed students.

Zuko huffed. Stupid Tatsuya, trying to scare them. As much as he loved learning under the man, Zuko wished that he’d stopped pulling such stupid pranks. At the very least, he could make them more believable.

Everybody knew that the dragons were extinct.

*****

“Oh, this is certainly a bad omen! The egg has never acted this way before!”

“Someone, please escort Ham Ghao away from this place. He and his words are not needed here,” the Sun Warrior chief spoke. Instantly, one of the more annoyed members of the Sun Warriors dragged the simpering man away.

“Chief, as much as I hate to give credit to Ham Ghao,” one of the other warriors spat the gossip’s name like venom, “He does have a point. The egg and its brethren have been dormant for centuries. What does this mean?”

“It means,” said the chief, gently placing the heating egg back on its proper pedestal, “That its rider draws near. Change is coming, my friend. Dragons will soon fly through the world once more.”

Under the heat of the rising sun, the golden egg continued to warm itself. The pulse of an unmatched inner flame could be felt hiding just beneath the thick shell.

Within the egg, the dragon cub stirred. Its human was coming for him, and he couldn’t wait to meet them.

Chapter Text

Jiaying sticks her tongue out at her child, trying to get Kenji to mimic her face.

“He’s not going to eat it, Jia,” June says from her side, “The rascal doesn’t like the cauliflower-peas, and I don’t blame him. That mush is inedible, even by baby standards.”

If her hands were not currently filled with baby and baby food, Jia would kindly tell her (lovely, talented, beautiful, dear Agni how did she get this lucky) fiancee that it didn’t matter how the mush tasted, all that mattered was that the mush went down and stayed down. Their child needed its nutrients, and he was going to get it; even if that meant playing picken with a literal baby. As it was, she just turned her stuck-out tongue towards June and continued to scoop more cauliflower-peas onto the spoon.

Kenji, who had somehow inherited both of their stubbornness despite not technically sharing blood with either of them, didn’t budge. Jia’s silly face turned down into a pout, and she changed tactics, beginning to move the spoon around like a serpent.

“Here comes the dragon,” she silently mouthed, once more trying to get Kenji to mimic her. His mouth continued to stay closed, but he did eye the bobbing spoon with interest, so it was a bit of an improvement.

“SNEAK ATTACK!” 

Jia tightened her hold on Kenji and threw the spoon up in the air. She was halfway reaching for a knife before she registered the tiny pair of arms that had locked around her middle. 

“Mayumi,” June said sternly, “What have your teachers told you about surprising a highly trained archer?”

“....not to,” she grumbled into Jia’s back.

“Then why did you do that to Jia?”

Would it have something to do with the stealth lessons Kamiko recently gave your class? Jia signed one-handedly.

“Zuko and Mai and Kou get to sneak around base all the time,” the nine-year-old girl whined, “Why can’t I?”

“Because Zuko and Mai are highly trained, and all three of them are older.”

“They’re not that much older. Kou’s twelve. That’s only three years.”

“And those three years make a big difference.”

“Well they shouldn’t,” Mayumi pouted.

Jia sighed. She got where Mayumi was coming from, honestly, she did. She remembered being a kid and thinking that she should be able to train with the big adults at the end of the archery range, instead of being stuck at the beginning targets. But how do you explain to a kid that she’s just not on that level yet? Her father taught her that lesson by letting her get her ass kicked by the older kids, and then bandaging her up and explaining that you never start a fight you know you can’t finish. 

But while Dad’s tough love had worked on her, it would most definitely not work on Mayumi.

For one, Kou and Zuko were too soft-hearted to go all out on Mayumi in a fight. Mai would, but that wouldn’t stop Mayumi from trailing Zuko and Kou like a lost pygmy-puma. Secondly, Mayumi grew up on the streets, where if you weren’t the biggest and baddest around, you found out who was and stuck to them like glue. Getting beat in a fight would only intensify her starstruck attitude, not diminish it. And if Mayumi just wanted to follow the three older kids around and hang out with them, then it’d be fine. The three are always nice to the younger kids and anyone else they talk to. But when Mayumi wants to get in the middle of Mai and Zuko’s daily spar, or jump from the banisters, or intentionally hurt herself so Kou can get some extra medic practice, it became a problem. 

Jiaying gave June a look, and June started to talk, “Tell you what. Why don’t you ask Mai and Zuko to give you sneaking tips? That way, you’ll be able to learn more from them and impress everyone in class tomorrow.”

Mayumi unwrapped her arms from Jia’s stomach and beamed, “And then can I sneak around like the others?”

Not until Kamiko and your teachers say you can, Jia signed firmly, passing on Kenji to June, And not a second sooner. The other three might be masters of getting around unnoticed, but they are NOT your teachers. Even if they say you’re ready, you wait until you’re cleared in class, young lady.

“Yeah, yeah,” Mayumi said flippantly, “But I’m not going to get classes from them for long.”

Why not?

“Weren’t you at the training grounds earlier? Mister Tatsuya says Kou and Zuko are done learning firebending, and now they have to go to the Fire Nation to learn more. Them and Mai are leaving soon.”

Jia blinked in confusion. She turned to June, questioning look on her face, and June cleared her throat, “Mayumi, why don’t you head back to your classes. Your break should be over soon.”

“Fine,” the girl pushed herself off the bench and started walking, “Bye, see you later.”

Once Mayumi was out of sight, Jia started signing to June. When were you going to tell me that the kids were leaving?

June bounced Kenji on her knee, not meeting Jia’s eyes, “Tatsuya talked to me a while ago. I just said that they could go once Kou and Zuko both completed their firebending lessons. I didn’t know it would happen so soon.”

Bullshit. We knew three months ago that they were going to finish soon. You couldn’t have given me a heads up?

“Tatsuya said that they’re going to stay away from Caldera and any families that might know Mai and Zuko. They’ll be safe, they’ll learn what they need to, and then they’ll be back.”

I’m not mad about them leaving. I’m sure they’ll learn important firebending things I won’t understand. But June, we’ve got to talk about stuff like this. The kids aren’t going to be just your responsibility; they’ll be mine too. And if we’re going to be raising anybody together, you can’t just approve of sudden worldwide trips without talking to me about it.

June winced, and Jia let up. It’s okay. I know you didn’t mean anything by it. Just please remember to talk to me about this kind of stuff, okay? We’re a team.

“I’ll do better, promise. I’m just not used to keeping people in the loop. Byproduct of solo bounty-hunting, I guess."

Jia reached for June’s hand and gave it a squeeze. She flashed a reassuring smile when June met her eyes and started to sign with her other hand. Let’s drop Kenji off at the daycare and find our eldests. We should probably go over the plan if they’ll be leaving in a few days.

June smiled back and got up, “Let’s go. I’m sure we’ll have to talk Mai out of packing five hundred knives.”

*****

June’s debating with Zuko and Mai on why three hundred knives each is an excessive amount when Kou tugs on Jia’s sleeve.

She looks over and gives the boy a nod of acknowledgment. What’s up, kid?

Kou fidgeted for a moment before looking up, “Do you think-- I mean, would it be possible that-- uhm….”

Sign it out if you need to. Take your time. 

Kou nodded and took a small breath in. Do you think the people on the mainland will be like the ones that took me?

Not all of them, no. Your commanders aren’t like that, and neither are your friends. Jiaying pointed out.

Kou shook his head. But what if they’re the exceptions?

But what if they’re not? she countered before continuing, But I get where you’re coming from. You’ve lived through and heard stories about all of these horrible people doing these horrible things, and you’re scared that something like that will happen again.

Kou nodded.

Jia thought for a moment before continuing, You won’t be alone if something comes up. Between you, Zuko, Mai, and Tatsuya, I’m sure you won’t have any trouble handling anything that comes your way. But I also think you have to have a little faith in people. There are very, very few truly evil people in the world, and you have to trust that the people you meet won’t be looking for the first opportunity to hurt you. Otherwise, it’s going to be a very long ferry ride.

Seeing that Kou still wasn’t completely convinced, Jiaying gave one final attempt at soothing the boy’s nerves, If you’re still worried, talk to the others. Explain what you’re feeling, and why you feel that way. They’ll understand, and they’ll help you. Or, at the very least, they’ll stab anyone that gets too close for comfort.

Kou gave a shaky smile and gave her a quick hug, “Thank you.”

Jia returned the squeeze and smiled into the boy’s hair.

“For the last time, Zuko, you won’t need so many knives!” June growled in frustration as the two broke apart, “Mai can get away with it because she’s a nonbender, but you’ve got your firebending to compensate.”

Jia smirked at Kou. Let’s go break that up before somebody loses their temper and blades get drawn.

“Don’t you point a knife at me, kid.”

“Looks like we’re a little too late for that,” Kou dashed over, “Guys, no! You can’t just threaten to stab someone every time they say something you don’t agree with!”

*****

Tamotsu and Minori corner Tatsuya right as he’s finishing his lunch.

“A little birdie told us you had a field trip planned,” Tamotsu smirked and sat down next to him.

“Oo’ da’ thunk thad you’d her’ tha’?”

Minori wrinkled her nose in quiet disgust, taking a seat on the other side of Tamotsu, “Please refrain from speaking with your mouth full, Major.”

Tatsuya swallowed, “Sorry, sorry. But seriously, you two have a job for me? This’ll be the first time any of us have stepped foot on the mainland for over a year.”

“That we do, hick, that we do.” Tamotsu pulled out a stack of sealed letters in a tightly tied bundle, “Congratulations, you’ve been promoted to the position of messenger hawk.”

Tatsuya took another bite of food and turned the stack of letters around in his hand. “Oh, it’s those kinds of letters,” he said, catching the white lotus symbol on the wax seal, “Any particular phrases or players I gotta’ give these to?”

“Just be sure to only give one letter per Pai Sho board. I’d rather you spread them out than chance them all getting lost or destroyed in one fell swoop.”

“The green stamps are to be deposited somewhere in the colonies or the Earth Kingdom, while the red are Fire Nation mainland only,” Minori added, “There isn’t any particular order or time restraint on any of them, but you must ensure that they are all sent out before your return.”

“Sure thing,” Tatsuya slipped the bundle into his pocket and looked up at his two friends, “Anything else?”

“Yes,” Tamotsu, slugged Tatsuya on the shoulder, “That’s for not giving us a bigger heads up.” He then pulled him into a hug. “And this is for luck.”

“Keep your luck to yourself,” Tatsuya muttered, “I don’t need it.”

Tamotsu tightened his hold, “Just stay safe, you idiot. If you’re recognized, you’re not going to get out of there intact and with the kids.”

“I better, else you all and June’ll kill me.” 

“We’d swoop in at the last second and save you from the executioner’s pyre first,” said Minori, “It’ll be just like something out of the prince’s plays.”

Tatsuya laughed and slapped Tamotsu’s back before pulling away, “I’ll be back as soon as I can. Hold down the fort until I’m back, okay?”

“Sure, so long as you promise not to become one with the ocean.”

“Just because I miss living on a body of water does not mean I’m going to go off and live in the next one I see, ‘Matsu.”

“Five silver pieces says he cries the second he sees the open water again,” Minori hid a smirk by stealing a sip of Tatsuya’s tea.

“Oi!”

“That’s a sucker’s bet, Lieutenant. The real question is how long will he cry?”

“Alright, I can see when I’m not wanted,” Tatsuya rose and walked away, “I’m off to find people that don't mock me and my homesickness.”

“But ‘Suya, Kenji can’t talk yet, or else I’m sure he’d poke fun at you too.”

“At least he’d be amongst someone of a similar intellect level.”

Tatsuya gave his two best friends a rude gesture as he walked away, wondering why in the world he put up with them.

Chapter Text

Mai is used to many forms of transportation: sailing, ostrich-horse riding, shirshu riding, flying across rooftops in the dead of night, being lugged around on a palanquin during the dredges of the summer heat. But no matter how tiring or annoying any of those can get, Mai can confidently say that walking is the worst way to travel.

Especially long distances.

If she wasn't determined not to be the first member of their traveling party to start whining, she would have heaved many, many deep sighs and monotone complaints by now. But because she would not be the weak link here, she kept her mouth shut and continued to put one foot in front of the other.

It bugs her even more because none of the others are having such a problem. Kou is a few steps ahead, leading them towards Kuashi. Zuko is silently staring off into space, thinking about….something. It’s not anything bad, but Mai can tell that something is on his mind. Major Tatsuya, who had long since become used to endless marches on the war front, keeps a steady pace and a spring in his step.

Deciding that even if she can’t complain, walking in silence isn’t doing her any favors, Mai asks, “How many days of walking will it take to get to Kuashi?”

“About fourteen,” said Major Tatsuya.

“What? Didn’t June say it took her a full day of riding Nyla?”

“June’s an experienced rider, and shirshus are one of the fastest, most versatile, and most energetic land animals in the world. One full day of riding on a shirshu is the same as ten on an ostrich-horse. Or fourteen walking.”

“But Tatsuya,” said Zuko, “You told us to only pack ten days of rations.”

“When did I ever say we would be walking the entire way to Kuashi?” Tatsuya smiled.

“Yeah,” Kou agreed, “That’d be stupid.”

Zuko and Mai shared a look. “Then how are we getting there?”

“I think it’s about time I taught you two about an important skill called hitchhiking.”

*****

Truth be told, what Tatsuya wanted the kids to do was less hitchhiking and more joining a trading party and offering their services in exchange for a faster way to travel. 

He had explained this to the kids as they walked towards the nearest signs of civilization. After stopping in a sleepy little village that was more rest stop than town, Tatsuya told Kou to take Zuko and Mai out where the wagon trains were sitting for the night. The ex-circus member knew this song and dance well enough, and the noblings looked like they could use a teacher in the ways of the peasantry.

He, meanwhile, scouted the few small inns in search of a Pai Sho board. He got lucky on the second inn he checked and saw that two women about his mom’s age were playing each other in the back corner of the main hall.

“I call the next game,” he said, placing his White Lotus tile on the edge of the board. The slap against the back of his head caught him a bit off-guard but wasn’t entirely unexpected.

“Learn some manners,” one of the women said, “That is not how you speak to an elder, nor a stranger, young man.”

“Apologies,” he hissed out between his teeth, “Is the next game open, and if so, might I play it with one of you lovely ladies?”

“Much better,” the woman nodded and played her turn, “Good to see that you have some level of decorum, even if it is buried deep.”

“Please excuse my friend,” said the other woman, “She’s a bit touchy about the way of appearance.”

“As I should be,” she said as the second woman contemplated the board, “If he were one of mine, I’d have half a mind to take him over my knee and discipline him like a misbehaving child. There are enough brutish soldiers in the world these days; we don’t need anymore.”

“I’m not much of a soldier today,” said Tatsuya.

“Then what are you?” The second woman played as the first woman spoke.

“I’m many things. Tour guide, healer, bodyguard. But right now, I’m just an older brother who wants to get his wayward siblings back home to the Fire Nation.”

“Well, that’s nothing new. We all want to go home,” the first woman pinched up her face and returned to the board. The second one took over the conversation.

“What part of the Fire Nation, dearie?”

“Northwest. We’ve got some old family to check in on before we can make it south.”

“Were you thinking of coming back this way again?”

“This direction, but maybe not this town. A bit too small for my tastes.”

“It’s too small for much of anything,” the sour first woman looked up and looked him over. Tatsuya got that cagey, self-conscious feeling he always got when his grandmother would check him for dirt before forcing him to head back down to the river and wash himself for the fourth time in a row.

“Are you planning on making any pit stops?”

“Kuashi would be the best, but Shimabiro would do if we can’t go that route.”

“Papers?”

“We’ve got our passports in order if that’s what you’re asking.”

“That makes it easier, at least,” the woman played her turn and declared herself the winner, “A son of mine is heading that way with some other merchants. So long as you bring your own food and look after the steeds you’re given, they’ll let you tag along.”

“Thank you, ma’am. Much obliged.”

“Are you still interested in that game?” the second woman asked, clearing the board.

Tatsuya pulled out the stack of letters Tamotsu had given him, “As a matter of fact, yes.”

“Alright then,” she laid his White Lotus piece in the center of the board, “Who knocks at the garden gate?”

Tatsuya sat down opposite her and laid the letter on the table, “One who has eaten the fruit and tasted its mysteries.”

Tatsuya continued to speak in code with the woman, unaware of the current heist being performed right outside of the inn.

*****

Zuko contemplates the mother turtleduck in front of him, and he can feel his conviction wavering.

He shouldn’t. He’s about to embark on a month’s long journey that spans oceans and continents. They don’t have the room or the feed to keep the turtleducks well looked after. 

But….

But.

A small voice in the back of his head (the one who has dubbed the mother duck, Mochi, and her four ducklings, Noodles, Rice, Jasmine, and Dumpling) points out the characters on the side of the cage. The ones that clearly read, “For Food.” And Zuko meets Mochi’s eyes, and inwardly coos over the four turtleducklings, and he’s back to contemplating again.

On the one hand, he’ll be robbing somebody of their dinner.

On the other hand, turtleducks.

Then again, depending upon where the merchants are traveling, they might have trouble finding good food at a fair price.

And then again, it’s the height of the harvest season. If somebody can’t find extra food at a decent price, then there’s a bigger problem than can be solved by five turtleducks.

However, Zuko cannot take whatever he wants whenever he wants it. That would be unfair of him and make him no better than some of the truly dreadful nobles and generals that Lu Ten’s old unit gave him a rundown of right before they left Pohuai.

But again, turtleducklings.

“Hmmm….” Zuko hummed in contemplation, “What would June do?”

June would ruffle his hair and tell him to make up his mind already and either walk away or don’t get caught. That didn’t help anything.

“Okay, what would Uncle do?”

Uncle would give him a proverb that he couldn’t completely understand and only vaguely applied to the situation. Something like, “Not the cry, but the flight of a wild turtleduck leads the flock to fly and follow.” That especially didn’t help anything.

“Alright, what would Master Piandao do?”

Master Piandao would tell him to seek the advice of others if he didn’t know his correct path. 

Finally, something he could actually work with.

Zuko caught up to Kou and Mai, who were arguing over the pros of her passing herself off as a knife thrower from the circus, “Hey, there are some turtleducks over there, and I was wondering--”

“They can fit into my supply bag with the sealed medical herbs.”

“I think I can fit two or so up my sleeves.”

“--whether or not I should steal them,” Zuko ended right as Mai and Kou gave him a look, “What?”

“Zuko. This is you, we’re talking about. And it’s turtleducks.” The corner of Kou’s mouth turned up in a half-smile.

“And?”

“Zuko, if I were to court you, I would give you a sword, a theater scroll, and a dozen turtleducks, in that order,” Mai said seriously.

Zuko’s mind skipped over the small detail of Mai having his courting gifts preplanned and hitting them on the head each time, “So, I should steal them?”

“We’re saying the second the spirits placed the turtleducks in your path, it was already decided that you were going to take them. Now come on, let’s find your babies.”

*****

The next morning, when the trading party has departed, Tatsuya hangs at the back of the train with the kids and goes over their itinerary. 

“We’ll stay a night in Kuash so I can touch base with Governor Yu, and then it’s a small one-day trek to the coast where we’ll catch a ferry to the archipelago. Once we land, I find us a private sailboat and we set course for the place the masters have settled. Then, you take your test, and we head back.”

“What’s the test, Major?”

“I already told you, Kou, it’s a surprise,” Tatsuya smiled, “But I will be fair and tell you the legend on our way there, just like Lu Ten told me when we went and learned from the masters.”

“Hey, Tatsuya. Why didn’t Tenten mention this anyway?” Zuko asked, “You said passing this test is what makes the Reborn Dragon forms possible, so why didn’t Lu Ten talk about it when he showcased the forms in court?”

“Lu Ten and I were sworn to secrecy by the masters after we learned the secret,” Tatsuya winced, “I am technically breaking that oath by taking you to them now. So, if I’m burned to a crisp and eaten by dragons, please get word to my family and tell them I loved them. And also tell my brother Danzo that I was the one that broke grandpa’s hairpiece, and I’m somewhat sorry that he was the one that took the fall.”

“Stop joking about the dragons, already. We’re not buying it, ‘Suya.”

“I wish I was joking,” he muttered to himself and continued riding.

The conversation broke off from there, and it was silent, save for the sound of the ostrich-horses’ feet hitting the ground. Tatsuya was about to drive forward and check with the others in the party about their expected arrival time in Kuashi when he heard a soft, ‘quack’ coming from behind him. The man turned around and immediately spied the guilty ‘oh crap’ looks of children caught with their hands in the cookie jar.

“What did you do?”

“Nothing,” said Kou. Mai kept her poker face up, but Zuko pointedly did not say anything and kept staring straight at the ostrich-horse's neck.

“Zuko,” Tatsuya drawled, “Is there something you’d like to tell me?”

Zuko continued to stare ahead, “N-no.”

“Zukooooo.”

There was another soft, gentle ‘quack.’

The three kids started to sweat as Tatsuya scrutinized them, “Kou, did your bag just quack?”

Kou didn’t answer, but he didn’t need to, as the fuzzy brown head that popped out of the satchel spoke for itself.

Tatsuya just sighed, “I can’t take you kids anywhere, can I?”

Chapter Text

Kuashi, Zuko decides as their train of ostrich-horses approach the city walls, is different from the cities he knows.

It’s nothing like Caldera. The capital is all traditional Fire Nation woodwork and temporary pieces meant to be replaced should a firebender not be paying particularly close attention. It’s not like Pohuai either. While Pohuai and Kuashi both share a feeling of strength and safety, Kuashi has none of the militaristic features that the base does. The walls and buildings themselves remind him a bit of Shimabiro, but where Shimabiro was a poverty-ridden mess with crumbling walls, Kuashi is thriving and filled with bustling streets.

The guards on the city walls allow them to pass, and they are met with what seems to be a city-wide shift of some sort. Tired workers, filthy and covered in grime, sweat, and coal dust, are moving towards the food stalls in search of some lunch. Other workers, impeccably clean and busy tying cloths around their noses and mouths, are making their way in the opposite direction, back to where the others are coming from. He spots a person in a red and brown uniform following some of the workers with a dustpan and a broom, viciously sweeping the streets and cleaning up the coal dust footprints they leave in their wake.

Once he sees that, Zuko starts to spot other sanitary measures. As the head of the trading train asks a city guard where they should go to declare their wares and verify them with the trading guild, a boy a bit older than him comes into view, and Zuko watches as he passes clean, wet rags to the grimy workers. They take them and wipe their faces and necks as clean as they can. When the boy moves onto the next group, a girl around the same age comes to the workers offering one of the many water jugs she’s hauling around in a cart. 

When the boy gets close to a group near Zuko’s mount, he calls out, “What’s all this?” and gestures to the rags and the water jugs.

“It’s a new safety thing organized by the Governor,” the boy answers easily, passing out clean rags and collecting some of the dirty ones, “She got a team of people to go over the city during the winter, and she’s been doing a lot of reform stuff since the spring.”

“Like what?”

The boy shrugged, “She cut down the hours and days somebody can be in the mine. She was worried a ton about Black Badgermole, and one of her people said less time mining meant less a chance somebody’d get it. But she also boosted up the wages, so it balances out. There’s other stuff, too, like the new cleanliness stuff she’s got us doing. Pays alright, and I don’t have to head down with a pickaxe, so I say it’s a good thing.”

“Does that actually help with the diseases?” Kou asked, perking up, “Our clan isn’t a mining one, so I can’t say one way or the other on the Black Badgermole, but the extra wipedown on top of regular baths might be something to look into.”

“We haven’t had any bouts of Oma’s Fever or Octapox since we started this, so I think it helps?” The boy accepted the last of the dirty rags and turned to them fully, “I gotta get back to work. You’re traders, right? Head up to the old Governor's Mansion and ask around there. Governor Yu sold it to the trading guild to use for the new central marketplace, so you’re probably heading there soon.”

“We will, thanks,” said Zuko. The two rode forward to catch up with the party, “What’s Black Badgermole?”

“It’s a nasty disease mostly gotten by miners,” said Kou, “You know how firebenders aren’t meant to be underground?”

“Yeah,” said Zuko, shuddering at the thought of being forced away from the shining sun, “What about it?”

“Well, being underground doesn’t automatically kill a firebender. If they stay under for an hour or two, they’ll come back up completely fine. But miners go underground every day for hours on end. Keep that up for years, decades, at a time, and you’ll end up with a case of Black Badgermole.”

Kou tightened his grip on his reins before continuing, “Your lungs start to rebel against you, and you can’t breathe right. Firebenders can’t control their bending, or maybe even lose it all together. It takes longer for nonbenders to catch it, but they’ll get it too if they keep going down. Eventually, you start coughing up blood and growing weak. Even if you stop going down into the mines, you’re never the same after. There’s no curing it. Once you have Black Badgermole, you have it for life.”

Zuko gulped as Kou finished, “Those poor miners. Why do people keep mining if you could get sick like that?”

“Everybody needs coal,” said Kou easily, “And you told me before that Kuashi is one of the biggest coal providers in the nation. If they stopped sending miners into the mines, then everybody would be short on fuel.”

“Then it’s a good thing the new Governor’s trying to stop people from getting it.” They had caught up to the rest of the party by now, when Zuko stopped, “Hey, Kou. You said firebenders and nonbenders get Black Badgermole. But would ear….would someone like Iwao back home get it?”

Kou thought for a moment before slowly shaking his head, “No. I don’t think there’s ever been a case of someone….like Iwao getting Black Badgermole.”

Zuko thought pensively about Kou’s words as they made their way to the mansion turned trading post with the rest of the party.

*****

The New Central Trading Post of Kuashi was a large estate that had been rented out to the trading guild. Governor Yu Peizhi hadn’t been fond of the obscenely large and ornate building and had moved into a smaller, more functional home that she lived in now. The trading guild had agreed to establish the trading post and relocate most of the merchants to the building and pay higher taxes on their imports and exports. In return, they gained a higher level of power for their guild, protection and city-wide insurance against thieves, a free stall in the building or on the grounds, and a contract stating that they could not be forced out of the estate until the city-wide contract was up. (Seeing as Yu Peizhi had rented the building for one hundred years at a rental price of one gold coin, it was quite a good deal for the merchants.)

Every trader coming in and out of the city was forced to verify themselves there, declare their goods, pay the tax on them, and show their identification from the Kuashi trading guild or one of the other associated guilds of the Fire Nation. Overall, it was a good and reliable system to ensure that goods were taxed and reviewed as quality products.

It was, however, causing problems for Zuko, Mai, Kou, and their turtleducks.

“We’re not going to sell them,” said Zuko, hugging Mochi, the mother turtleduck, close, “So what’s the problem?”

“The problem is that there are no papers showing that these turtleducks are in good health and are not carrying diseases. All pets and livestock need such certificates to show that there is no harm in letting them into the city. As you have no papers, you must either slaughter them within the day or release them outside of the city’s limits,” said the guild representative that was checking their traveling party, “If we allowed them to remain in the city, we risk the chance of them infecting other livestock or people with a sickness that we would be sorely unprepared for. So, either kill them or release them, I don’t care which so long as it’s down by sundown. NEXT!”

Zuko looked close to tears as the group of four was shooed away from the desk.

“Zuko, you know this is probably for the best,” said Tatsuya, “You can’t have expected to keep these birds forever, did you? At least now you three can find a nice pond outside the city walls and make sure they’re comfortable. That’s still better than stealing them from someone only to give them to a butcher later, right?”

“I guess,” said Zuko dejectedly. Mai and Kou both reached out and squeezed his arm and his shoulder respectively, “We should probably go soon. The sun’s going to set in a few hours.”

Tatsuya nodded, but stopped when he saw a young boy about Kou’s age playing Pai Sho with himself in between two stalls, “Why don’t you three handle that? I’m going to see when the next ferry to the mainland is and get tickets if we can.”

“Alright,” said Mai, “Don’t get swindled out of all our money.”

“Just because I’m not as smart as my friends does not mean I’m stupid, Mai,” Tatsuya said, “Meet back here when you’re done.”

Tatsuya sent the three off and approached the lone boy pushing tiles around the board, “You willing to play a game?”

The boy looked up, nodded, and smiled, “The guest has the first move.”

Tatsuya laid his White Lotus Tile in the center of the board.

“I see you favor the White Lotus Gambit. Not many still cling to the ancient ways.”

“Those who do can always find a friend.”

“Then let’s play.”

The familiar White Lotus pattern was soon laid out, and Tatsuya looked at the boy, intrigued.

“What?” he asked.

“Nothing. Just didn’t know our Pai Sho group recruited people so young.”

The boy thumped his chest and puffed up, “Well, that’s because most people don’t have my skill set.”

Tatsuya looked him over before borrowing Minori’s judgemental gaze and raising an eyebrow, “You’re filling in for your parents, aren’t you?”

The boy squawked indigently, “No! I’m a member, really!”

“Then what’s the group called?”

“....the White Lotus League?”

“Nice try. Where’re your parents?”

The boy conceded and gave up his self-important act, “They had to load up some of Mom’s rugs and see the shipment off. I’m just filling in for them until they get back.”

“So I’m guessing you wouldn’t know the going prices of four ferry tickets to the mainland? Or where to get them?”

The boy chuckled, “No, I don’t. But if you’re interested in an actual game of Pai Sho, I think I’m decent enough to play until they get here.”

Tatsuya gave the kid a smirk, “I half-think I don’t actually know how to play the game now that I know so many codes and patterns for the board. But let’s see if I can’t figure it out.”

The boy returned the smirk with one of his own, “Let’s see if you can. I’ll warn you now, though, I won’t go easy on you.”

“Don’t. If I can’t beat you, I deserve to get completely trounced. So long as this doesn’t get back to my friends, I’ll be good.”

*****

“I’m sorry my son tricked you earlier,” said the boy’s mother as Tatsuya handed her a green-stamped envelope, “He usually knows not to do stuff like that.”

“It’s no problem,” Tatsuya said, “Thank you for the ferry tickets.”

“I don’t see your siblings anywhere,” the woman said idly, “Do you want to hear some gossip until they get back?”

“What’ve you heard?” Tatsuya asked, straightening his spine and paying extra attention to her words.

“There’re rumors going around about the crown princess. She earned the title of firebending master a little over a month after the celebration held in her honor.”

“She’s a credit to her family and her nation,” Tatsuya agreed woodenly, “But there’s more, isn’t there?”

The woman nodded, “She enlisted the second she earned her mastery.”

Tatsuya swore under his breath, “Son of a-- what branch?”

“Navy. She claimed that she wanted to get out of her uncle and cousin’s shadows and restore the honor of the branch after Admiral Jeong Jeong and his followers deserted en masse. Claimed that she wanted to finish the work the late admiral started.”

“Bringing attention to that coverup? What’s she playing at?”

“I don’t know, but it’s obviously a ploy for something. She’s got her uncle and the Ty family enlisting with her as advisors and guards. Allies, influence, and away from the Fire Nation court. Nobody knows if this is some form of exile or punishment from Ozai, or some plot of hers, but it’s something big.”

Tatsuya tried to think his way through the politics of it all, but he couldn’t solve the puzzle like Tamotsu or Yoshiyuki could. The princess had earned her mastery, joined the navy, and asked her lackeys and Iroh to come with her. And they agreed. Was there a fracture at court? Was this a trick to get Iroh away from power? Was the princess disgraced? Had Iroh swayed her?

Tatsuya didn’t know, but he did know that he was not the right person to figure it out.

“Can you take another letter?” Tatsuya asked the woman.

“Sure. Is it going to the same place as the other one?”

“No,” said Tatsuya, “This one goes to the Pohuai Stronghold.”

He had to tell Tamotsu.

Chapter Text

Hey guys!

This isn't the usual update and is actually an important notice about the trajectory of this story moving forwards. With the holidays coming around and me becoming super busy with my family and other annual obligations, I've recognized that I'm starting to get burned out by this story.

I am not bored with it -- far from it, actually -- but I haven't been super satisfied with the quality of the past few chapters. While I'm still pumped about this fic and super excited with this arc and the arcs following it, I've realized that forcing myself to pump out a chapter every week is detrimental to both me and the story I want to tell. It also doesn't help that more real-life responsibilities, like essays, tests, college apps & scholarships, and other stuff are starting to pop up more and more.

That's why I am officially moving updates from every Monday to every other Monday.

Pros of this: I'll have more time to write, edit, and plan chapters and arcs to a degree that I'm 100% happy with. Chapters will also likely become a bit longer, as the more time I have to write, the more I end up adding to the updates.

Cons: You guys will have to wait an extra week for each chapter.

I think the pros really outway the cons here, and therefore I'm sticking with my decision to make the switch in update schedule.

Thank you for being understanding, and I'll see you next Monday for the new chapter.

Chapter Text

The best thing about traveling with three kids was that two of the three were firebenders.

Tatsuya didn’t have to raise so much as a finger in the mornings to rouse his companions out of their slumber. Kou and Zuko rose with the sun and Mai, who he swore up and down had a sixth sense for when the others were about to do anything remotely foolish without her, got herself up soon after. 

It was much, much easier than when Tatsuya ever had to corral his siblings back home, and the significant lack of dumbed buckets of water, threats to get Mom, and unsuspecting salamander-crawfish dropped onto pillows was a welcome surprise. They were all awake, dressed, and out the room door by the time the sun had barely risen more than a few inches into the sky.

“Alright,” he said as the four of them left the inn room and started to make their way towards the front desk, “We’ll check out, buy some breakfast, and then head to the docks. Remember to stick together, guys. I’ve been assured that there aren’t any pirates or traffickers in the region, but even the safest of docks are chaotic on the best of days.”

Zuko and Mai nodded in acknowledgment, but Kou looked a bit nervous. Tatsuya reminded himself to keep an eye on him and make sure he didn’t have any jitters about traveling by ship.

The four of them weaved through the streets of Kuashi and made their way to the morning vendors selling tea and breakfast to the slowly waking population. One stand, in particular, caught his eye, and Tatsuya pulled out four silvers and walked up to the old woman at the counter.

“Four Firebender’s Specials, please,” he said, placing the coins on the stall counter.

“Coming right up, dearie,” the woman scooped up the coins and got to work frying eggs and mixing wild rice. A few moments later, four bowls of rice, fried egg, cabbage shoots were shoved in their hands and Tatsuya got busy mapping out their itinerary as he ate.

“The ferry’ll take us ‘cross the sea and drop us off on Sopporo Island. From there we’ll make our way northwest until we stop at the master’s home island and Zuko and Kou can take their test,” Tatsuya explained around a mouth of food.

Zuko choked a bit on his food while Kou just looked confused.

“We’re going to Drunkard’s Bay?” Mai asked. 

Tatsuya took another bite, “Yea’. ‘s the farthest we could get with the cheapest tickets.”

“I wonder why,” she deadpanned.

“Drunkard’s Bay?” Kou asked.

“Sopporo Island is known for their sake production,” Zuko said, “It’s the biggest export of the island.”

“And cheap spirits readily available does not make for a sober population.” Mai stirred her rice around and thought, “Though I have heard that it does make for some interesting festivals. At the very least, the island won’t be boring.”

“Well, we won’t be sticking around for any parties,” Tatsuya took a look at the rising sun and kept eating, “Finish up now and let’s get to the docks. We’ve got bunks on a ferry calling our names.”

Zuko and Mai followed instructions and kept eating, but Kou just went pale.

*****

Kou shook out his clenched fists as they started to approach the ferry they were taking to the mainland. He took a deep breath in, and out, trying to calm his nerves. 

He felt Zuko bump his shoulder and shoot him a look, “Are you okay?”

“I think I’m going to be sick.” Kou breathed again. In. Out.

“Have you ever been on a ship before?”

“Technically.”

“Technically? That’s not the type of question you answer with a ‘ technically.’ ”

In. Out. “Get Mai.”

“What?”

“I’m either going to be sick, have a panic attack, or both. Please get Mai.”

Zuko squeezed his shoulder in reassurance and went off to grab their friend. Kou sized up the plank of the ship and continued to breathe.

In.

Out.

In.

Out.

In--

“Sync up with the fire, Kou. You’re doing just fine,” Tatsuya’s voice broke through his trance.

Out.

In.

Out.

Kou gulps in one last mouthful of sea air, tastes the salt and smoke, and then breathes out, extinguishing the fire in Tatsuya’s hands.

“Are you back?” Mai asked.

Kou took in his surroundings and saw that Tatsuya was kneeling in front of him, hands still lifted to offer up his meditation flame. Zuko and Mai were standing to his side, Zuko hesitantly reaching out towards him, but not touching him like the prince wanted to. Mai, though a bit farther away, also had a look of concern and understanding in her eyes.

“Yeah. Yeah, I’m back.”

“Do you want to tell them, or should I?” Mai asked.

Kou winced a bit to himself.

“Tell us what?”

Mai’s attention didn’t leave Kou, “They can’t help if they don’t know everything. And if you’re like this before we’re even on deck, then you need some help.”

Kou’s wince didn’t weaken as Zuko asked again, “Tell us what?”

Kou took a breath in. Out. And answered, “I’ve been on a ship three times. The last time was when we were being evacuated after the battle of the forty-first. The second time was when I was being shipped out to war with the rest of the battalion. The first was when traffickers kidnapped me and who knows how many others and shipped us to the mainland.”

Tatsuya swore.

Zuko hesitantly lifted his hands in question, and then wrapped them around Kou when he nodded, “I’m so sorry.”

“Not your fault,” Kou said, “Just bad memories.”

Tatsuya cut off his curses and turned to Kou, “I’m sorry. You shouldn’t have gone through any of that, but right now, we don’t have many options. If you still want to do this, we’ve got to catch this ferry.”

“I know,” Kou closed his eyes and breathed. In. Out. 

“How did you stay calm on the way from the battle to the stronghold?”

“Distracted myself. Stayed up on deck. I couldn’t go below into the cabins. I can’t go below into the cabins,” Kou’s mind wandered to the dark, cramped underbelly of the traffickers’ ship. The stale air that tasted like vomit and urine, the sound of the coughs and cries of the other captives, the slow, agonizing feeling of his connection to Agni being snapped as weeks went by without seeing the sun.

In.

Out.

“Do you still want to do this?” the major asked.

Kou’s mind flashed to the golden flames of healing he was so desperate to learn, “Yes,” he answered, faster and more sure than any words he’d said previously.

“Okay. Here’s the plan. This voyage is shorter than the one between Kitobetsu and Pohuai. Do you think you can survive it if you stay above deck and we don’t leave your side throughout the entire thing?”

“Maybe? Yes. Yes. I think I can,” Kou said.

“Then that’s what we’ll do,” Tatsuya said, “But before we get on board, we are going to go to an apothecary and you are going to make yourself some sweetsleep. If at any time during the journey you think you can’t make it, you will come to me and we’ll try and calm you down. Worst comes to worst, we knock you out for the rest of the way and you wake up in Sopporo.”

Kou wiggled out of Zuko’s hold and agreed, “Okay. I can do this.”

As the group made their way to the nearest medicine shop, Kou silently prayed that he’d prove his words right.

*****

The comforting smell of healing herbs calmed Kou down, and the familiar, rhythmic motions of cutting, measuring, and mixing ingredients into a bubbling cauldron smoothed over a few of his frayed nerves.

It was with a slightly clearer mind and less shaky hands that Kou snuck Tatsuya a small vial of sleeping drugs, “Ten drops is strong enough to knock me out for a day. Give it to me in a cup of steeped tea if I ask for it, but don’t try to mix it with another recipe. Too much or too potent, and I won’t wake up again.”

“Alright,” Tatsuya carefully pocketed the vial and looked at his student, “Are you sure you’re ready for this?”

“As ready as I’ll ever be.”

“Good man,” he slapped Kou on the back and waved for the three to follow him, “Our ship’s this way. It might be better if we try to board early rather than get swept up by a crowd.”

The three children followed the man towards a great, wooden ship near the end of the dock. The white-painted ferry had a ginormous red paddle at the back of it and two large smoke chimneys poking out the middle. Painted on the side of the ship in red letters was the name, The Last Lady.

Zuko and Mai flanked Kou’s sides as they made their way up the plank, “Kou, what’s a good hangover cure?” Zuko asked in an attempt to distract him.

“Fa-feverfew,” he stuttered, taking a step up the plank.

“If someone got sick on the ship, threw up, and then felt better for a while, what would they have and what would you prescribe?”

“I’d check for motion sickness first and give them ginger. If they still felt sick later, I’d have to examine them fully and work from there.”

“If an elder asked for something to sharpen their mind?”

“Gingko. But only the leaves. Ginkgo seeds are toxic.”

The questions continued until they had found an empty table on the starboard side of the ship and were sitting down with a perfect view of the mainland. Once they were settled, Zuko went from asking everything he knew about medicine, to healing in general, to firebending forms. When he ran out of things to ask, Mai switched to poisons and toxins, demanding that Kou explain the step-by-step process of how to make, and then treat, a parallelizing brew. Then, it was anatomy and where were the most and least effective places to strike a human body.

Tatsuya was getting worried that they’d run out of things to talk about when he heard a faint, familiar chorus come from the shipmates making their rounds on the ship. With a relieved smile, Tatsuya watched the kids out of the corner of his eye and joined in with an echoing of the chorus.

Surprised shouts of delight met his calm tenor, and soon enough, he had half of the nearby workers joining in as they shout-sang through the medley.

“Come all my boys and listen, a song I’ll sing to you,

It’s all about the Bigler, and of her jolly crew!

In Malkalee last quarter moon, I chan’d to get a sight,

Of the schooner called the Bigler, belonging to Agni’s Light.”

Tatsuya’s smile grew larger as he saw that his singing had gotten Kou, Mai, and Zuko to relax a bit and tried their best to join in.

“Watch her, watch her, catch her, catch her, jump up on her juberju, ju-u-ber-ju,

Give her the sheet and let her slide, the boys’ll push her through!

You ought to seen us howling, the winds were blowing free,

On our journey down to Shimabiro from Malkalee!”

The song cut off with a resounding blow of the ferry’s whistle, and Tatsuya met Kou’s shaking smile with a reassuring one of his own as The Last Lady pulled out of Kuashi’s dock.

Chapter Text

Kou’s breathing deeply again when the singing stops and they’re officially out on the open sea. The songs and quizzing and everything had kept his mind off of exactly where they were, but his fears rear their ugly head when the sounds of dozens of voices coming together were replaced by the shouts of the crew, mechanical clanking of the engines, and crashing waves of the ocean.

Kou feels Zuko squeeze his arm in reassurance, and he can almost tell the moment he gets an idea by the rapid sound of his friend rummaging through his bag.

“Have you ever read Into the Night?” Zuko asked, pulling a scroll out of his bag. It was newer and had a silky red ribbon wrapped carefully around it.

“No,” Kou said, trying weakly to smile, “But I’m sure I could tell it to you word for word. You talk about it a lot.”

“It is his favorite,” Mai said neutrally, eying the scroll, “I know he knows it by heart, and I’m sure I do too at this point.”

“But would you like to hear it for real?” 

Kou thought for a moment and then agreed, “Sure. But only if you do the funny voices.”

His friend rolled his eyes, “Please. What reader would I be if I didn’t do the voices?”

And with that, Zuko opened the scroll, cleared his throat, and began to read.

*****

Eons ago, when the world was new and spirits still walked the earth, there was a girl, noble of birth and of deed. She was intelligent, kind, and though she was no warrior, she ne’er had to fear the dark of the night for she knew there was no enemy she could not conquer.

Now, while many sought her hand for these traits alone, it was her skills of dance that truly set her apart. Her steps were lighter than air and faster than hummingbird-wasps. She would become one with the music, and many swore that when her feet kicked the ground, sparks flew.

One day, her aging father became worried about what would happen to his daughter when he passed. While he knew that not everyone desired a love, he wished for his daughter to marry. He did not want her to be alone in the world.

He went to his daughter and told her, “My child, I wish for you to be wed. Simply name the one in your heart, and I shall bring them to you. Agni will bless your union, and you shall be together all your days.”

The daughter shook her head, “Father, this is no one in my heart save you and Agni. And besides, what can a lover give me? I want not for food or for shelter, nor do I need companionship. I am just as fulfilled with our neighbors as I would be with a spouse.”

“My daughter, my daughter, my naive little one,” the father responded, “Contentment with your station and love for the life you lead are two separate things. Yes, you have neighbors, but you have not friends. Yes, you have admirers, but you have not a love. What is a comfortable life to the thrilling uncertainty of love? What are neighborly pleasantries to the purest of friendships? What is the satisfaction of victory if you have no brothers-at-arms to share the spoils? What is the intelligence that shines in your eyes if you have no student to teach it to? What is the use of keeping house if you have no children to fill it? What is the use of dancing if you have no partner to enjoy it with?”

The woman was silent at her father’s questions, until finally, she spoke, “A comfortable life, Father, is comfortable. Why seek uncertainty if I have everything I could ever desire right here? My neighbors are my friends, I need not anymore. My admirers appreciate my beauty, just as I appreciate their compliments. Each victory is all the sweeter because I know I earned it by my own right. I need not a master or student, as I am both master and student learning and teaching as I grow. And what need will I have for children’s footsteps when I can walk the floors and fill the rooms with sounds of my own.”

“But what of a dance partner?” the father urged. The daughter was silent once more, and he continued, “If you wish not for anything else, then surely, you must wish for a partner in dance. Seek one. And if they can move through the air as you do, then let them into your heart.”

The daughter agreed to this request. She did, after all, wish to have someone to dance alongside, and so she declared it to all of the town: any soul who could dance alongside her and match her in skill shall have her hand.

The first to come were her neighbors. The people who had seen her dance all her life and knew that the girl was a prize like no other. She went down to the city square and danced to a rhythm only she knew. Men and women of all ages stepped forward and danced with her, but none could finish a song to completion.

When the woman retired and swore she would return the next morning, the gathered suitors dismissed themselves and she retired home. But that night, she yearned to dance alone, away from prying eyes and flat-footed suitors. So when Agni sank below the sky and her father was asleep, the woman snuck out of her home and into the dark woods at the edge of town with only the flame of a lone candle to guide her. There, when she was sure no human soul could see, she set down her candle and danced.

Sparks flew from her feet at every step as she danced in the warm darkness. But, curiously, the woman did not believe herself to be alone.

“Who goes there?” she asked the darkness, “Show yourselves, or face my fury.”

A dark figure emerged from the trees, “Put your fury away, or beautiful dancer. There is no need for that.”

“Who are you?”

“I am but a dancer, like you, in need of a partner.” The figure bowed, “Will you honor me with a dance?”

The woman obliged and the two danced together under the moonless night. To her surprise, the stranger not only kept up with her step but enhanced them. They twirled and leaped, footfalls as light as feathers. After a few moments, the stranger asked, “I see a conflict within you. What troubles you so?”

“I seek a lover, but I have not yet found one worthy.”

“Then I shall find you such a person on the morrow. Consider it repayment for the dance.” And with that, the dance ended, the stranger bowed and then disappeared.

The next morning, when the woman returned to the town square, more suitors were waiting for her. Merchants gifted her silks by the bolt, and warriors promised her their swords, but none could feel the rhythm of her dance, and so she dismissed them once more.

That night, when she was dancing alone under the smallest slithers of the moon, the stranger found her once again.

“Might I have this dance, my lady?"

She obliged and they danced once more. This time, she attempted to learn more of the stranger, and spoke of her life in town, hoping that he would do the same. He, however, remained silent, speaking only to ask, “Were the suitors I sent satisfying, my lady?”

“While the merchants were generous and the warriors were mighty, I deemed none worthy for my hand.”

“Then I shall find you a truly worthy suitor on the morrow. Consider repayment for our two dances.” And with that, the dance ended, the stranger bowed and then disappeared.

The next morning, when the woman returned to the town square, more suitors were waiting for her. Nobles gifted her gold by the chest, and scholars promised her all they knew, but none could feel the sway of the steps, and so she dismissed them once more.

That night, when she was dancing alone under a slither of the moon, the stranger found her once again.

“Might I have this dance, my lady?”

She obliged and they danced once more. This time, she spoke of her father and her family, hoping that he would do the same. He, however, remained silent, speaking only to ask, “Were the suitors I sent satisfying, my lady?”

“While the nobles were dignified and the scholars were wise, I deemed none worthy for my hand.”

“Then this time, I shall surely find you a truly worthy suitor on the morrow. Consider repayment for our three dances.” And with that, the dance ended, the stranger bowed and then disappeared.

The next morning, when the woman returned to the town square, there were even more suitors waiting for her. Kings from vast lands came to her, offering her their kingdoms and their love, but none could feel the beat of the drums, and so she dismissed them once more.

That night, when she went into the dark woods, she did not dance. Instead, she held her little candle under the moonlight and waited for the stranger to arrive.

Finally, he came and asked, “Were the suitors I sent satisfying, my lady?”

“While the kings were strong, I deemed none worthy for my hand.”

“Ungrateful girl!” the stranger cried, “I have brought you merchants and warriors, nobles and scholars, and king upon king! Is none worthy?”

“I only know one, sir.”

“Who is it? Name them, damn you, and wed them in peace.”

“It is you, sir. You are the only being I know who can dance with me as an equal, and so it is you I shall wed.”

The stranger went silent. “No. No, you cannot marry me.”

“Why, sir? I care not for riches, for I have my own. I care not for protection, for I can defend myself. I care not for titles, for I need only my name. Even if you lack them all, it is of no consequence to me.”

“Because you do not love me.”

“And I need not for love. I seek a companion, in truth, not a lover. So long as we regard each other with respect and only speak the plainest of truths, love and companionship will follow.”

“Because you simply cannot.”

“Why?”

“Because you cannot.”

“Why?” the woman grew angry and held her candle to the stranger’s face, “Damn you, why--”

Her breath caught as she laid eyes upon the stranger’s face. It was not the face of a human, but instead that of a spirit. One with the head of an eagle, the torso of a tiger, and the legs of an air bison.

“Who are you?” she asked.

“I am Vitali, the spirit of the air. And now that you have seen my hideous face, I must leave you, for you will surely fear me now and forever.”

“All I see,” said the woman, “Is the face of my future husband.”

The woman took the spirit’s hand and they danced, and danced, and danced, never stopping for a single moment. The two dance together even now, changing the winds'  course whenever they spin invisibly in the air. And if you ever see fireflies flying through the air, know that Vitali’s wife has blessed the land with a dancing touch of her shoe.

*****

“Wait,” said Kou, “I thought that Vitali was a monster who kidnapped the dancer.”

Zuko looked confused, “No? No, he didn’t.”

“That’s how I always heard it.”

“I heard it differently, too” Mai agreed, “I heard he killed the woman’s entire village when she refused him, and then forced to dance with him for all eternity.”

“No, that’s wrong,” said Zuko, “Where in the world did you hear that version?”

“I swear, that’s how my copy of the story went. Maybe you read it wrong?”

“I copied this,” Zuko waved the scroll around, “Word for word off of the original copy we stole from the pirates. It matches my mom’s copy, too.”

“Then why have Mai and I heard it differently?” Kou asked.

“I thought you said you never read this before?”

“Yeah, I never read it,” Kou rolled his eyes, “But my mom would always tell us this story at bedtime, and it always followed along with what Mai and I said.”

“Maybe your mom changed it to make it a cautionary tale about trusting unknown spirits?” Zuko wondered.

“Then what about me?” Mai asked, “Why was my edition different from the original?”

Zuko looked down at the scroll in his hands, “I don’t know. I just don’t know.”

It was a harmless love story between a woman and a spirit. Why would someone go to such lengths just to change a single story?

And why had mom owned a copy of the original?

Chapter Text

To the Journeyman of Toai,

Travel has been smooth, although there was some initial trouble with the fire lily tile and its temporary replotting. Something about a previous gardener stealing it from its garden and not properly attending to its roots. The white dragon tile assures me that you and the smith’s daughter have it well in hand. The board has settled for now, and I believe the game shall continue as our strategy foresaw. But I have heard some interesting and contradictory gardening tips that I don’t know are best for the garden as a whole.

The Grand Lotus has seen fit to replot the knotweed tile’s double amongst a series of red boat tiles. He, along with seven specialty cherry blossom pieces, is investing in ocean-grown knotweed. I don’t know what to make of this news, nor what the Grand Lotus expects the knotweed’s double to do. But I think it best that such news would interest you, as I know you to be the superior landscaper.

Regards,

The Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village

*****

The Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village,

It gladdens me that you, the knotweed, the white dragon, and the fire lily are safe. The white dragon is correct that we are taking measures to gain retribution for our poor fire lily, and that its mismanaged roots will be settled.

As a landscaper, I appreciate you bringing our superior’s interesting garden management to my attention, but in truth, I know not what he expects to bloom. The cherry blossoms are lovely, but they could either strangle the knotweed, be strangled in turn, encourage a more bountiful harvest, or grow entirely in separate fields.

But the fact that he has relocated his garden to the seaside is telling, though I haven’t heard whispers yet of why. My best guess is that some blossoms are being closely monitored for growth. If it is the Grand Lotus that is being measured, then the knotweed and the cherry blossoms are his wardens. But if it is the knotweed, then the Grand Lotus is most likely attempting a replotting to see if her roots take hold of new soil.

Of course, the creeping ivy clinging to the Fire Throne could have simply uprooted them both in favor of appearing as the most beautiful plant in the royal gardens. If that’s true, then both knotweed and Lotus may eventually come to an accord, but who knows.

Regardless, do not stray from the path we’ve laid before us. Trust that the Grand Lotus knows his way around the garden, and focus on assisting our knotweed and fire lily in learning to dance.

May Agni shine upon you and your family,

The Journeyman of Toai

P.S: Are you performing your other duties as planned?

*****

The Journeyman of Toai,

I’ll continue to stick to our game strategy if that’s what you think is best. 

The knotweed, the white dragon, and the fire lily have taken to traveling by land and by sail much better than by ferry. It appears that the fire lily can manage better with open air and no smog from the tricky engines. We may have to return home in such a manner if this holds true.

I will trust your words about the Grand Lotus’s plan for now but know that I don’t like it. Even an inexperienced landscaper such as myself knows that handing the navy over to the knotweed’s double could end in disaster. And though I trust the Grand Lotus in doing what must be done to ensure the peace, I don’t think he’d take unrooting the knotweed’s double well.

We expect to enter the dance instructors’ home soon, and the knotweed’s convinced me to visit my original soil on our way back. Therefore, if our route back takes more time than our route out, you know why.

Regards,

The Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village

P.S: Yes, I’m being the perfect little messenger hawk and delivering your damn letters. Tell the blacksmith’s daughter to remind you to pay me back for the games. The Pai Sho grannies are flushing my pockets faster than a tea merchant in the middle of a coffee convention.

*****

Dear Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village,

HAVE YOU GONE MAD?

You cannot simply waltz into your home village after a year of no word to your family. I’m fairly certain your siblings would kill you for breaking your mother’s heart. That is, of course, if they decide to mercy kill you before your grandmother can.

Your wellbeing aside, you risk recognition in returning home. I cannot allow yourself to put you, your family, and the tiles at risk. I don’t care how much the knotweed tile pouts or the combined panda-puppy eyes the three use on you. DO NOT RETURN HOME. Consider it an order from your superior officer.

The Journeyman of Toai

P.S: I won’t pay you back unless you avoid your home village. Think of it as an incentive to stay away and make the right choice.

P.P.S: Remember to keep acting like a ‘damn messenger hawk’. Those letters are important moving forward.

*****

The Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village,

I haven’t heard from you in two weeks. Is everything alright? I know correspondence on and around the dance instructors’ home can be tricky and easily lost, so I hope that is the case. I and the others will be quite cross if you are simply refusing to respond to our correspondence due to anger over your lost coin.

Life at the Mountain of Many Reeds is continuing as normal. The Huntress and the Archer are moving forward with their courting and wedding planning, but they’ve threatened us with unimaginable bodily harm should something befall the tiles and they’re forced to push back the ceremony.

Please return safely and spare us the pain,

The Journeyman of Toai.

*****

The Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village,

It’s been a month, and you’re still yet to respond to our past letters. If the reason for your silence is pettiness, you’ll be getting enough fireballs and arrows shot at you that you’ll resemble a charred pincushion when we’re done.

I’ve heard some more news about the knotweed tile’s double and her seaside relocation. She’s been quickly and efficiently filling the power vacuum the Grand Lotus of Fire left when he and his followers deserted. On the surface, it appears that she’s solely working for the creeping ivy’s benefit, but as some fellow gardeners of the navy attest, she’s in the middle of a silent civil war with a certain commander. As said commander has the explicit backing of the creeping ivy, it’s easy to see that the ivy is attempting to curb the knotweed’s influence.

Whether this is due to the ivy’s paranoia, the knotweed now enjoying Pai Sho, or an entirely different reason is unclear. But either way, leave the Grand Lotus and the cherry blossoms to handle the knotweed and avoid seaside greenhouses at all cost.

Sincerely,

The Journeyman of Toai

*****

The Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village,

Tatsuya, I’m serious, answer the damn letters! We’re all sick with worry. If you don’t answer this within a week, we’re assuming that you need a rescue party, and we’re hunting you down.

Answer us, you bastard,

The Journeyman of Toai.

P.S: He wasn’t kidding about the rescue party - The Archer of Aiwasaki.

P.P.S: Nor about us being sick with worry - The Blacksmith’s Daughter.

P.P.P.S: I expect you to restock my stores of calming teas, as they were drained because of your actions - The Journeyman of the Han Clan.

*****

The Journeyman of Toai and company,

Sweet spirits, keep your swords sheathed. We’re FINE!

Due to circumstances out of our control, we were forced to reside in the dance instructors’ home for a time, and only recently returned to civilization. It’s a good thing that I instructed the Pai Sho granny to hold any possible correspondence at the last port we docked in, or else your warnings for a rescue party would have been passed up the correspondence train. At least now you know you don’t need to leave the Mountain of Many Reeds.

We’ll still be stopping at my home village, and that is NON-NEGOTIABLE. We picked up another party member at the dance instructors’ home, and the knotweed tile NEEDS my grandma’s advice if the add-on is going to stay. On the bright side, you’ll all finally learn the secret of the Reborn Dragon form. On the downside, we all have one more secret to keep. 

Stock the Mountain of Many Reeds with extra supplies. Enough to be able to withstand the Siege twice over if they had to. And warn the clan that they’ll be meeting someone most unexpected upon our return. With our new friend, we’ll have no choice but to travel by sail, so expect us home again in three months or so.

The tiles say to give the Huntress, her Archer, and you guys all their love, and that they can’t wait to see you.

Miss you all,

The Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village.

*****

The Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village,

While we’re all ecstatic about the knowledge that you’re safe, your letter has left us with more questions than answers.

‘Due to circumstances out of our control,’ what does THAT mean? Were you caught in a storm? Was one of you injured? Are you all alright? I assume so, as you would have made note of any injuries in your last letter, but we’re all still confused.

‘The knotweed tile NEEDS my grandma’s advice if the add-on is going to stay,’ that certainly raises even more questions. What knowledge does your grandmother possess that it’s vital for you to visit her?

‘Stock the Mountain of Many Reeds with extra supplies. Enough to be able to withstand the Siege twice over if they had to,’ okay, that’s just downright alarming. Have you learned of a possible assault on the base? If so, why haven’t you contacted one of the clansmen about such a threat to their home?

And I don’t even know where to start with the ‘new friend’ you mentioned throughout the letter. Did you find a dance instructor? A living one, and not just some priceless artifact from the ruins? Do they need to eat monstrous amounts to function?

Please answer these questions,

The Very Confused Journeyman of Toai.

*****

The Journeyman of Toai,

Good news, you don’t need to Siege stock the Mountain. I overreacted in my last letter and didn’t understand how much our new friend needed to eat. 

Grandma met with the knotweed tile and the new friend and they hashed out what said new friend needed to survive. And yes, the ‘new friend’ is a dance instructor, though probably not the kind you’re thinking of. The circumstances out of our control were the preparations the dance instructor needed to leave their home island, and while they may need extra food in the future, grandma assured me that the dance instructor will need a little more than the average person per week for the next decade or so. I can’t wait for you and the others to meet them. It’ll be interesting, to say the least.

The knotweed tile and the white dragon tile are teaching the fire lily to sail. He’s still a bit unsure on the open water, but his friends and the new guy keep him calm. We’re on the final island of the archipelago, and should be landing in Danhou shortly. From there, we travel by land back to the Mountain of Many Reeds, and then we’ll be home. I’ll be sure to avoid the seaside gardens until then, and trust you to keep the Huntress from killing me upon arrival.

The tiles send their love, as usual, and the knotweed tile wants the Huntress’s promise that they won’t be mad about bringing a stray home.

Yours,

The Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village.

*****

The Journeyman of a Simple Fishing Village,

The Huntress says that the knotweed better not have brought back a dog of some sort, a cat of some sort, or a paddling of turtleducks. I say as long as the stray is well-cared for, I couldn’t care less at this point.

Stay safe and get home soon,

The Journeyman of Toai

Chapter Text

“Whoa!”

Tatsuya chuckled at the awe-struck looks on Zuko and Kou’s faces, “That was my first reaction, too.”

“It’s so, so…” Kou couldn’t find the words as he stared down at the ancient buildings that had seen so much of the world.

“Spectacular.” Zuko finished for him. “Let’s head down!”

“Ap-pup-pup-pup,” Tatsuya grabbed the prince’s collar before he could descend the mountain cliff, “Ground rules first. I will not get reamed out by Tamotsu for getting one of you killed.”

Zuko pouted a bit, but rescinded, relaxing in the man’s hold and giving him a waiting look.

“Number one: don’t disturb anything. These ruins have been here long before any of us, and they better be here long after us, too. If I have to scale the mountain and save you two from some building or wall that you decided to bring down, you’ll never hear the end of it.”

“You’re not coming with us?” Kou asked, surprised and a little stricken.

“Nope. Rule number two: this is your test, and I expect you to handle it as such. I have every faith you will pass, but you have to do this on your own. Mai and I will stay up here and keep an eye out in case you need it.”

The sullen girl gave a quiet, reassuring nod, and Tatsuya continued, “Rule three: if you break rule number one and do end up disturbing anything, please, for the love of Agni, don’t break it. Don’t tempt fate and bring home any wayward spirits that are pissed about you tramping across their burial ground. Just. Don’t. Please.”

“And finally,” he ended with a smirk, “If you see a dragon, don’t freak out too bad. They're mostly friendly. Probably. Maybe.”

“Enough with the dragon jokes, Tatsuya,” Zuko grumbled, “They’ve long since worn off.”

“Alright, fine. Send up a fireball if you need us. And good luck.”

Zuko and Kou bowed to their instructor and made one last check of their bags. Mai slipped them both a small dagger, just in case, and with that, the two boys started making their way down the mountainside and into the heart of the ruins.

*****

“You know, I don’t get why you get so worked up over Tatsuya’s dragon comments,” Kou said easily as he and his friend walked side-by-side down the mountain path, “It’s just a few jokes. What’s the harm?”

“There’s no harm, really,” Zuko idly tossed Mai’s dagger into the air, and caught it by the handle, “I’d just think they’ve gotten annoying. I’m not a little kid anymore, he doesn’t need to try and convince me that some dragons are still alive somewhere.”

“But wouldn’t it be cool if they were?” Kou asked, “Who wouldn’t want to tame a dragon and ride off into the sunset?”

“Fitting wish for this place,” Zuko took stock of their surroundings and slowly started approaching the buildings proper rather than skirt at the very edge of the ruins, “Did you know that the Sun Warriors were the only people to ever tame dragons?”

“Really? But if they had dragons, how’d they die out? I can’t exactly see an entire civilization with access to real, actual dragons just disappearing overnight.”

“No one knows. It’s like they just vanished off the face of the earth. One day there, the next day,” Zuko slipped the dagger into his sleeve and held up his bare hands, “Poof.”

“Huh,” Kou said thoughtfully. They continued in silence for a while, until Zuko swung out his arm and stopped Kou from stepping on a tripwire.

“Watch your step.” Zuko contemplated the wire for a bit, before kneeling down and cutting it cleanly with a blade. A moment after it was struck, the wire sagged, and the trap was loosed, revealing hidden spikes that rose steadily from the area in front of them.

“Zuko, how old did you say the Sun Warriors were?”

“A few thousand years, at least.”

“Then why the working traps?”

Zuko ran his fingers over the cut wire, “I don’t know. But if there are traps, then that means there’s something worth protecting.”

Backing up a few paces, Zuko took a running start and leaped over the spiked walkway. Kou did the same, shooting a little fire out of his feet to clear the pit. As the two dusted themselves off, Zuko resheathed his knife and helped Kou up, “Stay alert. Navigating through all of this could be a part of the test.”

Kou gave a nod, and the two marched on. They made their way past crumbling building after crumbling building, most of which were surprisingly intact. A few were even in near-perfect condition, save for the lack of roofs. Kou guessed that they must have been made of bamboo, or some other plant that had rotted away over time. They checked a few of them for clues but didn’t find anything beyond a few household items that they left alone.

Eventually, they stood before the steps of the final building in the area that they had yet to investigate. A monolith of a temple that seemed ancient, even in comparison to the rest of the ruins. With a bit of hesitancy, the two ascended the stairs side by side.

“Kou,” Zuko said when they were about halfway up, “Does any of this seem…familiar to you?”

Kou thought for a moment, “No, not really. I mean, it’s large like Pohuai, but not familiar familiar, you know? Why?”

“It's just. It feels like I’ve seen this before. It kind of reminds me of the Fire Sages’ temples, but not quite.”

“Maybe you were a Sun Warrior in your past life,” Kou wondered as they climbed the final step and stood before a locked gate with a large sunstone in the center. 

Zuko pointed at the markings on the circular doorway and traced them with his eyes. “This looks like a solar calendar. I don’t understand the writing, but I think this only opens on a certain day.”

Kou cocked his head and thought, “Is this part of the test? Are we meant to wait and meditate here until the door opens?”

“Why would we do that?”

“Test of patience?”

Zuko snorted, “Then that’s a test we’re doomed to fail. June’ll kill us if we miss her wedding.”

“Well, unless you’ve got a secret firebending technique that can move the entire sun, we’re either stuck waiting, or we have to move onto another area.”

Zuko examined the door once more and felt along the marks. Out of the corner of his eye, Zuko saw a small beam of light reflect off of the dagger Mai gave Kou. The healer had tucked it into his belt and let the blade hang low where it caught the light and bent the mid-day sun onto one of the glyphs on the doorway. With a lightning flash of inspiration and a bit of his lip, Zuko pulled out his dual dao.

“Zuko, I know you and Mai stab all your problems, but that’s not going to work on a stone door.”

“I’m not stabbing it,” Zuko grumbled, moving through his katas, and seeing where the light landed on the arch, “I’m trying to trick it.”

“How?”

“The door opens on a certain day, right? Well, if the sun’s supposed to hit the stone up there to open it, then I should be able to…” Zuko froze in form four and saw let the light burn into the sunstone. After a few moments of waiting, the door creaked, then moaned, and then finally gave a mighty shiver as it heaved open.

“Got it!” Zuko cried.

“Great. Now, what happens when we go in and the stone stops receiving light?”

“Huh?” Zuko nearly dropped his stance as Kou walked forwards and stood between the reflected light beam and the glowing stone.

“If it’s built to open on a certain day, that means that on that day, it will be receiving light constantly. But if it stops receiving that light--”

With the cutting sound of hard stone grinding against hard stone, the double doorway slammed shut.

“That would happen.”

Zuko sheathed his blades and pouted at Kou, “Alright then, what would you recommend, oh wise one?”

“If there’s one thing I’ve learned from you, Mai, and the Yuyan, it’s that there’s always another way in.” Kou hooked his arm through Zuko’s elbow and started dragging him along the perimeter of the pyramid’s highest level, “Let’s see if we can’t find the Sun Warriors’ secret entrance.”

The two searched along the outside of the building until they circled back around to the front door with no luck. Determined, Kou tightened his bag and the rest of his gear, before backing up to the edge of the level, and rushed towards the high stone wall. With a leap boosted by his bending, Kou snagged a loose stone that was jutting out of the wall and offered his hand down to Zuko. The prince took a similar running leap, grabbed Kou’s hand, and then blasted the rest of his way up and rolled onto the roof. He pulled his friend up, and the two examined the empty rooftop, save for the skylight shining down into the hall.

Zuko and Kou shared a smile before the two worked to pull the skylight’s iron bars off onto the roof. Zuko was the first to drop down into the chamber, and once he verified that it was safe, Kou dropped down as well.

Lighting a small fireball in his hands, Zuko examined the space with his and the sunlight’s rays, “It just looks like a room full of statues.”

“Dual statues. Look, the two sides mirror each other,” said Kou, lighting his own fireball. He took a look at the circle and walked towards the beginning of the pattern. There was a gap where it looked like the door was, and Kou caught sight of the words etched into the plate of the beginning statue. It looked to be the same language that was on the solar calendar outside, and Kou didn’t know what to make of it.

He took a step back to attempt to get a better angle of the monolithic statue, he heard a small click and felt his step sink a little beneath him. Kou shifted from side to side and felt more than saw the mechanisms built into the floor.

“Zuko!”

“What? Is everything okay?”

“Everything’s fine. Just, go over to the other statue and copy the pose. But make sure you’re standing right where I am.”

“Okay?” Zuko did as Kou told him, and gasped when he felt the same shifting mechanisms.

“I think it’s a puzzle of some kind,” said Kou, “We have to do the moves just like the statues do.”

“I think it needs to be in unison, too,” said Zuko, “Why else would there be the mirror images?”

“Alright then. Ready?” said Kou, as he copied the first statue, standing tall on one leg with his two arms raised towards the sky, “One.”